Mahatma Gandhi The Journalist PDF

Mahatma Gandhi
The Journalist
Going Through the Proofs
[ Courtesy ; Kanu Gandhi]
Mahatma Gandhi
The Journalist
S. IsT. BHATTACHARYYA
ASIA PUBLISHING HOUSE

BOMBAY CALCUTTA NEW DELHI MADRAS
• • •
LUCKNOW BANGALORE LONDON - NEW YORK

* •
Sailendra Natb Bhattacharyya (1921)
Copyright <© by S. N. Bhattacharyya 1965
PRINTED nsr INDIA

BY M. O. DANIEL AT THOMPSON & CJO PRIVATE LTD.
MADRAS-1 AND PUBLISHED BY P. S. JAYASINGHE
.ASIA PUBLISHING HOUSE, BOMBAY—
To
STHITI
who relieved me of many
onerous tasks so that I could
devote time to this book
The objective of joxirnalism is service.
Mahatma Gandhi
Speak of me as I am nothing extenuate

;
Nor set down aught in malice

Othello, V 2.
Introduction
“ Lord Linlithgow, the Viceroy at New Delhi, said to me, ‘Gandhi

is the biggest thing in India.’ That
is correct. Gandhi is a unique
phenomenon.” Thus wrote Louis Fischer in his book A Week

with Gandhi .
That he was unique among men, need not be reiterated. He

was original in whatever he did. He said something new when-
ever he spoke. “ He thinks aloud and the entire process is
for the record.” A discussion with him on any subject was a
**
voyage of discovery
His life, whatever activity he was involved in, was an experi-
ment with truth. He could and did take a detached view of
everything and so was able to bring out the best.
Whatever work he laid his gentle hands on, he did it with a
sincerity of purpose. That always lent strength to the cause. His
minute care for details and clear thinking regarding the ultimate
objective — good of the people —made all his projects successful.
And, his role as a journalist was no exception.
The purpose of this book is to bring his contributions in
this sphere to the limelight so that those working in the line
could be benefited. To quote Shri Jawaharlal Nehru: “To him
life was an integrated whole, a closely woven garment of many
colours. A word to a child, a touch of healing to a sufferer,
was as important as a resolution of challenge to the British
Empire.”
Gandhiji once said : cc My life is my message.” So a journalist
ought to be interested in finding out the particular message he
preached and practised in the field of journalism. It will be
found that his preachings and practices were nothing but selfless
Introduction
service. Like Wickham Steed, he believed that the printing and

setting of news or views, were social services.
There are many books on Gandhiji dealing with different
aspects of his eventful life. This is an addition to that varied list.
In the course of this work, the more the author plunged into the
background materials, the more conscious he became of the vastness
of the subject and his obvious limitations. During the last seven
years that the author was collecting materials on the subject, he
met or corresponded with many valued associates of Gandhiji,
most of whom gladly helped him. He is grateful to them all and
does not want to mention individual names, lest they feel embar-
rassed.
S. N. Bhattacharyya
Acknowledgments
The author gratefully acknowledges the permission accorded so

generously by the Navajivan Trust, Ahmedabad, for using quota-
tions from Mahatma Gandhi’s writings, speeches, etc., and also to
authors and publishers, for extracts from the following :
My Childhood with Gandhiji by Prabhudas Gandhi ; Mahatma
Gandhi: The Last Phase by Pyarelal ; The Nation’s Voice edited
by C. Rajagopalachari and J. C. Kumarappa ; Stray Glimpses of
Bapu by Kaka Kalelkar (all published by Navajivan Publishing
House, Ahmedabad) Gujarat and its Literature by K. M. Munshi,
;
published by Bharatiya Vidya Bhavan, Bombay; Gandhi The:
Master by K. M. Munshi, published by M/s. Rajkamal Publica-

tions, Delhi ; Mr. Gandhi The Man by Millie Graham Polak
: ;
Incidents of and
Gandhiji* s Life Reminiscences of Gandhiji edited
by Chandrashanker Shukla, published by Vora 8c Co., Publishers,
Bombay A Bunch of Old Letters by Jawaharlal Nehru A History
; ;
of the Press in India by S. Natarajan and Indian Writing in English

by K. R. Srinivasa Iyengar (all published by Asia Publishing
House, Bombay); All Through the Gandhian Era by A. S. Iyengar
and At the Feet of Mahatma Gandhi by Raj endra Prasad, published
by Hind Kitabs Ltd., Bombay Gandhi : A Study by Hiren
;
Mukherjee, published by National Book Agency (Private) Ltd.,

Calcutta The History of the Indian National Congress Vols. I
; ,
and II by Dr. Pattabhi Sitaramayya, published by Padma Publica-

tions Ltd., Bombay; In the Shadow of the Mahatma by G.D. BirJa,
published by Orient Longmans Ltd., Bombay Mahatma
;
—
Life
of Mohandas Karamchand Gandhi by D. G. Tendulkar, published
by V. K. Jhaveri and D. G. Tendulkar, Bombay ;Seven Months
with Mahatma Gandhi by Krishnadas, published by S. Ganesan 8c
Acknowledgments
Co., Madras Mahatma Gandhi by H. S. L. Polak, H. N. Brails-

;
ford and Lord Pethick-Lawrence, published by Odhams Press Ltd.,

London ; The Indian Press by Margarita Bams and My Gandhi by
J. H. Holmes, published by George Allen & Unwin Ltd.,
London ;
My Early Life by Sir Winston Churchill, published by M/s.
Thornton Butterworth Ltd., London;
Essays on Education by
Whitney Griswold, published by the Yale University Press, New
Haven, Conn. (U.S.A.) ; The Press the Public Wants by Kingsley
Martin, published by The Hogarth Press, London ; The Wit and
Wisdom of Gandhi, edited by Homer A. Jack, published by
M/s. Allyn & Beacon, Boston ; Principles of Newspaper Manage-
ment by J. E. Pollard, published by McGraw-Hill Book Co., New
York ; A Week with Gandhi by Louis Fischer, published by Inter-
national Book House, Bombay.
Excerpts from A Free and Responsible Press, a report of the
Commission on Freedom of the Press, U.S.A. published by the
,
University of Chicago Press, Chicago, Illinois ; The Educational

Role of the Press by Henry De Jourenel & others, published by
the League of Nations, Paris ;
Impressions of Mahatma Gandhi :
A Portrait by the British Broadcasting Corporation, London, have

also been used.
The author is grateful to the Commonwealth Press Union for
making use of Lord Shawcross’ Address ; to the United Nations,
for Mon. S. Lopez, Report on the Freedom of the Press and to
Associated Press of America for quotations from an interview
with Gandhiji conducted by Preston Gover.
x
Contents
Introduction vii
Acknowledgments 1X
List of Illustrations xii
1 A FREE-LANCE JOURNALIST I
2 SPONSOR OR EDITOR 8
3 RUNNING THE DESK 70
4 EDITOR WITH A DIFFERENCE 86
5 MANAGING THE PAPER 100
6 CURSE OF ADVERTISEMENT 116
7 LIBERTY OF THE PRESS 135
8 IN RETROSPECT AND PROSPECT 156
Bibliography 171
Institutions Founded or Guided by Gandhiji 186
Index 18?
List of Illustrations
/
Going through the proofs Frontispiece
t Writing an editorial for the paper -s
2 Replying to correspondents* queries
3 Reading the printed copy between

96 and 97
4 Talking to the journalists on board the steam-
|
launch in Noakhali, Bengal
J
5 Papers Gandhiji edited

j
A Free-Lance Journalist
When on arrival in London in September 1888, to study

law, Gandhiji, at the age of nineteen, for the first time read a
newspaper, he could scarcely imagine at that time, how actively he
would be associated with the newspaper world for the rest of his life.
Gandhiji would spend hours devouring the columns of the Daily
Telegraph, the Daily News and the Pall Mall Gazette. Travel
stories, with plenty of illustrations, fascinated him particularly.
Newspaper reading was a novel experience for him as to quote him
“ In India I had never had read a newspaper ”. 1
Incidentally, we may mention here that Gandhiji was bom
in 1869, the same year when the Suez Canal was opened, linking
the East with the West. A few years earlier, both the submarine
and land telegraph lines were laid between England and India.
Reuter’s news services were also extended to India. A
year before
Gandhiji’s birth, i.e. 1868, the Amrita Bazar Pat rika of Calcutta was
started. Six years later. The Statesman also started its publication.
Newspapers were not only informative and entertaining to
him, they made him ambitious as well. Why not write articles for
them ? The desire latent in a human being —
and he was quite
young then — to see his name and article in print was too
great a temptation to resist. His friendship with the members
of the London Vegetarian Society afforded him an opportunity
to write for its organ the Vegetarian. He contributed, during his
stay of about three years in England, nine articles on diet, customs,
festivals, etc., of the Indians. These are Iris earliest writings on
record.
1
M. K. Gandhi: An Autobiography or The Story of My Experiments with
Truth (Navaji van Publishing House, Ahmedabad, 1956), p. 47.
O—
Mahatma Gandhi—The Journalist
The first one was published in the issue of February 7, 1891,

under the caption :
*
Indian Vegetarian \ Here he dispels the
common belief that all Indians arc vegetarians and lists the food
habits of vegetarians in different parts of his country. In conclusion,
he mentions, “ en passant that the cow is an object of worship
among the Hindus, and a movement set on foot to prevent the —
cows from being shipped off for the purpose of slaughter, is
progressing rapidly ”,
In another article in the journal dated March 28, 1891, Ire
describes important Indian religious ceremonies under the caption:

4
Some Indian Festivals Travel stories which stirred his
imagination earlier now enthused him to write these. On reaching
4
India, he sent to the Vegetarian the travelogue: On my way home
again to India It was published in two parts
'. in the issues —
dated April and April 16, 1892. Three years of writing and
9,
staying abroad enlarged not only his scope of writing but made
him a better and more accomplished free-lance journalist. Here
is a sample. On the return journey, the ship was caught in
a storm and in that background he wrote :
“ If I ventured out
on the dock I was splashed with water. There goes a crash ;
something broken. In the cabin you cannot sleep quietly. The
door is hanging. Tour bags begin to dance. You roll in your
bed. You sometimes feel as if At the dinner
the ship is sinking.
table you are no more comfortable. The steamer rolls on your
sides. Your forks and spoons are in your lap, even the cruel
stand and the soup plate your napkin
dyed yellow and so on."*
; is
A struggling barrister of Bombay

he was at the time, he
that
had to do something more tangible than ndulging in non-rcmuncra-i
tive journalism. In April, 1893, he sailed for South

Africa, after
getting an offer from Dada Abdullah and Co., to defend
one of
their cases.
South Africa not only shaped many of the ideas and traits of
Gandhiji, but made an out-and-out journalist of him as well. If
the London Vegetarian Society afforded him
a forum to write
and speak, the political situation in South Africa chiselled
him
into a conscientious journalist. He was thrown
into the whirlpool
of politics. While fighting incessantly against all disabilities
imposed on Indians, through representation,
petition, memo-
* Vegetarian (London, April 16 1892).
,
2
randurn, etc., lie did not, for a moment, minimize the important
role of newspapers. He would scan through all local papers
and reply suitably to any misrepresentation or distortion of facts.
Soon he became well known to the newspaper men in South Africa
for his zeal in expounding the causes of the Indians.
During the brief spell in India, from the middle of 1896 to
November 1896, the year when Marconi invented wireless tele-
graphy, he was touring the country to enlist the support, among

others, of editors for the South African Indian cause. In a letter
to the editor of The Times of India he w rote r “ Publicity is our
:
”. 3
best and perhaps the only weapon of defence
He met Mr. Chesney, editor of The Pioneer, Allahabad, who
editorially commented on the Green Pamphlet —
his book des-
cribing the condition of Indians in South Africa. Shri G. P. Pillay,
editor of The Madras Standard, literally placed the paper at
Gandhiji's disposal. Gandhiji was not only supplying background
material for editorials, but was also improving on those written
by others. His mastery of facts and details was instantly recognized
and appreciated. The editor of The Hindu was equally helpful.
Soon he came in touch with editors of The Amrita Bazar Patrika
and Bangabasi of Calcutta. He established good contact with
The Statesman as well. The following extracts of the interview
with The Statesman representative will be of interest as it focuses
in a nutshell, the main Indian problem in South Africa. Inci-
dentally, Gandhiji was now known in India through his famous
Green Pamphlet wherein he highlighted the grievances of his
countrymen in Africa.
“Will you please tell me, Mr. Gandhi, in a few words,” The
Statesman interviewer asked, “ something of the grievances of the
”
Indians in South Africa ?
“There are Indians," Mr. Gandhi replied, “in many parts
of South Africa —
in the Colonies of Natal, the Cape of Good
Hope, and elsewhere —
in all of which, more or less, they are
denied the ordinary rights of citizenship. But 1 more particularly
represent the Indians in Natal, who number about fifty thousand
in a total population of some five hundred thousand. The first
Indians were, of course, the coolies who were taken over under
indentures from Madras and Bengal for the purpose of labouring
* The Times of India (Bombay, October 20, 1896).
3
Mahatma Gandhi —The Journalist
in the various plantations. They were mostly Hindus, but a few

of them were Mohamedans. They served their contract time, and
on obtaining their freedom they elected to stay in the country,
because they found that, as market gardeners or hawkers of vege-
tables, they could earn from three to four pounds sterling per
month. In this way, there are, at present, about thirty thousand
free Indians settled in the Colony, while some sixteen thousand
others are serving their indentures. There is, however, another
class of numbering about 5,000 Mohamedans from
Indians,
the Bombay side who have been attracted to the country by the
prospects of trade. Some of the latter are doing well. Many are
landowners in a large way, while two own ships. The Indians have
been settled in the country for 20 years or more, and being pros-
perous were contented and happy.”
“What then, was the cause of all the present trouble,
”
Mr. Gandhi ?
“Simply trade jealousy. The Colony was desirous of securing
all possible benefit from the Indians as labourers, because the
natives of the country will not work in the fields, and the Europeans
cannot. But the moment the Indian entered into competition
with the European as a trader, he found himself thwarted,
obstructed and insulted by a system of organized persecution.
And gradually, this feeling of hatred
and oppression has been
imported into the laws of the Colony. The Indians had been
quietly enjoying the franchise for years, subject to certain property
qualifications, and in 1894, there were 251 Indian voters on the
register against 9,309 European voters. But the Government
suddenly thought, or pretended to think, that there was danger
of the Asiatic vote swamping the European, and they introduced
into the Legislative Assembly a Bill disfranchising all Asiatics ’*«
Gandhiji writes in his autobiography : “ Mr. Saunders, editor

of the Englishman, claimed me as his own. He placed his office and
paper at my disposal. He even allowed me the liberty of making
whatever changes I liked in the leading article
he had written on
the situation, the proof of which he sent me in advance.” 5
Gandhiji kept a full account of the expenditure for promoting
4
The Statesman (New Delhi, November 12, 1896).
5
M. K. Gandhi : An
Autobiography or The Story of My
Experiments with
Truth (Navajivan Publishing House, Ahmedabad,
1956), pp. 181-182.
4
the cause of Indians in South Africa. In tire detailed note sub-

mitted to the Natal Indian Congress, there is the following entry. 6
5th July (1896)

Rs. As. P.
Carriage from morning to afternoon and
previous evening at Allahabad — visiting
editors, etc. 6 0 0
Acquaintance with editors and working closely with the editorial

staffof the newspapers helped Gandhiji in acquiring some inside
knowledge of the working of these papers. This emboldened him
to start one journal in South Africa. The following interview
on board the * Courland off Durban, with the representative
'
of the Natal Advertiser on January 13, 1897, i.e. immediately on

return from India, will throw more light on the subject.
Q. “Have the Indian Congress no intention of starting a newspaper in
”
Natal ?
A. “ There was an intention, not by the Indian Congress, but by a body
of workers who sympathize with the Congress, of starting a paper, but that
idea had to be given up, simply because I could not see my way to devote my
time to that and other work. I had instructions to bring material and Indian
type, but as I found it would be impossible for me to work it, I did not bring
anything. Had I been able to persuade the gentlemen with whom I was negotiat-
ing to come over here, I might have brought the material, but as that
fell do so/'
through, I did not
While a student in London, Gandhiji got acquainted with
Mr. DadabhaiNaoroji, leader of the Indian community in England,
who in 1890 started the journal India, dealing mainly with topics of
Indian interest. Gandhiji became the journal’s * Durban, Johan-
nesburg and South African correspondent’. It is not certain
whether he was a self-appointed correspondent or one maintained
by India on an honorarium basis. In any case, Gandhiji’s purpose
was served. He was ventilating the grievances of Indians in
South Africa. Here is a telegram sent by him, and which was
published in India on 9 September, 1896.
“ The court has decided that the Government has power to remove Indians
in the Transvaal to locations for both trade and residence. Judge Jorrisen
dissented from the decision. Great consternation prevails. It is feared that the
removal to locations may paralyse trade. Large interests are at stake. We are
6
The Collected Works of Mahatma Gandhi (The Publications Division,
Delhi, 1959), Vol. II, p. 139,
5
relying upon Mr. Chamberlain's promise to make representations to the

Transvaal Government after the trial of a test case, which, he said, was neces-
." 7
sary to secure a definite issue
The famine that broke out in India in 1897, worried Gandhiji
very much. The Central Famine Committee, Calcutta, appealed
to the British Colonies for contributions. Gandhiji took up the
cause for the service of humanity and wrote among others the
following letter, dated February 2, 1897, to the editor. The
Natal Mercury .
Sir,
I venture to offer a few remarks on the Indian famine, regarding which
appeal for funds has been made to the British Colonies. It is not perhaps
generally known that India is the poorest country in the world, in spite of the
fabulous accounts of the riches of her Rajahas and Maharajahas. The highest
Indian authorities state that “ the remaining fifth (i.e., of the population of
British India), or 40,000,000, go through life on insufficient food." This is the
normal condition of British India. Famines, as a rule, recur in India every
four years. It must not be difficult to imagine what the condition of the people
would be at such a time in that poverty stricken country. Children are snatched
from their mothers, wives from their husbands. Whole tracts are devastated,
and this in spite of the precautions taken by a most benevolent Government....
The present famine bids fair to beat the record in point of severity. The
distress has already become acute. The worst time has yet to come, when
summer sets in. This is the first time, I believe, that the British Colonies have
been appealed to from India, and it is to be hoped the response will be
generous....
October 1899 was a landmark in the free-lance journalism of
Gandhiji. The Boer War broke out and Gandhiji, with Indian
volunteers, offered his services for tending the sick and the wounded
in the battle-field. Once in the job, he gained first hand experience
of the battle-field. He recorded these experiences for publication
, in the Times of India of Bombay. Gandhiji thus joined the band
of early war correspondents. Incidentally, the Boer War also
saw another famous man as a war correspondent. This was
Mr. Winston Churchill. While Mr. Churchill, five years younger
and a soldier, startled the reading public of England by his inter-
pretative war despatches and military exposures, Gandhiji
was,
by contrast, a detailed chronicler, mostly confined to the activities
of the Indian Ambulance Corps. It helped him in discovering in
himself a journalist of no mean talent. At times he was
poetic,
even in the grim surrounding. Speaking later in
Calcutta, he
7
Ibid. (1960), Vol. m, p. 17,
6
compared the perfect order at the front and holy stillness to those
of a Trappist monastery. He said :
“ Tommy was then altogether lovable. Like Arjun, they went

to the battle-field because it was their duty. And how many
proud, rude, savage spirits has it not broken into gentle creatures
of God?"
In his despatch to the Times of India Weekly, published on
June 16, 1900, Gandhiji gives a detailed account of the Ambulance
Corps, quoting copiously eulogies from local papers. In these
despatches he introduced what we now call the human interest
story in order to break the monotony of the narrative. He tells
how “ An Indian woman who lives on the daily sale of her fruits
is reported, on the soldiers landing at tire Durban Wharf, to have
emptied the whole contents of her basket into Tommy’s huck

saying that was all she could give that day.” 8
A student of journalism would like to compare such material
with the vigour of language, knowledge of military science and
purposiveness of Mr. Churchill, when he was sending despatches
to his paper, the Morning Post.
“ We must face facts. The individual Boor, mounted in a suitable country,
isworth from three to five regular soldiers. The power of modem rifles is so
tremendous that frontal attacks must often be repulsed. The extraordinary
mobility of the enemy protects his flanks. The only way of treating the
problem is either to get men equal in character and intelligence as riflemen,
or, failing the individual, huge masses of troops."
Then, in the same despatch, a passionate appeal :

“ Are the gentlemen of England all fox-hunting '? Why not an English
Light Horse ? For the sake of our manhood, our devoted colonists and our
soldiers, we must persevere with the war.”*
* Ibid. (I960), Vol. Ill, p. 141.

* Winston Churchill : My Early Life (Thornton Butterworth Ltd., London,
1930), pp. 316-317,
7
2 Sponsor Or Editor
/
A. Indian Opinion
Launching of theweekly the Indian Opinion was no

accident. Circumstances were leading to the establishment of a
journal in South Africa which could voice effectively the feelings
of Indians living under the worst form of apartheid.
The primary activities of the Natal Indian Congress, founded
in 1893 by Gandhiji’s initiative, were to safeguard Indian interests
and acquaint the Englishmen in S. Africa and England and the
people of India with the conditions in Natal.
Publicity, as will be seen, was in Gandhiji's blood and he had
a knack for it. Even before this direct plunge into the field of
journalism, he cultivated, as we have seen earlier, friendship with
the editors of influential journals. That was not the age of micro-
phone or radio. His feeble voice could not reach thousands of
Indians scattered all over South Africa. Nor could he inform
the world outside about the state of affairs in Africa. The Congress
had no newspaper of its own. Exposition of the Indian cause could
not be expected from the existing ones, mostly in the hands of
vested interests. Those who controlled the press, he realised soon,
could create a public opinion. He recorded later :
“ I believe that a struggle which chiefly relies upon internal strength cannot
be wholly carried on without a newspaper —
it is also my experience that we
could not perhaps have educated the local Indian community, nor kept Indians
all over the world in touch with the course of events in South Africa in any
other way, with the same ease and success as through the Indian Opinion, which
therefore was certainly a most useful and potent weapon in our struggle." 1
1
M. K. Gandhi ; Satyagraha in South Africa (Navajivan Publishing House,
Ahmedabad, 1950), p. 142,
8
Sponsor or Editor
Shri Madanjit Vyavaharik was an ex-schoolmaster of Bombay

and a political co-worker of Gandhiji in South Africa. He
established a press — The International Printing Press — at
113 Grey Street, Durban, in 1898. Many of the pamphlets and
brochures of the Natal Congress inspired, if not actually written,
by Gandhiji, were printed in that press. Gandhiji was also able to
inspire Madanjit with the idea to start a weekly. Thus the Indian
Opinion started its publication and the first issue was out on June 4,
1903, though Gandhiji, in his autobiography, gives the date
as 1904.
4
Mr. George Hendrick, in the article Gandhi, Indian Opinion
and Freedom wrote ’
:
“Even the date Indian Opinion began publication is almost always given
incorrectly (Gandhi remembered it 1904) and biographers and bibliographers
have continued to give 1904 date instead of 4th June 1903.” 2
The first editorial — *
Ourselves ’
— an unsigned one, was
writtenby Gandhiji. This is quoted below for the simplicity of
language and direct appeal of the content :
We need offer no apology for making an appearance. The Indian

community in South Africa is a recognised factor in the body politic, and
a newspaper, voicing its feelings, and specially devoted to its cause, would hardly
be considered out of place indeed, we think, it would supply a longfelt want.
:
The Indians, resident in British South Africa, loyal subjects though they are
of the King-Emperor, labour under a number of legal disabilities which, it is
contended on their behalf, are undeserved and unjust. The reason of this
state of affairs is to be found in the prejudice in the minds of the Colonists,
arising out of misunderstanding the actual status of the Indian as a British
subject, the close relations that render him kin to Colonists, as the dual title
of the Crowned Head so significantly pronounces, and the unhappy
forgetfulness of the great services India has always rendered to the Mother
Country ever since Providence brought loyal Hind under the flag of Britannia.
It will be our endeavour, therefore, to remove the misunderstanding by placing
facts in their true light before the public.

Wo are far from assuming that the Indians here are free from all the faults
that are ascribed to them. Wherever we find them to be at fault, we will
unhesitatingly point out and suggest means for its removal. Our country-
it
men in South Africa are without the guiding influence of the institutions that
exist in India and that impart the necessary moral tone when it is wanting.
Those that have immigrated as children, or are bom in the Colony, have no
opportunity of studying the past history of the nation to which they belong,
or of knowing its greatness. It will be our duty, so far as it may be in our
1
Gandhi Marg (Gandhi Smarak Nidhi, Rajghat, New Delhi, 1958), Vol. II,
No, 2, p. 155,
9
Mahatma Gandhi — The Journalist
power, to supply these wants by inviting contributions from competent
writers in England, in India, and in this sub-continent.
Time alone will is right. But we can do very

prove our desire to do what
little unaided. on generous support from our countrymen, may we
We rely
hope for it from the great Anglo-Saxon race that hails His Majesty Edward
VII as King-Emperor ? For, there is nothing in our programme but a desire
to promote harmony and good-will between the different sections of the one
mighty Empire."
In the same issue, the second leading article *
The British
k
Indians in South Africa’, as also short notes like ls it fair',
6 v
6
Virtuous Inconsistency \ Better late than never Words and
deeds’, *
Minute by the Mayor', were written by Gandhiji.
Most of the articles by him, unlike those of Young India or
Harijan , were unsigned.
Shri Madanjit, as proprietor of the Indian Opinion , gave the
following information, as printed on the first page of the first issue,
for the consumption of all readers. The underlying spirit is in

tune with the main editorial quoted earlier and Gandhiji's influence
is unmistakably manifest.
“This weekly newspaper is published in four languages namely English,
Gujarati, Tamil and Hindi in the interests of the British Indians residing in
South Africa.
The policy of the paper would be to advocate the cause of the British
Indians in the sub-continent. But while it would insist upon the rights of
the community, would not be slow to point out to it its responsibilities also
it
as members of a mighty Empire. It would persistently endeavour to bring
about a proper understanding between the two communities which Providence

has brought togethei under one flag.
The advantages to the Indian community in subscribing to and supporting
this paper would be —
(i) It would have a newspaper that would advocate its cause as well as
give to all sectionsits news in their own languages.
(ii) It would contain news specially affecting Indians

of all parts of South
Africa, besides local and general information.
(iii) It would contain an epitome of events happening
in India,
(iv) Itwould give commercial intelligence.
(v) It would contain contributions from competent writers, Indians as
well as Europeans, on all subjects —
Social, Moral, and Intellectual.
The advantages to the European community would be —

<0 The paper would give it an idea of Indian thought and
aspirations.
(ii) would acquaint it with such Indian matters as are not commonly
It
known to it, and yet which should not be ignored by the true Imperialists,
10
Sponsor ofiEditor
To Europeans and Indians alike, it would serve as the best advertising Medium
in those branches of the trade in which Indians are especially concerned^,
The rate of annual subscription is 12s. 6d. in the Colony, and outsictejfhej
Colony 17s. payable in advance.
Single copies are sold at 3d. each.
Advertising charges can be had on application to the undersigned.
V. Madanjit
Proprietor, Indian Opinion
1 13, Grey Street, Durban.
As indicated, the foolscap sized, three-column journal started

publishing South African Indian news and views. It was filled
with discriminatory law cases involving Indians, and which
Gandhiji used to plead, or letters to tire editors of local newspapers
correcting false and mistaken reports concerning Indians.
Important happenings in India were also displayed. Besides, there
were contributions from ‘ competent writers on subjects * social,
’
moral and intellectual Gandhiji tried his hand on intellectual

and aesthetic subjects as well. Here is an example, being the
extract of an article on
‘
Indian Art ’
—
published in the issue
of the journal of September 17, 1903.
“... The Hindu palace-architecture of Gwalior, the Indian-Muhammadan
mosques and mausoleums of Agra and Delhi, with several of the older
Hindu temples of Southern India, stand unrivalled for grace of outline and
elaborate wealth of ornament. The Taj Mahal at Agra justifies Heber’s excla-
mation, that its builders had designed like Titans, and finished like jewellers.
The open-carved marble windows and screens at Ahmedabad furnish examples
of theskilful ornamentation which beautifies every Indian building, from the
cave monasteries of the Buddhist period downward. They also show with
what plasticity the Hindu architects adapted their Indian ornamentation to
the structural requirements of the Muhammadan mosque. English decorative
art in our day has borrowed Largely from Indian forms and patterns. The
exquisite scrolls on the rock-temples at Karla and Ajanta, the delicate marble
tracery and flat wood-carving of Western Tndia, the harmonious blending of
forms and colours in the fabrics of Kashmir, have contributed to the restora-
tion of taste in England. Indian art-work, when faithful to native designs,
still obtains the highest honours at the
international exhibition of Europe."
Gandhiji was not only contributing articles for the journal but
money as well. Journalistic adventure became increasingly
expensive for him. During the first year he had to spend £ 2,000
from his own pocket. This state of things could not be allowed
to continue, The venture had either to be stopped or he had to
II
assume the full responsibility for it. Shri Madanjit also entreated
him to take over the journal as well as the press in lieu of the
money he had invested. He agreed. It was rather a formal hand
over —
the de jure ‘recognition of the * de facto '. Both
’
Europeans and Indians in South Africa knew very well that he was
the man responsible for the journal's management and policy,
though not the editor in name. As he, in his autobiography, re-
called in a reminiscent mood “I had to bear the brunt of the
:
work, having for most of the time to be practically in charge of

the journal.” 3
But financial burden was too much for a young barrister yet to
set up lucrative practice. Nor did he realize how costly tire journal,
at the initial stage, could be. As he confesses, after getting wiser,
“ I had no notion that I should have to invest any money in the
journal.” 4
But he was not sorry for all this. In his letter of January 13,
1905, to his political guide and philosopher, Shri Gopal Krishna
Gokhale, Poona, he wrote : “ When L saw that Mr. Madanjit
could not carry on the paper without pecuniary assistance and as
I know that he was guided by thoroughly patriotic motives, I placed
at his service the bulk of my savings I have already become
responsible to the extent of nearly £ 3,500.” 8
In the same he indicated that he assumed the responsibility
letter
for the journalround about October, 1904. “Three months ago, 1
took over the whole responsibility and management. Mr. Madanjit

stillremains nominally the proprietor and publisher, because I
believe that he has done much for the community. own My
office is at present being worked in the interests of
the Indian
Opinion....”
Shri Mansukhlal Hiralal Nazar, a journalist from Bombay
was appointed the editor in which post he continued till his death
in January, 1906. In a signed obituary note in the Indian Opinion
Gandhiji, among other things wrote : “ Without him this journal
would never have come into being. In the initial stages of its
M. K. Gandhi : An Autobiography or The Story of My Experiments

with
Truth (Navajivan Publishing House, Ahmedabad,
1956), r>. 285
4
Ibid., p. 285.
* Gandhi Marg (Gandhi Smarak Nidhi, Rajghat, New Delhi, 1960), Vol. IV
p. 234.
12
Sponsor or Editor
struggle, Mr. Nazar took up almost the whole of the editorial

burden, and if it is known for its moderate policy and sound news,
the fact is due, to a very large extent, to the part that Mr. Nazar
played in connection with it.”
But that was much later. In December, 1904 the Indian Opinion
’
entered into a new phase. Under the caption ‘
Ourselves
reminding the readers of the first editorial under the same caption
of June 4, 1903, the Indian Opinion of December 24, 1904, informed
the public that the paper “ enters upon the third stage of its career
in the short space of the 18 months of its existence ”. It also gave
an account of how the paper, during the period, was run. The
proprietor “ had to depend for the editing of the paper purely on
voluntary and unpaid assistance". More urgent was the task
of enlisting paid subscribers. The Natal Indian Congress and
the British Indian Association came to the rescue, but “ the paper
all it received and wanted more ”.
continued, octopus-like, to devour
Only “ a novel and revolutionary project ", said the editorial,
could save the situation. The workers “ were to look not to the
present but to the future ; not to their pockets but to the paper
first". Gandhiji rather demanded this from the workers when
the declared policy of the journal was service. “ Jt was to educate
public opinion, to remove causes for misunderstanding, to put
before the Indians their own blemishes ; and to show them the
path of duty while they insisted on securing their rights.”
The future plan was also unfolded in the same article. “If a
piece of ground sufficiently large and far away from the hustle of
the town could be secured., for housing the plant and machinery,
each one of the workers could have his plot of land on which he
could live."
Thus the Phoenix settlement —
14 miles away from Durban
town and 2| miles from the Phoenix Railway Station came —
into being. The Indian Opinion was transferred there from Durban
and the first issue, in one sheet, was printed on a treadle machine
on the due date, i.e. December 24, 1904. In the farm everyone
had to work, drawing the same living wage —
£ 3 per head and —
attending to the press job work in spare time.
In the issue of December 31, 1904, the Gujarati edition of the
Indian Opinion published brief notes on the three Englishmen
who were assisting in the printing and publication of the paper.
13
Mr. West owned a printing press in Johannesburg. But he joined

the struggling group with 24 hours' notice. “ Now he takes from
us just enough for his bare needs, but stays on with us in the faith
that there will be profits eventually. He toils in from morning
to evening looking upon the work as his own.”
Mr. Kitchin was an electrical contractor. He joined the Indian
Opinion as “he felt that the objectives of Indian Opinion were
worthy ”. Then there was Mr. Polak. “ Since he is a man of
much simplicity and believes that he can freely express his feeling
against oppression through Indian Opinion he has informed his
chief of his intention to resign, and he will arrive here towards the
beginning of next year. Meanwhile he has started writing for the
journal
In 1905 there was the outbreak of plague in Johannesburg.
Gandhiji with a band of volunteers was fighting against this deadly
disease. Throughout this period he was writing editorials,
publishing news items and letters, drawing the attention of the
Town Council as also the Indian community to the seriousness of
the plague. He stated that he was serving a trinity of interests,
viz. “ truth, public weal and my own countrymen ”.
Gandhiji was also continuously fighting against the disabilities
suffered by the Indians in South Africa. These disabilities were
many and varied. There were restrictions on immigration and
trading on travelling in trains and cabs
; on walking on foot-
;
paths and what not. These were the result of racial arrogance and
trade policy. The columns of the Indian Opinion were full of
cases dealing with these disabilities and pleadings for sanity from
the ruling power.
“... In protesting against the importation of indentured Asiatic labour
and against the attempt to reduce ‘free' Asiatics to sub-human serfdom,
Gandhiji was moved, not by abstract theory, but by instinctive sympathy
and
profound concern for the welfare of future generations. It was this love
of
humanity (European as well as Chinese) —
and not political or economic
theory — which inspired his criticism of Mr. Skinner’s report on Chinese
labour for the mines, and which also evoked his appreciation of
Mr. Creswell's
action in resigning his post as manager of a gold mining company
because
ho could and would employ well-paid white labour, while the owners,
caring
only for profits, insisted on his employing cheap imported
labour.’’*
The Collected Works of Mahatma Gandhi (The Publications

Division,
Delhi, 1960), Vol. IV, preface, p. vii.
14
Sponsor or Editor
Narrating his experiences of those struggling days, Mr. Henry

Polak, who left his cosy job in the Critic and joined the group,
wrote :
“ The printing where the typesetting was done by hand, was run by
press,
a decrepit oil engine which frequently broke down. When this occurred, the
settlers had to resort to hand-power to turn out the paper in time for the usual
despatch of mails, often until the middle of the night. More than once, when
this happened during one of his occasional visits —he could not permanently
reside there, as his public and profeSvSional work in the Transvaal then occupied
almost all his energies I —
can recall Gandhiji literally putting his shoulder
to the wheel as energetically as any of us." 7
His wife. Mrs. Millie Polak, had also recorded interesting facts
about the printing arrangement.
“ The printing press, at this time, had no mechanical means at its disposal,
for the oil-engine had broken down, and at first animal power was utilised,
two donkeys being used to turn the handle of the machine. But Mr. Gandhi,
over a believer in man doing his own work, soon altered this, and four hefty
Zulu giils Were procured for a few hours on printing day. These took the
work in turns, two at a time, while the other two rested but every male able-
;
bodied settler, Mr. Gandhi included, took his turn at the handle, and thus
4
the copies of the raper were ground out V'*
“I remained a dunce to the last", merrily recalled Gandhiji
after many years.
Like so many experiments which shaped Gandhiji's thought
and belief, the experiment in running the paper revealed many a
novelty to him so much so that he devoted one full chapter, in his
autobiography, on his experience on the first night. It not only
shows his intimate knowledge of the working of the printing press
at that time, but also speaks of his masterly grip on every detail.
Shri Prabhudas Gandhi adds further details of the working in
the press-room of the Indian Opinion.
“Friday nights were of importance for the weekly Indian Opinion was
despatched by Saturday. The material for the paper was composed by raid-
day on Friday. It was evening by the time the paper went to the press. There
were no servants, peons or other labour. The press workers themselves had
to print the paper, foldit, paste the addresses, make bundles and take them
to the station. The work would take the whole night and there would still
be something to do after day break, .Under such pressure of work Gandhiji
left
7
H. S. L. Polak Incidents of Gandhiji s Life , ed. by Chandrasbankar
:
Shukla (Vora Sc Co., Bombay, 1949), p. 240.

* Millie Graham Polak : Mr. Gandhi : The Man (Yora Sc Co., Bombay,
1949), p. 40.
15
8
Mahatma Gandhi— the Journalist
along with others would keep awake all night. To encourage the staff rice-
pudding would be served at mid-night-”
Mr. Polak was earlier instrumental in introducing Ruslan's
work —
Unto This Last —
to Gandhiji while he was on a journey
by train. The book changed Gandhiji’s ideas profoundly. Not
only Ruskin, but other thinkers and philosophers like Thoreau,
Emerson, and Tolstoy had great influence on him. Their teachings,
in turn, influenced his writings in the Indian Opinion.
As Gandhiji admitted :
“ So long as it Indian Opinion)
(. was
under my control, the changes in the journal were indicative of
changes in my life. The Indian Opinion in those days, like the
Young India and the Navjivan today, was a mirror of part of my
10
life.”
His writings on the philosophy of Satyagraha served as inspira-

tion for the Satyagraha movement he launched.
What were the main items in the paper ? These were varied,
covering many topics. Two or more editorials and a few short
editorial comments dealing with mostly Indian problems or discri-
minatory law cases involving Indians, were the weekly features.
It had a small correspondence column. In the issue of January 27,
1906, the following reply, in the said column, was given “ G. D. L. :
(Over port). Your letter is quite unsuitable for publication.”
The same issue made an important announcement regarding

the suspension of Tamil and Hindi editions for want of “ editors
and compositors ”.
The paper contained reproductions from other journals —
mostly relating to Indian problems. There was sometimes, * Our
Weekly London Letter column. ’
Gandhiji was looking for reliable correspondents in other

countries, particularly in England. His letter of December 10, 1904,
to Mr. Dadhabhai Naoroji, will be read with interest in this context
Dear Sir,
Indian Opinion has entered on a third stage in its career. I would
not weary you with the important step that has been taken in connection with
it. You will see the full particulars published in it in the course of this month.
It is now intended to have a weekly or a fortnightly letter from England of
8
Prabhudas Gandhi : My Childhood with Gandhiji (Navajivan Publishing
House, Ahmedabad, 1957), p. 45.
w M. K. Gandhi : An Autobiography or The Story Of Experiments with My
Truth (Navajivan Publishing House, Ahmedabad* 1956), p. 286.
16 .
Sponsor or Editor
general interest but also dealing particularly with the Indian question, in South
Africa, as it may have effected (sic) from time to time in London. Could you.
recommend anyone who would undertake the work and if so, at what rate ?
1 have nothing special to report on the question this week/'
In his letter on January 13, 1905, to Shri Gokhale, reference
of which has been made earlier, he requests for correspondents to
write for the Indian Opinion “ X am also anxious to secure either
.
honorary or paid correspondents who would contribute weekly

notes in English, Gujarati, Hindi and Tamil.”
January 6, 1906 issue of Indian Opinion contained the following
interesting news item :
Congratulation — It is with great pleasure that we announce the

marriage of Mr. H. S. L. Polak and Miss M.G. Downs (who recently arrived
from London), at Johannesburg on Saturday last. Mr. Polak is the Transvaal
representative of Indian Opinion , and Mrs. Polak is in thorough sympathy with
the cause of Indians in South Africa. We offer our heartiest congratulations
and best wishes to the happy pair.
Sometimes photographs were published. A black bordered full

page photograph of Shri Mansukhlal Hiralal Nazar was published
in the same issue carrying an obituary written by Gandhiji, to
which reference has already been made. Photos of the then Amir
of Afganisthan, (1907), Shri Gokhale (March 10, 1908) and
Gandhiji, when he was leading the South African delegation to
London, were, among some others, published from time to time.
There were other interesting news items, which gave a glimpse of
the life at the settlement. An example “ Many thanks. We have :
much pleasure in thanking Messrs. G. H. Miankahan and Co.,

for the gift of a splendid cricket set and a football, presented to the
f
Indian Opinion Athletic Club \
The editor was a sports enthusiast as well. In the post script of
the letter written to Shri Chhaganlal Gandhi, from Johannesburg,
dated April 20, 1907, Gandhiji wrote “lam sending you three :
numbers of The Times of India After you have seen and admired
.
pictures I want you to cut out Gaekwar, the Jam and the Cricket
Team. We might one of these days want to reproduce these pictures
as supplements, and it would be better for you also to file any other
picture you may come across and consider good enough for use.”
Here is another piece of news item :
Visitors at Phoenix. The International press was visited on Wednesday

last, by Messrs M. K. Gandhi, H. O. Dawad Mahomed, Omar Haji,
Ally,
Amod Johari, M. C. Anglia, Peeran Mahomed and H. L. Paul. The various
17
G—
departments were inspected with interest and the visitors expressed oieasure
at what they saw.
Some of the headlines of the Indian Opinion will interest modern
journalists. Both these were printed on March 31. 1906.
“ IN THE IMPERIAL PARLIA —

MENT
SYMPATHY FOR INDIAN GRIEVANCE
INDIAN FOR TRANSVAL MISSION."
A typography-conscious editor would not put ‘

Parlia " and
1
‘
ment like this.
“ SENSATIONAL
POTCHEFSTROOM CASE
DUTCHMAN BLACKMAIL AN INDIAN

ON JUSTICE AND COLOUR "
MR. JUSTICE WESSELS
Examples of a few other captions arc given below from the

Indian Opinion , dated July 25, 1906. These were neither *
catchy
’
nor would they provide a * lead ’.
ANOTHER REGISTRATION CASE

MAGISTRATE'S CURIOUS DECISION "
“ THE INDIAN STRETCHER BEARER

CORPS
AN INTERESTING RECORD ”
Or take the case of the following double column headlines which

appeared in the December 29, 1906 issue of the journal :
“SOUTH AFRICA BRITISH INDIAN COMMITTEE
COMPLIMENTARY BREAKFAST BY DELEGATES

18
Sponsor or Editor
“ LORD REAY AND SIR RAYMOND WEST ON THE

OBLIGATION OF THE EMPIRE
DEL1GATES LETTER'S : NO OPPOSITION TO COLONISTS ”
In spite of various checks adopted in the press, there was

a spelling mistake in deligales, an unfortunate thing. We should
not judge journalistic efficiency by the twentieth century standard.
But still the insertion of ‘ breakfast in a double column headline
’
should sound atrocious now-a-days.

Sometimes Gandhiji had to get into dangerous journalistic pit-
falls known as “printer’s devil.” One such interesting episode
was narrated by Mr. Henry S. L. Polak. Paul Kruger, Ex-President
of the South African Republic, died in July, 1904 while in exile in
Europe. His mortal remains were to be buried at Pretoria, Africa.
Mr. Polak was to cover the funeral proceedings. He was a
fastidious journalist and did not like errors in the Indian Opinion.
As such he asked Gandhiji to see the proof himself before it was
printed. Mr. Polak’s opening sentence was “He is dead and
buried”. But the Indian Opinion published, “He is dead and
burnt”. Mr. Polak was shocked and annoyed and wrote to
Gandhiji immediately lest the mistake might create misunder-
standing among the orthodox Boers. Gandhiji, however, explained
that the word ‘ burnt ’
seemed natural to him, a Hindu, whose
dead were habitually cremated.
No wonder, Gandhiji was, in his letter of March, 1907, advising
Shri Chhaganlal : “ While reading the proofs, compare them
with tire original book. Do not depend for spelling, etc., on the
copy sent by me. Please send me the proofs before pr inting ,
Printing has to be done after deciding about the format, etc., of the
book. And I believe it is desirable to print off after composing
as much material as we have types for. Types necessary for job
work, etc., should be kept apart.”
Not only “printer’s devil,” the enthusiastic journalist had
had other troubles as well,in one of his lectures on Hindu
Religion at Johannesburg, Gandhiji referred to the spread of
Islam and said that the majority of converts came from the lower
classes. It created a stir among the local Mus lims and many letters
of protest were sent to the editor of Indian Opinion. He had to
Mahatma Gandhi The — Journalist
publish letters in the Gujarati issue of the Indian Opinion on June 3,

1905 and June 17, 1905, with a view to apologizing and clarifying
the objections raised. He was also misunderstood while publishing a
lifesketch of Prophet Mohammad. This had to be stopped because
of protests from Muslim members of the Indian community.
Through the columns of the Indian Opinion, Gandhiji was repro-
ducing biographies of great men and women of the world. His
idea was to inspire his fellow countrymen so that they could emulate
their examples. “ ... We hope that the readers of this journal
will read their lives and follow them in practice and thus encourage
us. We have suggested earlier, that each one of our subscribers
should maintain a file on Indian Opinion. We remind of it on this
occasion.” 11 The biographies were of people like Tolstoy, Lincoln,
Mazzini, Elizabeth Fry, Florence Nightingale, Ishwar Chandra
Vidyasagar.
While writing these biographies, Gandhiji committed a few
mistakes. In the life story of Abraham Lincoln he wrote that
the assassin was tom to pieces by people who witnessed the
‘
dreadful deed ’, when he was shot dead in the special box at the
theatre. In fact, the assassin, Mr. Booth, was killed in a barn which
was set on fire by the soldiers in pursuit of him. In the biography
of Washington he writes that he was elected President for a second
time in 1892-1893. In fact, it was in 1792-1793.
Similarly, in the life of Wat Tyler who was fighting against the
unjust taxes imposed by the King of England, he wrote that “ Wat
Tyler lived in the 12th century ”. But he lived in the 14th century.
Under the caption —
‘
THE DEPUTATION,
’
A REMINDER
the Indian Opinion carried a photograph of Gandhiji and the

following news item in its issue of October 13, 1906.
“ In connection with Mr. M. K. Gandhi’s departure for England as one of
the delegates for the Transvaal, it is of interest to recall the circumstances of
from Natal, in 1901. At that time, a committee was
his departure for India
formed to present Mr. Gandhi with an address from the British Indian
11
The Indian Opinion, Durban-Phoenix, South Africa, August 19, 1905.
20
Sponsor or Editor
Community of Natal and Invitations were issued to the heads of European
community. Amongst the replies received was the following interesting letter
from the late Sir John Robinson, at one time Prime Minister of the Colony
of Natal
I beg to thank you for your kind invitation to the meeting at the Congress
Hall this evening (October 15, 1901). It would have given me great pleasure
to have been present on the occasion of so well earned a mark of respect to our
able and distinguished fellow citizen Mr. Gandhi, but, unfortunately, my state
of health prevents me going out at night, and lam, for the present, debarred
from taking part in any public function ; so I must ask you kindly to excuse
my inability to attend.
Not the less heartily do I wish all success to this public recognition of the
good work done, and the many services rendered to the community by
Mr. Gandhi."
This is crude publicity. To bring in the ex-Prime Minister of
Natal in a very roundabout way, was not in good journalistic
taste. The only excuse was that Gandhiji was at the time away
in England.
Whatever might be the size, shape, content or policy of the
paper, it was making a good headway in the realm of journalism.
The Cape Argus' leading article on the Indian Opinion was published
in the journal in its issue of January 5, 1907. It, inter alia stated : ,
“ They (Natal Indians) have an able organ,
Indian Opinion printed in English
,
and Gujarati, and it is from Natal that the champion of South African Indians'
interests mostly came ".
Under a sub-heading —
An Indian Poetess
4
the Indian ’
—
Opinion of March 2, 1907, reproduced the following paragraph
from the journal Indian People :
“ The Ladies Conference at Calcutta

brought to prominence a lady orator,
Mrs. Sarojini Naidu, already known as a poet of considerable distinction.
Mrs. Naidu is a Bengali lady by birth and has married a Madrasi gentleman.
She spoke without notes and made an impiessive and most eloquent speech.
It isfurther stated that she is not accustomed to speak in public. It is a very
hopeful sign of the times that our ladies are coming to the front and are taking
active part in the great work of national reform. A
gifted lady like
Mis. Sarojini Naidu, with her persuasive and attractive eloquence, should be
able to render important service to the women of India."
This was the first eulogistic reference made in public of Sarojini
Devi whose friendship with Gandhiji lasted till death separated
them.
Struggle against Registration ensued soon and the Indian Opinion
became the mouthpiece of this resistance movement. Its editorials
struck a new note “ Amidst a whole heap of bad coins, if
;
there
21
is one true sovereign, the heap will be worth that one sovereign . .
if you produce one civil resister of merit he will pull things through.
Do not start the struggle unless you have that stuff.”
. . .
Satyagraha movement or passive resistance was launched in

reply to the South African Government’s insistence on the regis-
tration of Indians and other Asians. Under this, all such people
were to note down important physical identity marks and put
thumb impression on the certificates. A date was fixed by which,
all Indians were to register their names, failing which they were
to forfeit their right of residence and be liable to be fined or

imprisoned.
The Indian Opinion for the benefit of the large number of Indians,
translated the ordinance into Gujarati. There were meetings of
protest against this Black Ordinance. The struggle continued for
a long time, with intermittent lull. Some sort of agreement was
reached with the Government but the pledges of the Government
were soon broken. The Indian Opinion of May 3, 1913, wrote :
“ Inspite of the bill being rushed forward a stage further, we imagine that it
will never reach the third reading stage. But it is well for passive resisters to
keep themselves in readiness. It is to be hoped that, if the struggle revived
the impending third campaign will be the purest, the last and the most brilliant
of all. We share the belief with Thoreau, that one true passive resister is
enough to win victory for right. Right is on our side/'
The Indian Opinion of September 20, 1913, wrote :
“ Hitherto passive resisters have challenged arrests by crossing the Transvaal
border. That is how, the present struggle too, has been commenced. We
may, on this question of crossing of the bordei, at once say this method of
resistance does not mean that we are asking for breaking of the provincial
boundaries. On the contrary as soon as the struggle ceases, those who will
have crossed the borders from different provinces will return to the province
of their domicile ”.
The struggle continued and streams of people joined Gandhiji
in their fight for justice. Because of Gandhiji’s earlier personal
contact with the editors in England and India, there was widespread
support for his movements.
Gandhiji was writing incessantly boosting up the morale of the
civil resisters. “During 10 years, that is until 1914, excepting the
intervals of my enforced rest in prison, there was hardly an issue of

Indian Opinion without an article from me,” wrote Gandhiji.
He was thrown in prison in 1908 and again in 1909.
The political situation in India was not bright either. Earlier
22
Sponsor or Editor
in 1907, the Indian National Congress split up between the

extremists and the moderates. The Morley-Minto Reforms of 1909
offered little to the Indians. The newspaper, Leader , started
publication under the guidance of national leaders. The Press
Act of 1910, was passed empowering the Government to demand
security from the Press.
The Satyagraha struggle continued till 1914, when on Shri
Gokhale’s advice Gandhiji left South Africa. With his Phoenix
settlers, he reached India in the midst of World War I.
The Satyagraha movement without the Indian Opinion, as

Gandhiji admitted, would not have become a success. It awakened
the Indians to their rights and privileges.
The paper was solely used for the movement. Directives to
resisters were issued ;news of successful boycott of Registration
was published ; The Weekly Diary ’ of the Indian Opinion
‘
was eagerly read by Indians ;views of different aspects of the

Satyagraha movement were displayed. The number of subscribers
rose from 1,200 to 3,500. But the financial sting was still there.
In a letter to Shri Gokhale, April 25, 1909, Gandhiji wrote :
“ gave you also the approximate summary of monthly expenses :

I
office here £ 50, office in London £ 40, Indian Opinion £ 50, distressed
families £ 25.” Expenditure on the Indian Opinion was like that on
any other item during the Satyagraha movement.
In the same letter he wrote that debt due to the Indian Opinion
up to 20th instant was £ 1200. He ran the Indian Opinion “ at a loss
in the interest of the struggle “ 1 have devoted to the continuance
of Indian Opinion and the establishment of Phoenix all my earnings
during my last stay in South Africa, that is nearly £ 5000.”
Voteless Indian settlers in Johannesburg were paid compensa-
tion if removed from the segregated areas. “ The municipality’s
offerswere frequently so inadequate that the victims engaged
Gandhi to take their claims to the appellate tribunal. He charged
nominal fees and allocated half the costs allowed by the tribunal
to the rising expenses of Indian Opinion.” 12
But he could bear it on without regrets. “ It was never intended
to be a commercial concern ”, he said.
The paper was reorganized to meet the situation arising out of
l*
H. S. L. Polak, H. N. Brailsford, and Lord Pethick-Lawrenee : Mahatma
Qendhi (Odhams Press Ltd., London, 1949), p, 47.
23
the Satyagraha movement. A few workers, it was arranged, would

not join the struggle, but would run the paper instead. The size
was reduced from 16 to 8 pages. It was brought out on Wednes-
days instead of Saturdays so as to catch the English mail at Cape
Town.
Gandhiji was giving indication of the shape of things to
come. letter to Shri Maganlal Gandhi, dated November
In his
“ Phoenix will be put to
27, 1909, written in Gujerati, he said :
test now. Probably we may not get money from Johannesburg.

Our pledge is that we shall bring out at least a one-page issue of
Indian Opinion and distribute it among the people as long as
there is even one person in Phoenix.” Within a week he again
wrote to Maganlal Gandhi, in Gujerati “ It is the duty of
:
those who have devoted themselves to Phoenix to improve the

life there and do their best to develop Indian Opinion for through :
Indian Opinion we have been imparting education and doing

public good. We need not be disheartened if some of us in
Phoenix do not put in their best, waste our resources or are
quarrelsome.”
Immediately before the size of the Indian Opinion was changed,
he wrote a letter to Mr. A. H. West, on or before December
13
29, 1909 , saying :
“ The Opinion) should be changed as suggested. No

size (of the Indian
apology need be offered in the paper for it. The English columns should be
reduced. No leading matter of opinion (be) given for the present except
explanatory notes. All matter should be severely condensed. Energy should
be devoted to the art of condensing. It may be divided into Passive
Resistance, Natal notes. Cape notes, etc. Reports of Bombay and other
meetings may be considerably shortened .... The English columns then
should simply give news on the disabilities throughout South Africa and about
matters we are interested in.... The Gujerati columns ought not to be
reduced; but if the Gujerati subscribers fall off, even that may be reduced
almost to any extent, you there, in Mr. Polak’s and my absence, being the
sole judge.”
Though Gandhiji said that no apology need to be offered, the
Indian Opinion of January 1, 1910, published the following under
the heading * Ourselves ’
“ With the present issue, this journal appears under a somewhat changed
l*
The Collected Works of Mahatma Gandhi (Vol. X), the Publications
Division, Ministry of Information & Broadcasting, Government of India,
p. 107.
24
Sponsor or Editor
dress. The size, too, has been reduced. The Transvaal struggle has put
a very severe stiain on our resources. It has now become too great for us to
continue the old form and size. It is within the knowledge of most of our
readers that our publication is not a commercial concern, but our capacity
for the service of the community to whose interests Indian Opinion is devoted
is limited, and our limitation has necessitated the change the readers will
notice in its appearance. We part very reluctantly by way of retrenchment
with the cover whose colour was very specially selected. Though the size
has been reduced, we hope that we shall be able by means of condensation
to give the same amount of information. Our readers who are interested in
the ideals we endeavour to promote can render useful service by finding
which they may call their own. It is our desire to
subscribers for the journal
give more varied our resources increase. It is, then, for the
matter as
readers to say when they shall have a better service of news."
The size of the paper was reduced. Still Gandhiji had the
problem of finances. In his letter to Shri Maganlal dated
January 20, 1910, Gandhiji wrote :
“ not to give more than a month's credit for Indian Opinion

It is desirable .
You should only take a limited lisk. Let the amount be debited to your
account. It will not be deducted from your current allowance. You should
never take liability for more than ten subscribers. Even that is, perhaps, too
much. However, whatever liability you have taken upon yourself in the
Cape Colony is binding on all as you did not know the new rule. The new
rule is, I believe, very good—at least foi the present. "
“ We will have to carry many (fresh) burdens it is, therefore,
;
better to cut
down these. This (not allowing too much credit) seems to be the prevalent
practice of newspapers. As people gradually get used to it, they will follow
itof their own accord. We pay tire licence fee in advance because of
compulsion, i.e., physical force. That we shall take the subscriptions in
advance will be on the strength of soul-force. That soul-force consists in
making Indian Opinion interesting and for that the only course open to us is
to put inmaximum effort. The subscriptions will then come in automatically.
"
I have no time now to dilate upon this
The Gujerati edition of the Indian Opinion in its issue of ,
September 4, 1912, published the following :
“ It is more than seven years ago that this journal began to be printed at
Phoenix. We are now taking a step forward. So far the legal proprietor has
been Mr. Gandhi, but the ownership is now being transferred to (a board of)
Trustees, and the objectives which will govern the management of Phoenix
have been precisely laid down. We feel this is a step in the right direction
and we are sure our readers will feel the same.
“ The paper has never been in a position to pay its way. It is here needless
to go into the reasons for that. It, however, need to be recalled on this
occasion that the paper would have been in dire straits if Mr. Tata's generous
help had not been drawn upon to meet its needs.
25
« When the workers decided to settle in Phoenix and start a journal there,
itwas expected that the income from it and the land would not only give
them enough to live on but also enable them to put by substantial savings, for
they were to be the masters of whatever profit might accrue from the
enterprise. Experience has shown that the assumption was incorrect. We
realised that the Phoenix way of life could not be reconciled with monetary
gain. And so, for the last several years, the Phoenix settlement has been
worked on that basis.
s
Our principal object was that, while living by agriculture, we should give
*
of our best in the service of the people and publish the paper for them. We
have not so far succeeded in that aim.
« We gave up job-work many years ago. We now feel that we should also
discontinue the practice of publishing advertisements. Wc believed then that
advertisements were a good thing to have but on reflection we see that the
practice is wholly undesirable. Advertisements are inserted by people who
are impatient to get rich, in order that they may gain over their rivals.
They are also much in fashion these days that any and every kind of advertise-
ment is published and paid for. This is one of the sorriest features of
modem civilization, and for our part we wish to be rid of it. If however,
we published non-commercial advertisements, which serve a public purpose,
free of charge, they would fill the entire number each time, so we shall only
accept them against payment. Other advertisements, we shall stop publishing
forthwith. As for advertisements which we have on hand, we shall try to
negotiate with our clients and free ourselves of the commitments. We shall
then be able to work more on the land and more effectively fulfil the main
object of the Trust Deed which we publish in this issue.
**
We believe that the proposed changes will enhance our capacity for public
service. We also hope that we shall be able to publish worthier and more
valuable (reading) matter in the journal. It has been our endeavour daily to
add to its value as an instrument of moral education. There are two, and
only two, reasons for its existence to strive to end the hardships suffered by
:
Indians in this country and to promote moral education. The second

purpose can be best served by our improving our way of life. That is why
we are doing our best to eschew the commercial aspects of our work, such as
jobbing and advertisements. Progressively as we live up to the ideals
enumerated in the title deed, we shall be able to give our readers more useful
material. We want all Indians to help us in this.”
The Phoenix Trust Deed was published in the Indian Opinion
dated 14 September, 1912. Under the title, £
Ourselves % the
following was published :
u The Trust Deed which we publish in this issue, and

which is in course of
registration, marks a step forward in our work. Mr. Gandhi ceases to be the
sole legal owner of the concern known as the International Printing Press,
where this journal is printed. Nearly eight years ago we migrated to Phoenix,
the idea being that the workers might be able to look more to the land for
their sustenance than to the proceeds of the sale of Indian Opinion and the
26
Sponsor or Editor
advertisements inserted in During this period wc have not given that

it.
attention to the land which was thought we should be able to give, and we
it
have certainly not been able to pay our way by means of agriculture. That
the journal itself has not been self-supporting is a widely known fact The
assistance received by it from Mr Tata's gift of 1909 enabled it to tide over a
crisis in its career.
We have also come to the conclusion that, consistently with our ideals, wc
<fi
could not accept advertisements for paying our way. Wc believe that the
system of advertisement is bad in itself, in that it sets up insidious competition,
to which we are opposed, and often lends itself to misrepresentation on a
large scale : and we may not
that, if use this journal for the purpose of sup-
porting us entirely, we have no right to cater for and use our time in setting
up advertisements. We have always used our discrimination and rejected
many advertisements which we could not conscientiously take. Our friends
and well-wishers, who have hitherto extended their support to us, will not,
we hope, take it amiss if we discontinue the practice of inserting advertisements.
The object of issuing this paperis two-fold: to voice and work to remove the
grievances of the British Indians of South Africa, and to do educative work,

by publishing matter of an elevating char acter. We
hope that our readers will
appreciate our position, and continue to give us their support, by subscribing
”
to the paper.
There were more changes in the Gujerati edition of January

4, 1913. The following information was given to the readers :
“ In a few changes. We believe these to be an

this issue readers will notice
improvement ; we have made them because wc thought that, if the journal
was printed in two columns instead of three, it would look better. It would
(also) be more convenient if the articles had to be published in book form.
Our purpose is to publish, from time to time, articles of permanent value
so that readers who like to preserve copies can later have them bound into
a volume. It is our intention to continue providing the same (reading)
matter (as before), but in as short a form as possible. By so doing we will
be able to fit in more material within the same space or even less. Beginning
this time, we have reduced the number of Gujerati and English pages, but we
wish to provide more information, though not more words within these
pages. It is our hope to reduce the work of the compositor while increasing
that of the writer.
“Our venture is more than eight years old. We have published infor-
mation about rates (and prices) of interest to merchants and have also
discussed serious topics. Matter varying from four to twentyfour pages in
length has appeared in the Gujerati Section of Indian Opinion. We now hope
to print, for the most part, writings of two kinds those which will provide
:
the community with full information, in so far as that is possible, of the

hardships we suffer, and we will (also) consider and suggest remedies;
secondly, those that deal with an ethic of public conduct or contain, in
essence thoughts of great men of this problem. We hope that Indian Opinion
will thus become an instrument of education/'
27
In the Gujarati edition of the Indian Opinion of December 31,
1913, the following remarks were made :
“ The satyagraha campaign, as carried on this time and still continuing, has
hardly a parallel in history. The real credit for this goes to the Hindi and
Tamil speaking brothers and sisters living in this country. Their sacrifice has
been the highest of all. Some of them have even lost their lives killed by the
:
bullets of the white soldiers. As a tribute to their memory, we have decided to

give Hindi and Tamil news in this paper. Some years ago, we used to bring
out this paper in these two languages as well, but we had to discontinue the
practice owing to some difficulties. Those difficulties are not yet over. And
yet, we resume publication in these languages for the duration of the struggle,
that being, in our judgment, the least that we must do, even at some inconve-
nience to ourselves, in honour of communities whose members have made such
sacrifices in a struggle of this kind. It is not with a commercial motive that we
are publishing in these languages. Whether or not to continue the practice
after the struggle is over we can only decide in the light of the circumstances
then prevailing."
Gandhiji left South Africa. The Indian Opinion continued to

be published. Inhis absence, it naturally, lost much of its
weight.
B. ‘Satyagraha' and ‘Young India'
The Indian Opinion was a weekly paper, publishing news of

interest from the South African Indian point of view. Journals
that Gandhiji subsequently edited in India were viewspapers.
His ideas, social, political oreconomic, as well as the plan of
action to achieve those, were now
in the process of crystallization.
He wanted political emancipation first as that would help elevat-
ing ‘mass consciousness’. Masses, once awakened, cannot rest
till socialand economic emancipation is achieved. Gandhiji
plunged himself in all these activities side by side. For that purpose
he wanted a proper vehicle to transmit his ideas. As he wrote,
“ newspaper, if otherwise well edited, can become a most
powerful
vehicle for transmitting pure ideas in a concise manner. The.
transformation was already taking place from newspaper it was

;
going to be, as the new journals he edited showed, a viewspaper.

This fitted in remarkably with the journalistic trend in India.
Mrs. Annie Besant’s New India, Maulana Mohamed Ali’s
Weeklies, Maulana Abul Kalam Azad’s Al Hilal, Shri Balgan-
gadhar Tilak’s Kesari, Shri Surendra Nath Baneijee’s Banga-
28
Sponsor or Editor
basi, veered round respective personalities. As M. Bams

all
put “ In India, from Raja Ram Mohan Roy to Keshub

it :
Chunder Sen, Gokhale, Tilak, Feroze Shah Mehta, Dadabhai

Naoroji, Surendranath Banerjea, C. Y. Cintamni, M. K.. Gandhi
and Jawaharlal Nehru, there is a distinguished line of public men
who have used, and arc using, the press as a medium for the dis-
semination of their ideas of moral values.” 14
But with Gandhiji it was much more. The story of his
viewspapers is the story of Indian struggle for independence. They
stood for the struggle on behalf of humanity, against the man-

made bondage. They initiated and nourished a political move-
ment that upheld moral values.
When Gandhiji arrived in India on January 9, 1913, journalism
did not establish itself as a profession, excepting in case of the
Anglo-Indian Press. Advertisement did not play that important
part as it plays today. By and large papers had to depend on sales
promotion and, more important, on monetary help from individuals.

The Anglo-Indian Press was technically, from production or news
coverage angle, superior but it was not popular with the Indian
;
reading public. On the other hand the Indian newspapers were

popular, but the quality of printing, etc., were not up to the mark.
Newspapers were printed normally in two sizes —
the seven columns
and five columns.
Incidentally, in 1913, lire Criminal Law Amendment Act was
passed in India. The First World War
started in 1914 and with
its outbreak, the Defence of India Regulations came into force.
Both these Acts were, among others, aimed at silencing criticism
of the Government and stopping any sort of political agitation.
The Press Association of India, formed in 1915, submitted a memo-
randum in which it pointed out that by 1917, 22 newspapers were
asked to furnish security. Of the 22, 18 preferred to close down
than to submit to the Government orders. Between 1917 and
1919 coercive action was taken against 963 newspapers and printing
presses. 173 new presses and 129 newspapers were
In addition,
killed at birthby demand of heavy security. Nearly rupees five
lakhs were collected by the Government by way of securities and
forfeitures alone. The Association also pointed out that over 500
14
Margarita Barns : The Indian Press (George Allen and Unwin Ltd.,
London, 1940), p. xv.
29
publications were proscribed within that period. It added: “The

total number of orders under the Defence of India Act to which
presses and papers were subjected for purposes unconnected with
the pursuit of the war were very large, varied, arbitrary, contra-
15
dictory and often ludicrous to a degree.”
On the advice of Shri Gokhale, Gandhiji, after reaching India,
was touring the country and meeting people but the Indian Opinion
was very much in his mind. In a letter to Mr. J. B. Petit, Secre-
tary, South African Indian Fund, on June 16, 1915, Gandhiji
wrote “ The Journal Indian Opinion has never been and can
:
never be an entirely self-supporting proposition. The English

portion of it is mainly of an educative character for the European
public amongst whom it is distributed gratis. It was a powerful
weapon in the armoury of Passive Resistance and continues to be
the only recorder of accurately sifted facts about our countrymen
in South Africa and of Passive Resistance movement. It is in no
sense a commercial enterprise.”
Expenditure of the Indian Opinion was like any other item of the
Phoenix settlement. In his letter to A. H. West, from Ahmedabad,
dated August 3, 1915, Gandhiji wrote “ Allocation of £ 3,000 to
Phoenix settlement includes assistance to Indian Opinion. This
enables you to report cases of hardship and to help such cases also.
You may even open a branch office in Durban and collect infor-
mation about hard cases of immigrants and give them free help,
you can engage men for reporting cases, etc. The expenses Will be
justified only as far as you use the paper to attend (to) local
relief.”
Gandhiji did not like the price of the Indian Opinion to be reduced
further. In his letter to Maganlal Gandhi, from Ahmedabad,
before September 26, 1915, he wrote “ The price of Indian Opinion
has been reduced to one penny. It seems he (Chhaganlal) has
been hasty.”
Gandhiji was worried over Chhaganlal. In his letter to Mr. A. H.
West, from Ahmedabad, dated October 31, 1915, he wrote : “ All I
know is this that you must continue I.O. even if you have to
labour in the streets and if you burn your boats, so much the
better. If you cannot, you and your family, so long as you are at
15
S. Natarajan : The History of the Press in India (Asia Publishing House,
Bombay, 1962), pp. 172-173.
30
Sponsor or Editor
Phoenix turning out the paper, will be supported at all costs.”

Gandhiji was not quite sure whether donations for the Phoenix
settlement will go towards meeting the expenses of the Indian
Opinion. It appears there had been some dissentient voices on this.
In his letter to Mr. A. H. West, from Ahmedabad, December 12, 19 1 6,
he wrote “The Committee here will at the most just tolerate the
:
withdrawal of funds for sustaining Indian Opinion, and the Public

there will also look upon such support with strong disfavour. In
the circumstances, we can only fall back upon local support or
”
failing that reduce the paper to any extent we choose.
While quitting South Africa, Gandhiji left the Indian Opinion
to the able hands of Mr. Polak. But there was no one to look
after tire Gujarati section of the paper and Gandhiji was approached
for advice. In 1916, he sent his second son, Shri Manilal Gandhi,
aged 23, to take charge of the edition and assured him his
constant guidance from India. He was doing it regularly, even in
midst of his *
Know India Tours,’ through letters written in
Gujarati. Here is an extract from one such letter :
“ If your
aim in running the press is to acquire wealth, you will be serving
your own self interest. If that is not your aim you will be serving
the public. If you suffer exile with the knowledge that the paper
your father was conducting was good and that the spirit under-
lying it has benefited the country, you wifi be rendering a great
social service." 16
Towards the end of 1917, Mr. A. H. West suggested that the Indian
Opinion should be shifted from the Phoenix Settlement to Durban.
In his newsletter of December 10, 1917. Gandhiji wrote to Mr.
West: “My view is that if you can turn out Indian Opinion only
by removing to Town, you should suspend publication. I do not
like the idea of your competing for jobs or advertisements. I
think that when that time comes, we shall have outlived our
purpose.” The next day he wrote to Mr. Govindswami, engineer
in the Phoenix settlement, about the same question. “Mr. West
has asked me whether it may not be advisable to shift to Town.
My answer is in the negative. I would feel deeply hurt if you
cannot keep up Indian Opinion in Phoenix. In any case you
should not remove the works. If you cannot turn out the Paper
18
—
The Indian Opinion Mahatma Gandhi Memorial Number, Durban-
Phoenix, South Africa, March, 1948.
31
Mahatma Gandhi—The journalist
in Phoenix, it must be stopped. You should then try to get a

living from agriculture alone devoting the whole of your time to
it.”
Mr. West wired back: “Agriculture impossible. Will you
lend Sam, myself, jobbing plant, papers, each living Durban?
Ultimately complete independence. Paper published English.
Gujarati, Phoenix. Management editorship same time being.
Cable reply.”
Gandhiji cabled back on or about February 24, 1918: “You may
enforce your Plan. Good Luck.”
In his letter to Mr. A. H. West, July 17, 1919, Gandhiji
wrote: “Recently I wrote to Mani Lai about Indian Opinion. He
asked me to supply him with funds or to let him revert to
advertisements and business printing. I still retain the view 1
held there and the more I see of the jobbery that goes on here,
the indiscriminate manner in which advertisements are taken,
the more I think how these advertisements, etc. are nothing but an
insidious method of indirect voluntary taxation, how all these
debases journalism and how it makes of it largely a business
concern, I feel more and more convinced of the rightness of my
view. Anyway, it would not be proper to blow hot and cold.
Either you must make Indian Opinion a business concern and then
not expect the public to take a philanthropic or patriotic interest in
it, or to make it merely an organ representative of Indian aspira-
tions in South Africa, and then rely entirely upon public support
and goodwill. I have dissuaded Mani Lai from making it a
business concern. I have not sent him there to do business but
to render public service. I feel that Indian Opinion has served this
purpose if only partially.”
In India, Gandhiji was not indulging in much journalistic
activity. “I was not editing any journal at that time, but I used
occasionally to ventilate my views through the daily Press.” 17
He sent the following article for publication in the Gujarati daily
Hindustan published from Bombay.
“I promised the Editor a contribution for the Diwali 1 Number of Hindustan.
I find that I have no time to make good the promise, but, thinking that I
must write something, I place before the readers my views on newspapers.
Under pressure of circumstances, I had to work in a newspaper office in
17
M. K. Gandhi An Autobiography or The Story of My Experiments with
:
Truth, (Navajivan Publishing House, Ahmedabad, 1956), p. 456.
32
Sponsor or Editor
South Africa and this gave me an opportunity to think on the subject. I have
put into practice all the ideas which I venture to advance here.
“ In my humble opinion, it is wrong to use a newspaper as a means of
earning a living. There are certain spheres of work which are of such
consequence and have such bearing on public welfare that to undertake them
for earning one’s livelihood will defeat the primary aim behind them. When,
further, a newspaper is treated as a means of making profits, the result is
likely to be serious malpractices. It is not necessary to prove to those who
have some experience of journalism that such malpractices do prevail on a

large scale.
“ Newspapers are meant primarily to educate the people. They make the
latter familiar with contemporary history. This is a work of no mean
responsibility. It is a fact, however, that readers cannot always trust news-
papers. Often, facts are found to be quite the opposite of what has been
reported. If newspapers realized that it was their duty to educate the people,
they could not but wait to check a report before publishing it. It is true that,
often, they have to work under difficult conditions. They have to sift the
true from the false in but a short time and can only guess at the truth. Even
then, I am of the opinion that it is better not to publish a report at all if it has
not been found possible to verify it.
" The reporting of speeches in Indian newspapers is generally defective.
There are very few who can take down a speech vcibatim, so that speeches
are generally found to be a mere hotch-potch. The best thing to do would
be to send the proofs of the reported speech to the speaker for correction
and the paper should publish its own report of the speech only if the
speaker does not correct anything in the proofs sent to him.
“It is often observed that newspapers publish any matter that they
have, just to fill in space. This practice is almost universal. It is so in
the West, too. The reason is that most newspapers have their eye on profits.
There is no doubt that newspapers have done great service. Their defects
are therefore overlooked. But, to my mind, they have done no less harm.
There are newspapers in the West which are so full of trash that it will
be a sin even to touch them. Many, full of prejudices, create or increase
ill-will among people. At times they produce bitterness and strife even
between different families and communities. These newspapers cannot escape
criticism merely because they serve the people. On the whole, it would
seem that the existence of newspapers promotes good and evil in equal
”
measure.
War ended. Instead of Home Rule, India got the Rowlatt Bill.
The whole country rose against it. Gandhiji was very much in the
midst of this movement. From a loyal supporter of the British
Empire, he was emerging as a rebel in the eyes of the English-
men.
The Rowlatt Bill, among other things introduced important
changes in the criminal law of the country. Not only the
33
G—
publication of *
seditious document ’
but its mere possession was
made a punishable offence.
As a protest, an unregistered weekly, the Satyagraha , under the
editorship of Gandhiji, started publication from April 7, 1919.
Itwas to be published on Mondays and the price was one pice.
The following are the contents of the Satyagrahi * the unregistered
newspaper, which Mahatma Gandhi issued on Monday in defiance
of the Indian Press Act:
(Please read, copy and circulate among friends; and also request them to
copy and circulate this paper) No. 1. Price one pice. :
Satyagrahi
(Editor: Mohandas Karamchand Gandhi, Laburnum Road,

Gamdevi, Bombay.)
Published every Monday at 10 a.m.
Bombay, 7th April, 1919.
NOTICE TO SUBSCRIBERS
“ This paper has not been registered according to law. So there can be no
annual subscription. Nor can it be guaranteed that the paper will be published
without intermption. The editor is liable at any moment to be arrested by the
Government and it is impossible to ensure continuity of Publication until India
is in the happy position of supplying editors enough to take the place of those
arrested. We shall leave no stone unturned to secure a ceaseless succession of

editors.
“ It is not our intention to break for all time the law governing publication
of newspapers. This paper will, therefore, exist so long only as the Rowlatt
legislation is not withdrawn/*
OUR CREDENTIALS
“Our credentials are best supplied by answering the question what will the
Satyagrahi do? Satyagrahi has come into being for the sake of ensuring with-
drawal of the Rowlatt legislation. Its business, therefore, is to show the people
ways of bringing about such withdrawal in accordance with the principles of
satyagraha. The satyagraha pledge requires the signatories to court imprison-
ment by offering civil disobedience by committing a civil break of certain
laws. This publication can, therefore, show the best remedy in one way
and that is by committing
disobedience in the very act of publishing
civil
this journal. In other forms of public activity, the speaker is not obliged
to act as he preaches. The object is to draw attention to this contradiction
as a fault. It is a method of doing public work. The method of satya-
* The first issue appeared under the title Satyagrahi.
34
Sponsor or Editor
graha is unique. In it example alone is precept. Therefore, whatever are

suggested herein will be those that have been tested by personal experience,
and remedies thus tested will be like well-tried medicine more valuable
than new. We hope, therefore, that our readers will not hesitate to adopt
our advice based as it will be on experience.”
NEWS
“ Yesterday many great events took place but none was as great as
:
thatowing to the ceaseless efforts of satyagrahis the mill-hands celebrated the

National Day by working in their respective mills as they were unable to
”
get permission of their employers.
Defiance was everywhere — in

all spheres. The whole country
was ablaze. Situation was going out of control of the leaders. In

the Satyagraha of May 6, 1919, Gandhiji cautioned people, citizens
of Bombay particularly, to understand fully the significance of
* hartal ’ before they would observe it to show “ outward evidence
of their deep affection for Mr. Homiman ”, the fearless editor
of the Bombay Chronicle, who was forcibly being deported from
the country.
Mass upheaval continued and very soon the Jallianwalla Bagh
massacre took place. Popular violence followed suit. Leaders
were stunned at this development. Was tire rebel editor, Gandhiji,
inciting the masses ? Was the message of his ‘Satyagraha’ falling
on deaf ears ? Was the country fully prepared to abide by the
message of the new * Messiah ? ’
On April 12, Poet Tagore wrote to Gandhiji : “ I know your

teaching is to fight against evil by the help of good. But such a
fight is for heroes and not for men led by impulses of the moment.”
Gandhiji agreed “ My error lay in my failure to observe this
:
necessary limitation. 1 had called upon the people to launch upon

civil disobedience before they had thus qualified themselves for
”
it....
Satyagraha was called off temporarily and Gandhiji launched

an educating campaign, mostly through leaflets, on the true mean-
ing of ‘
Satyagraha ’. But he was soon to utilize a bigger and
better forum.
Mr. B. G. Horniman, formerly of the Manchester Guardian and
the Statesman, and then the editor of the Bombay Chronicle was
deported to England for his bold writing on the Indian situation.
Directors of the paper —
many of them were now colleagues of
35
Gandhiji in the political field — approached him with the request
to take up the editorship. Gandhiji hesitated. Commenting on
this situation Gandhiji said :
“ But the Government came as it
were to my rescue, for, by its order, the publication of the Chronicle

had to be suspended.” 18
Gandhiji was then 50. It was certainly a great honour to edit
a paper like the Bombay Chronicle. Why was he hesitating ? Was
it because the responsibility was too heavy ? Or was the personality
of the veteran journalist Mr. B. G. Horniman creating a complex

in his sub-conscious mind ?
Undoubtedly, he wanted a journal to preach what he believed.
He got the chance too.
World War I enriched the Gujarati businessmen. Commercial
firms, not only in big cities of India but in Africa as well, became
prosperous, so to say, overnight. They gave Gujaratis a “new
sense of power and importance”. They also soon realized that
without political power, economic prosperity cannot be sustained.
“A band of young Gujaratis... started an English weekly.
Young India : organised the Bombay Branch of Home Rule
League... carried on an intensive agitation in Bombay and
Gujarat.” 19 The editorship of the Young India was offered to
Gandhiji. He agreed and immediately transformedit from a weekly
to a bi-weekly, to be converted again into a weekly.

He said in tnis connection :
“ I was anxious to expound the inner meaning of ‘

Satyagraha ’
to the
public and also hoped that through this effort I should at least be able to
do
justice to the Punjab situation. For, behind all I wrote, there was potential
‘ Satyagraha ’, and the Government knew as much. 20
“By the courtesy of Young India syndicate, composed as it is largely of
* Satyagrahis ’, since the deportation of Mr. Homiman, I have been per-
mitted to supervise the duty of the journal. I asked for such supervision .... I
have hitherto written some leading articles in the usual editorial style
The Gujarati monthly, the Navajivan, under the same manage-
ment, was also placed at his disposal. Writing in Gujarati, in the
Navajivan Ane Satya Gandhiji wrote in July, 1919 :
*
“ Ibid, p. 473.
12
K. M. Munshi : Gandhi : The Master (Rajkamal Publications Ltd..
Delhi, 1948), p- 43.
20 M. K. Gandhi : An Autobiography or The Story of My Experiments
with Truth (Navajivan Publishing House, Ahmedabad, 1956), p. 473.
36
Sponsor or Editor
At the time of Horaiman’s deportation, Young India , published from

Bombay in English, was a weekly. Simultaneously with his deportation, The
(Bombay) Chronicle was put under censorship.
“ In the circumstances, the management stopped publication of the
Chronicle Thereupon the management of Young India decided to make it
.
a bi-weekly, so that it might serve, partly, the purpose which the Chronicle
had served and entrusted me with supervision of its contents. Though the
Chronicle has now resumed publication as usual. Young India continues to
be brought out as a bi-weekly. Some friends posed a question to me whether
it was not my duty, seeing that I was burdening myself with the supervision
of an English paper, to bring out a similar paper in Gujarati. This same

question had occurred to me. I think I have a service to render to India by
delivering a message to her. Some ideas I have come by as a result of my
thinking are such as will advance us towards our welfare. It has ever been my
endeavour to explain these. I have not succeeded as well as I should have
liked to for want of ability or time or favourable circumstances. For instance,
even about satyagraha I see a great deal of misunderstanding prevailing yet.
I am convinced that I have no gift better than this for India. I have always
been avid of placing before the people this priceless thing, and several others
of which I have had ample experience. One powerful modem means for this
purpose is the newspaper. The founders of Navajivan ane Satya have agreed
to place it under my supervision and undertaken to secure facilities for its
publication as a weekly. Shri Indulal Kannaiyalal Yajnik is a busy man in the
public life of Gujarat. Even so, he has pledged himself to make Navajivan
his chief concern and help it to the utmost. These circumstances are no
mere accident. 1 would be ashamed not to welcome them. And so, though
my health is not what it used to be a year ago, I have ventured to assume the
burden of running Navajivan. I seek the blessings of Gujarat in this and invite
the help of its men of letters in running the paper and of others in ensuring a
wide circulation for it, and I am perfectly confident that I shall get it.
“ Navajivan will be published every Sunday and arrangements have been
made to see that it is available on the same day at a number of places in
Gujarat.
Thi management has no desire to run the paper for profit. Accordingly,
fc<
it has decided to keep the rate of subscription as low as possible, at

Rs. 3-8-0 a year including postage. This is the very figure which had been
decided upon for the monthly Navajivan from its July issue onwards, with
some increase in its size. A copy of Navajivan will be priced at 1 anna
and the first number will be issued on Sunday, September 7.
“ The subscription rate mentioned above is regarded as the minimum for
the reason, mainly, that the weekly will carry no advertisements. I realized
from my experience of running Indian Opinion in South Africa for many
years that advertisements bring little profit to the people. Ultimately, they
are paid for by the public itself, and all sorts of them appear, moral and
immoral. For this reason, Indian Opinion has been running for years without
parrying any advertisements. For the present, Navajivan will have eight pages
37
of foolscap size. As circulation increases and facilities improve, the size, too,
will be enlarged.
« Those, other than subscribers of the monthly Navajivan who desire to
enrol themselves as such should send their names to the Manager at Ahmeda-
faad. I earnestly hope that Navajivan will have a great many subscribers.”
It was soon converted into a weekly. The Young India was

brought from Bombay to Ahmedabad where there was the facility
of a press at the disposal of the editor. The Navajivan first ap-
peared on October 7, 1919. The Young India followed suit after
a day. Gandhiji was editor of both and Shri Mahadev Desai and
Shri Shankerlal Banker were publisher and printer respectively.
The journals were priced at one anna each.
Gandhiji soon made his personality felt through the columns of
the YomgIndia and the Navajivan. The impending change was
visiblefrom the very beginning. He turned these into his views
papers. “They enabled me freely to ventilate my views and to
put heart into the people,” he said.
In the editorial, ‘ To the Subscribers and the Readers ’, appear-
ing in the first issue of the Young India under the new editor, Gandhiji
enunciated the policy of the journal.
Readers, in this context, may recall that the objective of the
Indian Opinion, as declared in the paper, was a “ desire to promote
harmony and good-will between the different sections of the one
mighty Empire”. But by the time Gandhiji became associated
with the Yomg India and the Navajivan, his hopes in British justice,
in the course cf the last sixteen years, were shattered. He was
becoming more and more conscious of the true nature of the
colonialism and waspreparing the country to fight injustice with the
* Satyagraha ’ as he had practised it in South Africa.
He wrote :
“ A word as to the policy of Young India. Apart from its duty of drawing
attention to injustices to individuals, it will devote its attention to constructive
* Satyagraha ’
as also sometimes cleansing ‘
Satyagraha ’. Cleansing ‘
Satya-
graha '
is a civil where resistance becomes a duty to remove
resistance
a persistent and degrading injustice such as the Rowlatt Act.”
He further told his readers :
“ Young India, from this week, enters upon a new stage. It became a bi-
weekly when Mr. Homiman was deported and the Chronicle was strangled.
Ever since the Chronicle's rebirth, the syndicate and I have been considering
the advisability of reverting to the weekly issue. The conversion of •
Navajivan into a weekly and its coming under my charge has hastened the
3$
Sponsor or Editor
decision. The burden of conducting a bi-weekly and a weekly is too great

a strain on me and a weekly Young India will now serve almost as well as
a bi-weekly. The annual subscription will now be R9. 4 instead of Rs. 8 and
the price of single copy will be one anna instead of two, without postage.”
This reduction was at a time when printing materials, imme-

diately after the war,were difficult to procure at a reasonable rate.
Margarita Barns calculated that during the First World War and
immediately after that, the cost of newsprint alone increased
seven-fold.
Incidentally, a year earlier, the Central Publicity Bureau of the
Government of India, of which the Press Information Bureau is the
successor today, was formed. An Indian Press party, for the first
time, was also taken out to the front to get first-hand information
of the war which was nearing its end.
The editor had something more to tell his readers.
“ The editing of Navajivan has- been a perfect revelation to me. Whilst
Young India has little more than 1,200 subscribers, Navajivan has 12,000. The
number would leap to 20,000 if it would but get printer to print that number.
It shows that a vernacular newspaper is a felt want. I am proud to think that
I have numerous readers among farmers and workers. They make India. . .
The English journals touch but the fringe of the ocean of India's population.”
Gandhiji was, he said, editing the English journal mainly for
the benefit of his friends in the Madras Presidency. But, he warned,
“ I will not be a party to editing a newspaper that does not pay
its way. Young India cannot pay its way unless it has at least 2,500
paying subscribers/’
“But Young more copies than the combined
India ... sold
totals There was not only a new
of several newspapers in India
thought but a new language in newspaper writing, and what he
wrote was... finest in journalistic writing/’ wrote Mr* A. S. Iyengar,
the veteran journalist. 21
At one time ;the circulation reached the figure of 40,000. What
was more, Gandhiji’s articles were now freely reproduced in most
papers in India. Moreover, the Young India and the Navajivan
44
were made free from the curse of advertisements If his *
journal aimed at the service of the community and the country,

the countrymen should see that the paper pays its way through.
The front page article in the same issue, under the title
4
No
21
A. S. Iyengar : All Through the Gandhian Era (Hind Kitabs Ltd.,
Bombay, 1950), p. 28.
39
Security gives an insight into the condition of the press during

these days.
44
. . Navajivan
. when it became a weekly, was subjected to a security
of Rs. 500. Young India escaped security, because the printer was also the
keeper of the press where it was published. The press in Bombay was itself
under security .... Where security makes no difference to a journalist, a

waiver really enhances his sense of responsibility. So long, therefore, as the
objectionable features of the Press Act continue to disfigure it, exemption from
security, whilst it is creditable for the Government, it can hardly be matter for
congratulation for the controllers of any particular organ so exempted.”
Though Gandhiji was getting more and more involved in Indian

politics —and within a couple of years he was at the pinnacle of his
political glory—he found, as he was touring the country, that
46
freedom lies in the economic and social emancipation of the
*
teeming millions ’ in the country ". So, in the midst of the political
—the Khilafat Agitation and the non-cooperation movement
turmoil
—he was, through his masterly focussing the attention of
editorials,
the nation to other equally important problems. Week after week

6
he was writing on Swadeshi ’, spinning wheel, Hindu-Muslim
Unity, non-violence, place of vernaculars, etc.
At times he was poetic. On July 21, 1920, he wrote about the

spinning wheel “ Not on the clatter of arms depends the revival
:
of her (India’s) prosperity and true independence. It depends most

largely upon re-introduction in every home of the music of the
spinning wheel. It gives sweeter music and is more profitable
than the execrable harmonium, concertina and accordion."
Lokamanya Tilak passed away on August 1, 1920. Obituary
—
written by Gandhiji and obituaries written by him were unsurpas-
sed— in the Young India is worth repeating.
44
.... A
giant among men has fallen. The voice of the lion is hushed ....
His patriotism was a passion with him. He knew no religion but love of his
country. ... His courage never failed him. His optimism was irrepressible
.... In the battle for freedom he gave no quarter and asked for none. . . .
44
blasphemy to talk of such a man as dead. The permanent essence of
It is
him abides with us for ever. Let us erect for the only Lokamanya of India an
imperishable monument by weaving into our own lives his bravery, his simpli-
city, his wonderful Industry and his love of his country.”
The August issue of the Young India contained many articles
which reflected his political thinking in unambiguous terms. Though
in a whirlwind tour of the country, he always made it a point to
write for the paper. He would explain bis ideas of non-cooperation,
40
Sponsor or Editor
accepted by the Calcutta Congress, to his countrymen patiently

and persuade them to accept his view-point.
As an editor of a different character, Gandhiji, whose duty was
to weigh the opposite point of view, would publish the arguments
of his critics. In the December 18, 1920, issue of the Young India
Gandhiji wrote “ :The columns of Young India are open
. . . .
to all who have any grievance against non-cooperation.” He was

giving detailed instructions side by side to non-cooperators. He was
also replying to some of the criticisms published in other papers.
Gandhiji, it may be mentioned, did not get the support of the
press from all over the country. The Independent of Allahabad
and the Servant of Calcutta were supporting Gandhiji whole-
The Swarajya of Shri T. Prakasham was later published
heartedly.
in 1922 for propagating his teachings of non-cooperation. But
the press in Maharashtra were critical. So were the Bengali press,
and the Nayak But the most formidable

particularly the Bengalee .
was Mrs. Besant, through the columns of the New India. In her
statement to the Press Laws Committee, more about which later,
Mrs. Besant said :
“ Mr. Gandhi in Young India is allowed every week to excite hatred and
contempt against the Government in language compared with which criticisms
of Government, that have ruined many papers, are harmless ; he is even
allowed to approach perilously near high treason by saying that he would,
in a sense, assist an Afghan invasion of India papers that one has never heard
:
of, wielding little influence have their securities forfeited or heavily enhanced.
An administration which with flagrant injustice allows the main offender and
4
inspirer of hatred, who proclaims war against Government, ' speaks of
4
* paralysing
*it or pulling it down \ to go scot free, while crushing small
offenders encouraged by his example, undermines in the community all respect
for law and the authority of the Government. ... I rejoice that the Govern-
ment is strong enough to treat Mr. Gandhi’s vapourings with contempt instead
of bestowing on him the martyrdom he courts. But I urge that a Law not
enforced against the influential should not be allowed to crush the weak.” 3*
The correspondence between the two great men of the age—
Mahatma Gandhi and Poet Tagore—is worth reproducing in this
context. According to the Poet, non-cooperation was a doctrine of
separatism, exclusiveness, narrowness and negation. According
to Gandhiji, it was “ a protest against unwitting and unwilling
participation in evil”. He would even go a step further and
33
Bombay, 1962), pp. 20Q-201
41
declare “ non-cooperation with evil is as much a duty as coopera-

tion with good In the Young India dated June 1, 1921, he wrote,
“ An India prostrated at the feet of Europe can give no hope to
humanity. An India awakened and free has a message of peace
and. goodwill to a groaning world.”
He was careful in correcting newspaper reports likely to create
misunderstanding between him and the Poet. In the February 9,
1922, issue of the Young India he mentions a Bombay Chronicle
news item regarding Gandhiji's alleged disrespectful remarks about
*
Santiniketan of Poet Tagore. He was very much pained by that
‘
report and concluded “ I wish the unknown friend had never

:
thought of reporting it. The report does not convey the central
truth of it.”
Young Manilal, looking after the Indian Opinion in Phoenix,
South Africa, would from time to time, journalistic advice,
get,
from Gandhiji. The be patient and seek for the truth
editor has to
only, he advised. Like the famous Joseph Pulitzer, he could say :
“ Accuracy is to a newspaper what virtue is to a lady ”. His earlier

acquaintance with Mr. Saunders of the Englishman taught him that:
“ We win justice quickest by rendering justice to the other party.”
“ You should write what is the truth in Indian Opinion but do
;
not be impolite and do not give way to anger. Be moderate in your

language. If you err, do not hesitate to confess it,” 23 wrote the
veteran journalist-father to the budding journalist-son.
But moderation in language is a relative term. There have been
—
exchanges of intemperate language though not from the pen of
Gandhiji—in the Young India. Shri J. C. Kumarappa narrated
the following interesting incident
“ When I was in editorial charge of Young India, some over-zealous person,
who was ailxious to attain non-violence in a hurry, in his own fashion, in thought,
word and deed, suggested that my language of criticism was severe and that
me to tone down. Gandhiji replied with a smile * Kuma-
Gandhiji should ask :
rappa comes from Madras. You must allow for the chillies in Ms blood.’ ” s4
What a humorous way of easing a situation. This sense of
humour, which he did not lose till the last day, cleared many a
tense atmosphere.
!*
—
The Indian Opinion Mahatma Gandhi Memorial Number (Durban-
Phoenix, South Africa, March, 1948).
24
J* C. Kumarappa : Incidents of Gandhiji’s Life, Ed. by Chandrashanker
Shukla (Vora & Co., Bombay, 1949), p. 142,
42
Sponsor or Editor
The whole country was turned into a prison in 1921. Gandhiji,

in the Young India would publish, week after week, names of those
in prison, “ His Majesty's hotel ”, as he called it. Gandhiji warned :
“ Starvation, or its alternative canine food, no covering much less

any worth the name to protect against the severe winter, microbe
infected, lice-laden blood-stained tatters, the worn-off relics of
common felons ”, were in store for the patriots courting jail.
The country was now moving towards a Civil Disobedience
Movement. Earlier on October 6, 1921, the Young India published
the manifesto on Freedom of Opinion. The signatories were led by
Gandhiji, and stated that “ ... it is the inherent right of every
one to express his opinion without restraint about the propriety of
citizens offering their services to orremaining in the employ of
”
the Government . . . .
In the same issue, under the title ‘

Expression of Opinion ’,
he wrote: “ When in any movement violence is religiously eschewed,
it becomes a propaganda movement of the purest type. Any
attempt to crush it is an attempt to crush public opinion, and such
the present repression has become.”
He had to agitate on the subject as a number of papers were
closed because of too heavy security money being demanded by
the Government. He was pained to see “ The Independent is no
longer a printed sheet. The Democrat is no more. And now the
sword has descended upon the Pratap and Kesari .... The
Bande Mataram, Lalaji’s child, has warded off the blow by deposit-
ing Rs. 2,000 as security.”
He further said, “. . . . I believe that an editor who has any-
thing worth saying and who commands a clientele cannot be
easily hushed so long as his body is left free. He has delivered
his finished message as soon as he is put under duress. The Loka-
manya spoke more eloquently from the Mandalay fortress than
through the columns of the printed Kesari .”
He was further suggesting “a heroic remedy meant for heroic
times ”. He suggested the publication of hand-written news-sheets.
He said “ Let us use the machine and the type whilst we can give
:
unfettered expression to our thought.But let us not feel helpless

when they are taken away from us by a ‘ paternal ’ government
watching and controlling every combination of types and other
movements of the printing machine.” To him “the restoration
.43
Mahatma Gandhi-—The Journalist
of free speech, free association and free press is almost the whole
Swaraj ”.
Shri Pyarelal, Secretary of Mahatma Gandhi, narrated the
following incident in this connection :
“ On reaching Allahabad I found that a notice was served upon the Indepen-
dent demanding security under the Press Act, and the paper had to close down.
What was to be done next ? We asked for instructions. Back came the reply
by wire Run it as a cyclostyle, or even as a hand-written sheet.
:
“ This was done. Mahadev was arrested a few days later. But the manuscript
Independent continued with the significant motto, ‘
1 change, but I cannot
die’.” 25
Incidentally, Sir Tej Bahadur Sapru when he was Law Member

of the Viceroy’s Council, appointed a committee with himself as
the Chairman, in 1921, to scrutinize the existing Press Laws. A
few statements by the editors, as witnesses before the Committee,
are of great interest as they reveal discriminatory treatment meted
out to the Press in India. Mrs. Besant, editor of the New India,
a veteran journalist, said “ An Anglo-Indian editor in Madras
:
was allowed to make the most violent attacks on Indians who

advocated the reforms that are now Law. But if an Indian paper
replied to the attack, it found itself accused of exciting hatred.

A Christian paper attacked the Muslims in an insulting way but
the Government took no notice, while a Muslim paper was censured
for attacking Christians.”
The Sapru Committee found out some more interesting facts
about the Indian Press of that time. Nine-tenths of the editors in
Northern India, were semi-educated. The Chairman remarked
that, “ excepting one or two, they were men with scarcely any
culture about them".
Tn the Central Government a Department of Publicity had been
set up under Dr. Rushbrook Williams on the recommendation of
Mr. Stanley Reed, who had organized the Government’s wartime
publicity. Dr. Rushbrook Williams deposed to the Press Laws
Committee that his work was to keep in touch with editors, and to
remove misconceptions. “ The Department (of Central Bureau
of Information) which for the sake of convenience is a sub-section
of the Home Department, is really a link between the Government
and the Press. The most important part of my duties is to examine
the current Press with the object of finding out topics in which the
" Illustrated Weekly of India (Bombay, October 20, 1957), p. 25,
44
Sponsor or Editor
public is interested and on which it requires information, and of

finding out matters in connection with which the action of Govern-
ment is criticised .... Our duty is then to extract the more
important of these statements and to bring them to the notice of the
departments concerned. .
" 26 .
.
The Press Laws Committee recommended the repeal of the 1908

and 1910 Acts, the Amendment of the Registration of the Press
and Books Act.
Gandhiji was now pouring out fire through his pen. He felt keenly
that the alien government had no right to govern. So it was his
duty, he held, to propagate the so-called sedition. If the articles
27
were not seditious enough did it not mean that his pen was weak?
In passing, it may be mentioned that Gandhiji at the helm of
affairs in the Indian National Congress, was also in charge of
publicity for the organization. The Congress Working Committee
earlier resolved in favour of foreign propaganda during this critical
period and asked Gandhiji to finally decide on the matter and
take necessary steps. Gandhiji, in the Young India of March 9,
1922, expressed Ms views against publicity abroad. His points were:
(a) people in the country will be made less self-reliant as they will
depend on outsiders to help in their struggle ; and (b) independent
interest of other countries about the Indian condition will cease.
He gave an instance of the Italian newspapers who were showing
interest in collecting news of their own. He would, as a journalist,
rather prefer interest being created. He had other objections, too,
on administrative and organizational grounds.
The reader will like to compare this situation with the one when
he, more than once, visited India and England to get the support
of newspaper editors and public men on the South African question.
Now he was relying more and more on Ms and his countrymen’s
strength. Moreover, he was convinced, that justice, was with
him.
The British Government was unwilling to allow any more of this
On March 11, 1922, the editor of the Young India
stuff in printing.
along with the printer was produced before the court for writing
a*
Bombay, 1962), p. 201.
87
B. Patlabhi Sitaramayya : The History of the Indian National Congress,
Padma Publications, Bombay, 1946), Vol. T, p. 238,
45
seditious articles like ‘

The Puzzle and
Tampering with Loyalty ’, *
its Solution and Shaking the Mane

',
‘
Gandhiji was sentenced to six years imprisonment. For two

years the flow of GandhijTs invigorating and inspiring articles in
the Young India and the Narajivan, were missed. The circulation
also came down from 21,500 to 3,000.
How was Gandhiji spending his time in prison? Though a civil
disobeyer outside, he was a model prisoner abiding punctiliously
the prison rules. In his letter to Hakim Ajmal Khan, his close
associate, on April 14, 1922, he gave a glimpse of his life in
Yeravada prison.
“ .... My cell is in itself, decent, clean ami airy. The permission to sleep
in the open air is a great blessing to me, as 1 am accustomed to sleeping in the
open. I rise at four to pray. ... At six I begin my studies. ... At seven in
the evening, when it is too dark to read, 1 finish my day’s work. At eight 1 betake
ashram prayer. My studies include the Koran
myself to rest after the usual ‘ ’ ‘
the Ramayana of Tulsidas 5 ; books about Christianity, excercises in Uidu

*
and much else. I spend six hours on these literary efforts. ..."
In prison he read about 150 books on religion, literature, social
and natural He read the whole of the Mahdbharata and
sciences.
the six systems of Hindu philosophy in Gujarati. He also read
Bhuler’s Manusmriti and Max Muller's Upanishads, as also Paul
Carus’ The Gospel of Buddha Rhys Davids’ Lectures on Buddhism,
,
Amir Ali’s The Spirit of Islam and History of Saracens, Shibli’s

Life of the Prophet, Dr. Mahomed Ali’s Koran, Dean Farrar’s
Seeker,'/ After God Moulton’s Early Zorastrianism, Henry
1
James’ The
Varieties of Religious Experience, Hopkin's Origin
and Evolution of Religions.
He read Gibbon’s Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire, Bacon's
Wisdom of the Ancients, Buckle's History of Civilization, James'
Our Hellenese Heritage, Kidd’s Social Evolution, Motley’s Rise of
the Dutch Republic, Wells’ Outline of History, Geddc’s Evolution
of Cities, Lecky’s European Morals and Roscberry’s Life of Pitt .
He also read Goethe’s Faust, Tagore’s Sadhana Shaw’s

, Man and
Superman, and Kipling's Barrackroom Ballade. 2 *
Gandhiji wrote a primer, and a Urdu manual. He intended
to write in prison, his autobiography. But could not do it. Instead,
he wrote most of the manuscript of * Satyagraha in South Africa
“ D. G. Tendulkar Mahatma (V. : K. Jhaveri and D. G. Tendulkar,
Bombay, 1951), Vol. II, p. 147.
46
Sponsor or Editor
After his release in April 1924, he wrote a series of articles in the

Young India giving details of his prison life. Friends advised him
to take a few months rest as he was still convalescing from the
recent appendicitis operation. But he felt that the “ editorial job
would be for him rather a kind of mental recreation than a task
It was his channel of communication with his beloved people. He
appealed from ‘ Juhu rest house “ If all my time and energy

' :
were taken up seeing and entertaining you, it will not be possible

for me to edit the weeklies in the way I desire.”
In the first article after release in the Young India, dated April
3, 1924, under the caption

44
4
For the Readers —Past and Present
he wrote not without much hesitation that 1 resume the
: It is
editorship of Young India. In taking up the editorial control of

Navajivan and Young India, 1 am following the Light as far as I
see it. There will be no new method or policy developed in
. . .
the pages of Young India. I hope they will not be stale. Young
India will be stale when Truth becomes stale.”
He was not only devoting himself to the editor’s job, but was
also suggesting others to take up the honourable profession of
journalism. On September 15, 1924, he wrote to Shri Jawaharlal
44
Nehru Why may you not take up remunerative work ? After
:
all you must live by the sweat of your brow even though you may
be under father’s roof. Will you be correspondent to some news-

papers?” 39 He was thinking on the same lines regarding his son,
Shri Devadas, whom he earlier introduced to the editor of the
Times of India.
As usual he was writing on all subjects not merely politics. Louis
Fischer remarked “ Great editor that he was, Gandhi dedicated
:
the entire May 29, issue of Young India to his 6,000-word article
4
on Hindu-Moslem Tension, its causes and cure
The liberty of the Press was constantly in his mind. The Bombay
Chronicle had to pay a fine for a defamation suit. Under the cap-
tion ‘Below the Belt’, Gandhiji, wrote in the Young India on
44
August 7, 1924 The Press law is gone only to be replaced by
:
new activities under the laws of sedition and libel .... The
editor of a daily newspaper when he begins writing his leading
article does not weigh his words in golden scales. He may be
so
Jawaharlal Nehru : A Bunch of Old Letters (Asia Publishing House,
Bombay, 1958), p. 41.
47
betrayed into a hasty word. Must he pay for it even though he

did it obviously in good faith without malice and in the public
interest ? These libel actions are calculated to demoralize Indian
journalism and make public criticism over-cautious and timid.
I am no lover of irresponsible or unjustifiably strong criticism.
But the caution to be beneficial must come from within and not
superimposed from without.”
He knew when to highlight a matter or ignore it. For example,
Lord Irwin succeeded Lord Reading as Viceroy on April 1, 1926.
“ But the fateful change ”, records Mr. Louis Fischer, “ was not
mentioned in Young India." Gandhiji was then busy writing on
the question of the killing of dogs under the caption * Is this
humanity ’.
But his silence on the political changeover was much more
eloquent.
—
Though his Congress Presidential work he was elected for
—
Belgaum Session exacted much of his time, he was trying to answer
hundreds of questions through the columns of his paper. Seldom
did any editor handle such voluminous correspondence. Issues
of the Young India were then full of questions from readers, both
from the country and outside. To the editor no question that
affected man and society, should be treated lightly. The same
issue, would sometimes carry articles on the economics of
4
Charkha ’ or the ideal diet or hydropathy, side by side with the
most important political problem of the day. A reading of the
journal, from the title to the printer’s name, would open to the
reader an enormous world to be explored.
His advice to his correspondents were human and touching.
Here is an example quoted from an issue of the Young India of a
4
later date. Under the headline An unnatural father ’, Gandhiji
reproduced a letter of a young married man who went abroad.
During his absence, a friend of his got intimate with his wife and
as a result the wife conceived. His wife was now very repentant.
The father suggested an abortion. Under the circumstances, the
young man wanted advice from Gandhiji.
Gandhiji readily gave it. He suggested that the new born babe
should be accepted as the man’s child. When the wife is repentant,
the matter should be forgotten.
On October 28, 1926, he addressed a note ‘
To journalist
48
Sponsor or Editor
friends saying that requests are pouring in asking for his articles
',
for publication in other papers. Gandhiji had two alternatives.

Either to edit the Young India and the Navajivan or to write for
other papers. He preferred the first course and so stopped writing
for others. In a modest tone he added “ My field is very limited :
and even on the subjects 1 am familiar with, I cannot always be

original, I have no false notions about the efficacy of my writings.”
There are instances when he wrote for others. But that was very
rare and on very special occasions. One such was a signed article
by him written for the Forward the paper of Shri C. R. Das, in ,
Bengal. The an obituary, was published on June 20, 1926,

article,
under the caption Long Live Desh Bandhu.’ *
The Press in India were under great difficulties. A number of

them had to close because of securities demanded. The Forward
was one such. Under the caption A Brilliant Career, Gandhiji
5
‘
wrote on May 9, 1929, about the closure of the paper which proved
a thorn in the side of Government. He concluded “ Forward is
dead. Long Live Forward.”

In June Gandhiji wrote an editorial under tho
6, 1929, issue,
caption ‘
wherein he criticized the Government for
Atrocious ’
conducting searches in the office of the Modern Review, Calcutta,

and the residence of the editor.
In the Young India of January 12, 1928, Gandhiji wrote :
“ .... I long for freedom from the English yoke. I would pay any price
for it. I would accept chaos in exchange for it. For the English peace is the
peace of the grave. Anything would be better than this living death of a whole
people. This Satanic rule has well nigh ruined this fair land materially, morally
and spiritually.
“. .. My ambition
. is much higher than independence. Through tho
deliverance of India, I seek to deliver the so-called weaker races of the earth
from the crushing heels of western exploitation in which England is the greatest
..."
partner.
The same year, i.e. 1928, the Young India was publishing Shri
Jawaharlal Nehru's articles on Russia. It, incidentally, reflected
the new spirit that was growing in the country under the leadership
of Shri Nehru. In 1929 Gandhiji’s name was proposed for the
Presidentship of the Indian National Congress. He declined and
suggested the name of Shri Nehru. He wrote :
“ Older men have had their innings. The battle of the future has to be fought
by younger men and women. And it is but meet that they are led by one of
themselves. Pandit Jawaharlal has everything to recommend him. He
. . .
49
G—
has for years discharged with singular ability and devotion the office of secretary
of the Congress. By his biavery, determination, application, integrity and
grit he has captivated the imagination of the youth of the land. He has come
in touch with labour and the peasantry. His close acquaintance with the Euro-
pean politics is a great asset in enabling him to assess ours.” 50
When Shri Jawaharlafs name was accepted, Gandhiji said :
“ In bravery he is not to be surpassed. Who

can excel him in the
4
love of the country ? He is rash and impetuous,’ say some. This quality is an
additional qualification at the present moment. And if he has the dash and the
rashness of a warrior, he has also the prudence of a statesman. A lover of dis-
cipline, he has shown himself to be capable of rigidly submitting to it even where
it has seemed irksome. He is undoubtedly an extremist thinking far ahead
of his surroundings. But he is humble and practical enough not to force the
pace to the breaking point. He is pure as crystal, he is truthful beyond sus-
picion. He is a knight sans pear et sans reproche The nation is safe in his hands.”
Gandhiji had his problems with fellow journalists as well. On
August 22, 1929, under the heading
4
Reporters, a Nuisance"
he informs the readers how some reporters have circulated a story
about his weight being reduced to 80 lbs. and that he was so ill
that he fainted. This was baseless. He commented “ Often :
has my anger against them got the better, for a moment, of my

non-violence/’ He suggested to the agencies that
they warn their
46
reporters that they would be fined or dismissed for repeated offences

of the character I have described.”
Independence, as the ultimate goal for the country, was accepted
by the Lahore Session of the All India Congress in 1929-30. A
student of Indian Independence movement will be interested to
know, that Senator Blaine moved a resolution in the U.S. Senate,
for recognition by the United States, of the Indian Independence.
It inter alia stated :
44
Whereas the people of India arc today spontaneously moving towards the
adoption of self-government under the constitutional form with popular
approval, and seeking national independence, therefore, be It resolved
that the
Senate of the United States, mindful of the struggle for independence,
that gave
birth to our republic, participates with the people
with deep interest that they
feel for the success of the people of India
in their struggle for liberty and inde-
pendence.” 81
Gandhiji was preparing India for the civil disobedience move-
ment. But he was not quite sure what form it should take.
It soon
“ D. G. Tendulkar Mahatma : (V. K. Jhaveri and D. G. Tendulkar

Bombay, 1951), Vol. II, p. 488.
** Ibid.,
(1952), Vol. Ill, p. 1.
50
Sponsor or Editor
occurred to him that breaking of Salt Tax might be the first item
under disobedience movement. Salt is consumed by all. Gandhiji
wrote in the Young India, February 1930 “ There : is no article
like salt, outside water, by taxing which the State can reach even
the starving millions, the sick, the maimed and utterly helpless.
The tax constitutes, therefore, the most inhuman poll tax the
ingenuity of man can devise.”
On January 9, in the Young India he wrote I would
far rather be witness to chaos in India . . . than that I should
daily witness our gilted slavery.” The tone of his writings was
definitely changing. He
famous Dandi march on
started his ‘
'
March 12, 1930, to make salt with his own hands from water nature
had given in plenty. Even at that age of 61, and after fatiguing
journeys, he would, at the end of the day, write for the Young India.
The Viceroy promulgated an Ordinance on April 27, reviving
the Press Act of 1910. On the Press Act, Gandhiji made a statement
which was published after his arrest, in the Young India of May 8,
1930 :
. Act contains additional provisions making the whole piece more

. .
deadly than before ... it is a veiled form of Martial law. . . . The pressmen
if they are worthy representatives of public opinion, will not be frightened by
the ordinance. Let us realise under the wise dictum of Thoreau that it is difficult
under the tyrannical rule for honest men to be wealthy. ... I would therefore
urge pressmen and publishers to refuse to furnish securities and if they are
called upon to do so, either to cease publication or to challenge the authorities
to confiscate whatever they like .... They may confiscate type and machi-
nery, they will confiscate pen and still less speech .... There is hardly a man
or woman breathing in India who with every breath does not breathe disaffection,
sedition, disloyalty,and whatever other terms one may use to describe the
mentality of the nation which has set its mind on destroying the existing system
of Government.”
The press responded magnificently. As M. Barns says : “ Never
before had the press played so important a part in the national
campaign and enthusiasm was kindled and maintained by the
vigorous action of the Nationalist newspapers. . Indeed, all . .
the methods which a nationalist press might be expected to use in a

country at war were employed by the journals supporting the
movement.” 32
Government fell upon the press with a heavy cudgel. By July
** Margarita Barns : The Indian Press (George Allen and Unwin Ltd.,
London, 1940), p. 373.
51
1930, 67 papers and 55 printing presses were shut down under the
Press Ordinance. The Manager of the Navajivan Press was
advised not to pay, if Government demanded, any deposit money.
Soon the press was forfeited and with it, the printing of the journals
stopped. The Young India began to appear in cyclostyle form till
the truce with the Government was signed.
In prison, Gandhij had more or less the same programme as during
i
the previous term. Every minute at his disposal was properly utilized.
He wrote a line or two to every inmate of the ashram. Addressing
the children as ‘
little birds,’ he wrote :
“ Ordinary birds cannot fly without wings. With wings, of

course, all can fly. But if you, without wings, will learn how to fly,
then your troubles will indeed be at an end. And I will teach you.
all
have no wings, yet I come flying to you every day in thought.

See, I
Look, here is little Vimla, here is Hari, and here Dharmakumar.
You also can come flying to me in thought. There is no need of a
who know how to think. The teacher may guide
teacher for those
but he cannot give us the power of thinking. That is latent in
us,
us. Those who are wise get wise thoughts. ...” His weekly
letters to other inmates appeared in theYoung India and were
subsequently published in book form From Yeravada Metndir. —
His other literary activity in prison, was the translation of the
hymns from the Upanishads and other Sanskrit scriptures.
The famous Gandhi-Irwin Pact was signed in 1931. In the notifi-
cation issued by the Government of India dated March 5, 1931, it
was agreed that the Civil Disobedience Movement would be stopped.
“ The publication of News-sheets in support of the
Civil Disobe-
dience Movement ” will be discontinued. On March 6, Gandhiji
gave an interview to the Pressmen, when the following question
and answer took place :
“ Q. Do you intend bringing out Young India again ?
A. As soon as I can. It all depends on the putting into effect the settlement,
which implies the return of machinery, etc., which was. confiscated under the
Press Ordinance. I would certainly be eager to resume the printing of Young
India. Of course, Young India has continued to be published on a
cyclostyle.
We have suspended the publication of this week’s issue to fulfil the terms of
settlement, which includes the discontinuance of unauthorised news-sheets.” 38
The paper resumed publication next week.
** B. Pattabhi Silaramayya : The History of the Indian National Congress
(Padma Publications, Bombay, 1946), Vol. I, p. 450.
52
Sponsor or Editor
In the first issue of March 12, 1931, he wrote that it had again
been possible to resume publication of the Young India ‘ under
the law." He informed the readers how typed sheets were brought
out when the Government put its ban on printing. Thousands of
*
copies could be distributed due to *
brave and self-sacrificing
staff of the Young India and the Navajivan. He further added :
“ hope that the public will join me in the tangible manner they
I
can, namely by patronising Young India and what is more, fulfilling

the mission for which Young India stands. The readers know that
Young India and Navajivan do not exist for a commercial purpose.
They are published for the sole purpose of educating the nation to
win ‘ purna swaraj through truthful and non-violent means.”
’
The objective of the Young India and the Navajivan was to reach
that goal. His mighty pen was directed for that purpose. Freedom
did not only mean attaining political independence. It was freedom
from want and hunger— economic freedom as well. It should further
aim at social justice. Unless political freedom was attained, equit-
able justice could not be ensured.
It will not be out of context to reproduce the following conver-
sation narrated by Mr. H. C. Perry of the Times of India 34
—
“ This is my son he wants to be a journalist,” said Mahatma
Gandhi, as he smilingly introduced young Devadas. . . And
.
‘
what do you want? 1 couldn’t resist asking the father.

’ *
I want
my country to be free,’ said Gandhi senior.”

In August 1931, Gandhiji sailed for England to attend the Round
Table Conference. Here he came in touch with the newspapers
which did not conform to his own ideal— papers devoted to truth.
He became disappointed with the twentieth century journalism.
To his great dismay he found that newspapers could twist matters
to suit their convenience. Service to self-interest and not the
interest of humanity was the prevailing trend.
Incidentally, in England he met Mr. Charlie Chaplin, the great
comedian. In the October 8, 1931, issue of the Young India, Shri M.
Desai narrates how innocently Gandhiji asked who Mr. Charlie
Chaplin was.
On his return to India Gandhiji wrote under *
A Retrospect
*
(the Young India December 31, 1931) :

“ Never since taking up the
** The Times of India OBombay, November, 1956).
53
Mahatma Gandhi— The Journalist
editorship of Young India have I, though not being on a sick bed
or in a prison, been unable to send something for Young India or
Navajivan as I was during my stay in London .... Fortunately,
Mahadev Desai was with me and though he too was over-worked,
he was able to send a full weekly report for Young India."
Gandhiji was soon arrested on reaching India.
C. Harijan
“
.... In view of consideration stated in Mr. Gandhi’s letters
of October 18th and October 24th. . . in connection with the
problem of untouchability, they (Government) are removing all
restrictions oncorrespondence and publicity in regard to
visitors,
matters which, in Mr. Gandhi’s own words, * have no reference to
civil disobedience and are strictly limited to removal of untouch-
ability . . thus ran the Government order conveyed to

.
Gandhiji on November 3, 1932, in prison, where he was detained

in connection with the Civil Disobedience Movement.
He was now thinking in terms of a new weekly. It would be
devoted to the cause of the Harijans or men of God as Gandhiji
‘ ’
called the untouchables. He would engage himself fully for eradi-

cation of this social evil. The wizard was again wielding his pen
for a great cause.
In a letter dated January G. D. Birla, the indus-
8, 1933, to Shri
trialist, Gandhiji wrote have revived my suggestion
that the English edition at least should be published in Poona, and
it can be published, not simultaneously with the Hindi, but on
Fridays, if the Hindi is published on Mondays. The English

edition may then be issued under my supervision ...” 35 .
The paper Harijan first appeared on February 1 1, 1933, and was

priced at one anna. Shri R. V. Sastry became the editor and the
weekly was published under the auspices of The Servants of Un-
touchables Society. Ten thousand copies were printed for the
first issue.
It carried an English rendering by Poet Tagore of a Bengali

poem of Shri S. Datta, entitled ‘
Scavenger.’ Tagore’s poem on the
same theme was also published in ,
a subsequent issue of the
as
G. D. Birla : In the Shadow of the Mahatma (Orient Longmans,
Bombay, 1953), p. 89.
54
Sponsor or Editor
Harijan. There were news items giving information regarding

temple opening for ‘
Harijans The main editorial was devoted
exclusively to untouchability. Next there was a column, To the ‘
Reader,’ in which explaining the importance of the newly launched

movement, Gandhiji said, “ since the movement has a world-wide
significance and seeks the sympathy, if possible, of the whole
humanity, it is necessary to keep the world acquainted with its
implications and progress The paper, he made it clear, would
be devoted for the service of ‘ Harijans and would highlight all
’
efforts for the removal of untouchability.

“ You will note,” he commented, “ that no advertisements are
being taken for the upkeep of the paper. It has to depend solely
upon the subscriptions received.” The page ended with a notice
to the subscribers reminding them that “ subscriptions should be
paid strictly in advance.”
In a signed article in the Harijan dated February 25, 1933,
Gandhiji explained that the Hindi edition was to be published
first. But as there was delay, the English came out earlier. “T am
happy to be able to inform the reader that the Hindi edition will
have been out before this is in his hands. Arrangements are pro-
ceeding as fast as possible for the publication of provincial editions
in the provincial languages e.g. in Bengali, Marathi, Tamil,
Guzrati etc.”
Explaining the term ‘
Harijan Gandhiji wrote :
“ It is not a name of my own coining. Some years ago, several ‘

untouchable
’
correspondents complained that I used the word * asprishya ’ in the pages of

‘
the Navajivan. Asprishya ’ means literally untouchable. I then invited them
to suggest a better name, and one of the untouchable correspondents suggested
the adoption of the name ‘ Harijan ’, on the strength of its having been used
by the first poet-saint of Guzrat. ... I thought that it was a good word.
‘
Harijan ’ means a man of God. All the religions of the world describe God
pre-eminently as the Friend of the friendless, Help of the helpless, and Pro-
tector of the weak. The rest of the world apart, in India, who can be more
friendless, helpless or weaker than the forty million or more Hindus, who are
classified as untouchables. ..."
Gandhiji was conducting the paper from the prison in Poona.
He was released on May 8, 1933. On May 13, he wrote :
“ All should know that even though I am supposed to
be a free man ;
Harijan will continue to be edited as if I was in prison. It will still
be solely devoted to the ‘ Harijan ’ cause and will scrupulously
exclude all politics.”
55
He was again taken to prison, but was given the facility, by the
Government, of sending instructions or contributions to the Harijan
editor three times a week. He was released on August 23.
In September 1933, Gandhiji moved to the Wardha Ashram,

and devoted himself more and more to the Harijan cause.
‘ ’
Though still weak, he would contribute regularly to the journal.

He reiterated: “ Harijan will remain what it has been ever since its
inception. It will rigorously eschew all politics.”
4
The Harijan became the mouth-piece for the Harijan movement
’
and village industries. There were criticisms for this. Gandhiji

“ Any problem
explained ( Harijan December 21, 1924):
,
. . . .
connected with the welfare of villages as a whole must be intimately

related to the
4
Harijans,’ who represent over a sixth part of India’s
population. Those who complained of monotony were perhaps
not sufficiently interested in the No doubt it would be
cause.
true criticism, if I were told that the columns of Harijan were not
as interesting as they might be made. There are causes for this
which are inherent in the movement itself.”
Again he was demonstrating, if it at all needed, that service should
be the motto of journalism. He was serving the cause of India’s
teeming millions. It was much more. He was serving humanity.
There was a complete black-out of important political news of
the day in the Harijan. It made no mention of the Congress session,
nor of his retirement from politics. The Government of India Act
which got Royal assent in 1935, did not have any place in the journal.
On the other hand there were more and more articles on village-
4
made gur,’ hand-pound rice, village cleanliness, nutritious
food, cow's milk vs. buffalo’s, from waste to wealth through night
soil, etc.
He started village reconstruction work, particularly the revival

of cottage industries, in nearby villages. Scientific facts were made
known on importance of honey, fresh vegetables, tamarind, etc.
There were researches on nutrition and balanced diet. Snakes
were divided into poisonous and non-poisonous ones and treat-
ments fox snake bites were explained. Village sanitation was vigo-
rously publicized.
Books on rural problems were reviewed. Useful extracts from
books were published for the benefit of all. To enlighten the rural
workers, rural uplift programmes in other countries were narrated.
5$
Sponsor or Editor
6
Wardha, like Sriniketan ’
of Poet Tagore, soon became a labo-
ratory for rural work.
Anything indigenous or country-made was worthy of recom-
mendation. He gave a letter of appreciation a very rare one to — 4
—
a barber. It was dated November 25, 1939, Anand Bhavan,’
46
Allahabad. He wrote: Munnilal has given me a fine shave with
1 ’
devotion. His razor is country-made and he shaves without soap.
In a leading article in the Harijan , Gandhiji, in a simple lucid
style, spoke about the rural development programme in a village.
" Anantpur is a little village in Saugar district, C.P., containing 177 houses
with a population, roughly, of 885. It has no post office or telegraph office.
There is a weekly service from the nearest post office, Relly, twelve miles from
Anantpur. It is a typically poor village of poor India. The villagers are occupied
not more than four months in the year. There was hardly any supplementary
occupation for the villagers as a whole before an event that happened four years
ago. . . .
“ It was in 1929 that a young man, with a single-minded

zeal seldom sur-
passed, chose Anantpur for one year's travelling in search
his experiment, after
of such a village. . His name is Jathalal Govindjee. He does not know
. .
English. He is no Gujarati scholar. Himself a town-bred man, by dogged

pertinacity he has inured himself to the hardships of village life and lives like,
and in the midst of, villagers. He has three companions with him. He is a
thorough believer in one thing at a time and, therefore, will not pursue other
social service, no matter how tempting it may be. If the spinning wheel is well
established in every cottage, he thinks that all other problems that puzzle and
drag down villagers will solve themselves. They visit every cottage and offer
to teach them ginning, spinning, carding, weaving and dyeing. They improve
their wheels and manufacture new ones for sale only from the material available
in the village. This has given extra work to the village carpenter and the village
blacksmith. Every item is well thought out. They have an almost complete
record of the condition of every cottage and also its dwellers. They have made a
fairly accurate study of the villagers’ wants and woes, customs and manners,
and they have published their report in Hindi. Their workshop is a busy hive.
Work is being done in a neat and methodical manner. A common log-book is
kept containing a day-to-day summary of the work done by each worker. I
have mentioned only four foundation workers. Needless to say they have raised
workers in seventeen villages they are now serving within a five-mile radius of
Anantpur. ...”
4
Anantpur was a Harijan ’ village. Anything connected with
4 5
Harijan was getting due publicity. Sometimes, he would go to
4
the farthest to espouse the cause of Harijans \ The earthquake
of 1934, he said, was due to the sin of caste Hindus against untouch-
ables. This brought a sharp rejoinder from Poet Tagore.
57
‘It has caused me a painful surprise ”, wrote the poet, “ to find Mahatma
Gandhi accusing those who blindly follow Iheii own social custom of untouch-
ability,of having brought down God's vengeance upon certain parts of Bihar,
evidently specially selected for His desolating displeasure. It is all the
more
unfortunate, because this kind of unscientific view of phenomena is too
readily
accepted by a large section of our countrymen, f keenly feel the indignity
of it,
when I am
compelled to utter a truism in asserting that physical catastrophies
have their inevitable and exclusive origin in certain combination of
physical
facts. Unless we believe in the inexorableness of the universal
law in the working
of which God Himself never interferes, we find it impossible to justify
His ways
on an occasion like the one which has sorely stricken us in an overwhelming
manner and scale.”
Following an interview with Mrs. Sanger, he devoted a few
articles on family planning. He advocated self-restraint
against
contraceptives. “ What has been possible for you is
not possible
for all young men. 1 can restrain myself. But my wife cannot,"
read a frank letter to the editor. “ If he h>
The editor advised
:
sincerely desirous that his wife should be weaned

from the sexual
desires, let him surround her with the purest love,
let him explain
the law to her, lethim explain the physical effects of union without
the desire for procreation, let him tell her what the vital
fluid
means."
It is of interest to note that while in
England as a student, Gandhiji
had not formulated definite ideas against artificial
means for birth
control. This was manifest when Dr. AIJinson,
who advocated
artificial methods, stood, for election
for the committee of the
Vegetarian Society. Dr. Allinson lost the election
because of his
views on birth control. Gandhiji resigned
from the committee.
“ It is to be noted that
he himself became a vigorous opponent, in
later years, of artificial methods of birth-control, advocating self-
control and continence.” 86
For a brief period, in 1936, he was not writing
for the Harijan,
due to ill-health. On February 29, he resumed
writimr. Under the
title ‘ Nothing Without Grace,’
he wrote:
I am now able, by way of trial, to
resume to a limited extent my talks with
the readers of Harijan. I shall not carry
on private correspondence With refer-
correspondents’ personal problems or
domestic difficulties, except
those with which I have already concerned
myself, and I shall not accept public
en^gements or attend or speak at the public
gatherings. There are positive
directions about sleep, recreation, exercise
and food, with which the reader
Pol * k ’ H R
Brailsford and Lord Pethick-Lawrence
‘
: Mahatma
Gandhi (Odhams Press Ltd., London,
1949), p. 15.
$$
Sponsor or Editor
is not concerned and with which, therefore, I need not deal. I hope that the
readers of Harijan and correspondents will cooperate with me and Mahadev
Desai, who has in the first instance to attend to all correspondence, in the obser-
vance of these restrictions.”
In the September 24, 1938, issue of the Harijan, GandhijL wrote :
“ ... Harijan is not a newspaper, it is a viewspaper representing

.
those of one man. Even Mahadev and Pyarelal may not write
anything whilst I am alive.”
He sought the indulgence of readers and correspondents if they
were not served in time or at all. “ For the time being whilst —
Mahadev's illness lasts, readers will overlook the gaps they will
notice in the editing of the Harijan .” Much later in the July 19,
1942, issue, he explained further as to how a viewspaper differs
from a newspaper. “ Let it be known too that Harijan is a views-
paper as distinguished from a newspaper. People buy and read
it not for amusement but instructions and regulating their daily
conduct. They literally take their weekly lessons in non-violence."

As a protest against the British Government’s action involving
India in war without consulting her, Gandhiji started individual ‘
Satyagraha by asking people na ek pai, na ek bhai (not a

’ ‘
'
farthing, nor a man) for the war efforts. On October 18, 1939, the
editor of the Harijan and allied weeklies received a notice to the
effect that “ no account of incidents leading up to
’
Satyagraha ‘
by Shri Vinoba Bhave and no aspect of his speeches or any

subsequent development ” should be given publicity to.
October 24, he wrote in the Harijan “ I cannot function
On :
freely if 1 have to send to the Press Adviser at New Delhi every

line I write about ‘ Satyagraha '. The three weeklies have been
conducted in the interest of truth and therefore, of all parties
concerned. But I cannot serve that interest if the editing has to
be done under threat of prosecution. Liberty of the Press is a
dear privilege .... I am unable to reconcile myself to the notice
which, although in the nature of advice, is in reality an order whose
infringement will carry its own consequence.”
But he was all the time feeling that he might have to suspend
the weeklies. He advised the people to carry the news from mouth
to mouth. He blessed these * walking newspapers and thought ’
these more honourable than garbled, one-sided ’ news-sheet.

‘
*
Bidding goodbye ’
to the readers (the Harijan, November
59
Gandhiji sorrowfully remarked :

“ I shall miss my
10, 1938)
weekly talks with you, as 1 expect you, too, will miss them. . . .
The suspension must, therefore, continue while the gagging

lasts .... It constitutes a Satyagrahi’s respectful protest against
the gag.”
In mid-December, 1941, he wrote a 25-page booklet Construct-
*
ive Programme.’ Now that the Harijan was suspended, it filled

the gap to some extent. The Harijan and the other two weeklies
resumed publication on January 18, 1942.
But things were not normal in the Press world. Government
restrictions were being increasingly imposed on papers. As a
he criticized, under the caption Draconian Order
‘ ’
journalist,
government instructions against the Bombay Sentinel, the Jagantar
of Bengal, and the Pratap of Punjab in the Harijan of May 3, 1942,
The Central Press Advisory Committee had earlier passed a resolu-
tion “viewing with grave concern the action of the three Pro-
vincial Governments, namely those of Bombay, Bengal and the
Punjab against three daily papers.” This was, it said “A viola- :
tion of the spirit of the agreement

” between the Government and
the Press. Gandhiji opined that the Press regulations were of such
sweeping character that anything and everything could be brought
under their operations.
By was sent to the Press, Government orders
the time the article
in case of the Bombay and the Jugantar were rescinded.
Sentinel
But said Gandhiji: “ What I have said has reference to the larger
question of publication of news and the Standing Committee
should take up a strong stand on the liberty of the Press to dissemi-
nate news in a sober and as far as possible accurate manner.”
India was watching over a rapid succession of political events in
—
the world after Pearl —
Harbour culminating in the British
Government’s proposal, through Sir Stafford Cripps. Gandhiji
was now convinced that the British would not leave India of their
own. He started with his writings in the Harijan, pleading with the
British to leave India, * Quit India.’ There was urgency and passion
in his writings. In his appeal ‘ To every Briton,’ he begged “ for a
bloodless end of an unnatural domination and for a new era,
even though there may be protests and wailings from some of us.”
(The Harijan, May 11, 1942).
Correspondents made enquiries whether Gandhiji was making
60
Sponsor or Editor
plans for launching a new movement. He said to them :
“ I have never believed in secrecy, nor do do so now. There are certainly

I
many plans floating in my brain. But just now, 1 merely allow them to float
in my brain. My first task is to educate the public mind in India and the
world opinion, in so far as I am allowed to do so. And when I have finished
that process to my satisfaction, 1 may have to do something. That something
may be very big, if the Congress is with me and the people are with me. Naturally,
I do want to carry the whole of the Congress with me if T can, as I want to carry
the whole of India with me. For, my conception of freedom is no narrow con-
ception. It is co-extensive with the freedom of man in all his majesty. I shall,
37
therefore, take no step without the fullest deliberation."
Gandhiji was also keeping the American public informed about
the state of affairs in Tndia. To Preston Gover of the Associated
Press of America; he said, “ I have every right to expect America
to throw her full weight on the side of justice, if she is convinced
of the justice of the Indian cause,”
Gandhiji, it may be mentioned in passing, had been criticized,
justly or unjustly, by his countrymen, for showing weakness for
foreign journalists. Many of his important announcements were
released through international news agencies. Much later, in the
Harijan of April 21, 1942, he explained the position.
“ An Indian journalist complains that our great men have a weakness for
foreign journalists to the extent of excluding Indians at their Press conferences,
and wonders whether I am myself free from
this weakness. For myself, I can
say, without fear of contradiction that have never been guilty of such partial-
l
ity. Having suffered a good deal for the crime of being an Asiatic, I am not
likely to be guilty of such weakness. And I must say that I know of no such
example as my friend adverts to, if only because public men can ill afford to
face a boycott by Indian Pressmen. What has happened with me and, so far as I
am aware, with others too is that they and I have found
it necessary at times to
give special interviews to foreign journalists when has been found necessary
it
in the interest of the common cause to get messages across the seas. It is
impossible in the present circumstance to do otherwise. It would be as foolish
to invite a boycott by foreign journalists and by Indian. An industrious person
will find out that Indian journalists have been preferred by Indian public men
again for the sake of the common cause. As a fellow journalist I would urge jour-
nalists, whether Indian or foreign to prefer their particular causes to their own
or their employer’s pockets or to descending to recriminations or personalities."
In July 19, 1942, issue of the Harijan , Gandhiji wrote :
“ Anxious enquiries are being made as to what I would do
if the Harijan
was suppressed. ... I would ask the enquirers not to be agitated if Harijan
is suppressed. The Harijan may be suppressed, its message cannot be, so long
37
D. G. Tendulkar : Mahatma (V. K. Jhaveri and D. G. Tendulkar,
Bombay, 1953), Vol. VI, p. 3.
61
as I Indeed, the spirit will survive the dissolution of the body and somehow
live.
through the millions.

s Deak; . . .
“ Let us see what Harijan is today. It is now published in English, Hindi,

Urdu (two places), Tamil, Tclugu (two places), Oriya, Marathi, Gujarati,
Kanarese (two places). It is ready to be published in Bengali, only waiting for
legal permission. Applications have coine from Assam, Kerala, Sind. All but
one have a large circulation compared to the other weeklies. I suggest that it is
no small matter to suppress such a paper. The loss will be more Government’s
than the people’s. They will incur much ill-will by suppressing a popular paper.”
“ And Harijan he cautioned, “ is not an anti-British paper. It is pro-British
from head to feet. It wishes well to British people. U tells them in the friend-
liest manner where in its opinion they err.”
The Anglo-Indian papers, I know, are Government favourites. They repre-

sent a dying imperialism. Whether Britain wins or loses, imperialism has to die.
It is certainly of no use now to the British people whatever it may have been
in the past. In that sense, therefore, Anglo-Indian papers arc really anti-British
as Harijan is pro-British. They are disseminating hatred day by day by hiding
the reality and bolstering imperialism which is ruining Britain. It is in order to
arrest the progress of that ruin that, am, I have put my whole soul into
frail as I
a movement which, if it is designed to free India from theimperial yoke, is equally
intended to contribute the mightiest war effort in their behalf.”
c
Gandhiji s slogan of Quit India ’
was followed by his call
*
Do or Die ’
for the country. He told the delegates to the Congress
Committee in Bombay in the first week of August, 1942 :
“ Hero
is a mantra, a short one, that I give you. You may imprint it on
your hearts and let every breath of yours give expression to it.
The mantra ’ is
* *
Do or Die.’ We shall either free India or die
in the attempt ; we shall not live to see the perpetration of our
slavery.Every true Congressman or woman will join the struggle
with an inflexible determination not to remain alive to see the
"
country in bondage and slavery. Let that be your pledge . . . .
There was a special request to fellow journalists.

“ .... A word to the journalists. L congratulate you on the support you
have hitherto given to the national demand. I know the restrictions and handi-
caps under which you have to labour. But I would now ask you to snap the
chains that bind you. It should be the proud privilege of the newspapers to lead
and set an example in laying down one’s life for freedom. You have the pen
which the Government can’t suppress. I know you have large properties in
the form of printing-presses, etc., and you would be afraid lest the Government
should attach them. I do not ask you to invite an attachment of the printing-
press voluntarily. For myself, I would not suppress my pen, even if the press
was to be attached. As you know my press was attached in the past and returned
later on. But I do not ask from you that final sacrifice. 1 suggest a middle way.
You should now wind up your standing committee, and you may declare that
62
Sponsor or Editor
you will give up writing under the present restrictions and take up the pen only
when India has won her freedom. You may tell Sir Frederick Puckle that he
can't expect from you a command performance that his press notes are full of
untruth, and that you will refuse to publish them. You will openly declare that
you are whole-heartedly with the Congress. If you do this, you will have changed
the atmosphere before the fight actually begins."
He appealed, as well, to princes, to Government servants, to
soldiers, to students with the request to help the struggle. But Shri
H. Mukherjee, Deputy Leader of the Communist Party in the Indian
Parliament criticizes “ No particular role was allotted to the
:
workers and the peasants, and though they formed the over-
whelming majority of the people they were expected simply to line
up in the manner directed by their superiors. The priority given to
journalists in Gandhi’s order of appeal is perhaps not entirely
accidental the Mahatma, with all his great courage and occa-
;
sional sublimity, had throughout his life a shrewd eye to publicity

whatever he thought or did.” 38
Gandhiji was arrested on August 8, 1942. The Harijan was
closeddown and all copies, old and new, confiscated by the Govern-
ment.When Gandhiji asked for an explanation from the Govern-
ment of Bombay, he was informed that “ The Government :
instructed the District Magistrate, Ahmedabad, to destroy all
objectionable literature from Navajiwan Press such as the old copies

of the Harijan newspapers, books, leaflets and other miscellaneous
papers. ... All the old files of Harijan since 1933 have been
destroyed.” 3d
Prison life this was eventful and tragic. He lost his Private
time,
Secretary, Shri Desai, who was more than a son to him.
Mahadev
His wife Kasturbai, breathed her last on February 22, 1944. On
inquiry from the Government, Gandhiji expressed his wishes with
regard to Kasturbai’s funeral rites :
“ Her body should be handed over to my sons and relatives which would
mean a public funeral without interference from Government. If that is not
possible, the funeralshould take place as in the case of Mahadev Desai and if
the Government will allow relatives only to be present at the funeral, I shall not
be able to accept the privilege, unless all friends, who are as good as relatives
to me, are also allowed to be present.
38
Hiren Mukherjee : Gandhiji—A Study (National Book Agency Pvt.
Ltd., Calcutta, 1958), p. 149.
3*
D. G. Tendulkar Mahatma (V. K.
: Jliaveri and D. G. Tendulkar,
Bombay, 1953), Vol. VI, pp. 228-229.
63
“ If this also is not acceptable to the Government, then those who have been
allowed to visit her will be sent away by me and only those who are in the
— —
camp detenus will attend the funeral.
This has been, as you will be able to bear witness, my great anxiety not to
44
make any political capital out of this most trying illness of my life companion.
But I have always wanted whatever the Government did to be done with good
grace, which I am afraid, has been hitherto lacking. It is not too much to expect
that now that the patient is no more, whatever the Government decide about
the funeral will be done with good grace/' 40
Gandhiji was released on May 6, 1944, and the Harijan was

revived on February 10, 1946, after a lapse of three and a half
years. Shri Pyarelal, Gandhiji’s Secretary, described events leading
to the reappearance of the journal thus :
“ While in Madras Gandhiji decided to resume publication of the

Harijan
weeklies which had been suppressed after the commencement of the ‘Quit India*
struggle. The re-appearance was not without a dramatic touch. Gandhiji had
hoped to post at Wardha the matter for the first issue to Ahmedabad, from
where the weeklies were printed and published. had been Gandhiji's pride
It
that during half-a-century of active Journalism, not one issue of his various
journals had ever failed to come out on time-even when he was roaming over
the length and breadth of India, Burma and Ceylon, and even during his visit
to England. But the special bringing him back from Madras, to quote a
speaker
in the Central Assembly, who compared it to a 6 drunken caterpillar in the
last
stage of inebriety reached its destination at midnight, seven hours late, when
the mad bound for Ahmedabad had already left Wardha. Gandhiji regarded
4
itas a bad beginning. Let us get the first issue of the weeklies struck in Bombay/
he suggested. 4 1 once did like that in Phoenix in the case of the Indian Opinion/
4
But what about despatch? The subscribers’ registers are all at Ahmedabad/
4
Let us wire the whole thing to Ahmedabad,’ some one suggested.
44
But the whole Hindustani and Gujarati copy would have to be transcribed
in Roman system of accepting telegrams in Indian scripts had not
script as the
yet been introduced. That took up the better part of the morning. Then some-
one had a brain wave. 4 Send the English articles by wire and the rest by
a
special messenger. If they can be through with the English earlier,
the press will
be able to catch up with the vernacular copy/
“
And so, a special messenger was despatched and all the three weeklies
came out on time after all the misadventures/’ 41
In the first issue, Gandhiji explained the reason for the revival
of the Harijan “ Why is Harijan revived ? This question
.
may have
occurred to many as it has to me. r may tell the reader
that no
40
Ibid., p. 296.
41
Pyarelal : Mahatma Gandhi—The Last Phase (Navajivan Publishing
House, Ahmedabad, 1956), Vol I, pp. 165-166.
64
Sponsor or Editor
special effort was made for its revival. An application for the
removal of the ban was made on December 3, 1945, and the ban was
removed on January 10, 1946. Many readers, including English and
American, had all along felt a void and they began to feel it more
after the defeat of the Fascist Powers. The reason for the feeling was
obvious. They wanted my reaction, in terms ofTruth and Non-*
violence, to the various events happening in India, if not in the
world. I wished to satisfy this desire/ 9
And again in February 24, 1946, issue he wrote :
“ I have taken up Harijan at such a critical moment in our country's history
that having undertaken to write I cannot wait in certain matters for publishing
my thoughts till the next number of Harijan is out. Then, too, it is published
not at the place where I reside but away from me. Thus exacting readers will
forgive me if they find tilings in the columns of Harijan which have already been
printed in the daily press. The reason
for publication is obvious. Harijan
goes to many readers who do
not read the papers in which my statements may
be published and in which accurate publicity can never be guaranteed. Harijan
is not a commercial concern in any meaning of the expression. It is published
purely in the interest of the cause of India's independence."
The next few of the Harijan were entirely taken up in

issues
discussing the food situation in the country. It was alarming and
he felt that his attention should now be concentrated on this. He
—
asked the Government what he called a peace time war effort ’
4
to engage the army and the navy in helping the production from
land and water. He advised people to shake off inertia. He asked
for the co-operation of all concerned to meet the calamity and said,
46
Grow more food was not a bad cry during the war. It is a greater
necessity now. Everything possible should be done to dfaw
. . .
water from the bowels of the earth. Cloth famine can and
. . .
ought to be averted by telling the millions to spin and weave in their

own villages, the State supplying them with cotton, where it is not
grown or available, and with the simple instruments of production
on hire or on long term purchase.”
The Private Secretary to the Viceroy met the rebel and non-
cooperator and the latter emphasized the need for closest co-opera-
46
tion in the face of the impending crisis. He suggested Food
should be grown on all cultivable areas, wherever water is or is
made available. The flower gardens should be used for growing
food crops. . . . All ceremonial functions should be stopped.
Women can play the highest part in the alleviation of the present
65
G—
distressby economising in their households. In nine-tenths of our

activity,we can manage our daily affairs without the aid of the
Government. . Panic must be avoided at all costs. We must
. .
refuse to die before death actually takes toll. ...”

He also requested people to confine daily wants regarding
food to the minimum.” He asked city people to depend more on
milk, vegetable, oil and fruit so that the grains and pulses could be
used by the villagers.
Some peoplecriticized when Gandhiji suggested catching of
fish tosupplement food. “ Does it not entail violence?” Gandhiji
admitted that it does. “This kind of violence is inherent in all
embodied life, therefore, in man too. . . . The man who coerces
another not to eat fish commits more violence than he who eats
it. ... I do not consider it violence to permit the fish eater to
eat fish. It is my duty to suffer Ahimsa is the highest duty.
it.
Even if we cannot practise it in full, we must try to understand

its spirit and refrain as far as is humanly possible from violence.”
Great political changes were in the offing. Independence of the
country could be announced any time. But Gandhiji was. busy
with his own programme. He came to Bengal to tour round the
villages, where, like in some other parts of India, Hindu-Muslim
religious tension was continuing. He found his non-violence
theory at stake and wanted to test it in Bengal’s interior villages.
He decided to stop all work in connection with the Harijan and
other weeklies. Time permitting he agreed to send occasional
contributions for the weeklies.
He came back to Delhi in April 1947. His mind was full of tales
of woe of what he saw or heard in Bengal. He cautioned the news-
papers against misleading news. He even went to the extent of
advising people not to read newspapers.
On June 2, 1947, Gandhiji wrote in the Harijan :
“ Readers must have noticed week I started writing for the Harijan.
that last
How long I shall be able to continue
do not know. God’s will be done in
it, I
this, as in other things ... the circumstances under which I
had stopped
writing for the Harijan have not altered. Pyarelalji is far away from me and,
in my opinion, is doing very important work in Noakhali. He is taking part
4
in what I have called the maha yagna ’. Most of the other helpers are also
unable to help under the stress of circumstances or other causes. To resume
writing for the Harijan under these adverse conditions would be ordinarily
considered madness. ..."
66
Sponsor or Editor
There were communal disturbances at places. The newspapers,

he felt, were through irresponsible reporting, helping in creating
panic. They were not at all serving the community. On the other
hand, Government was trying to suppress information. He did not
On March 20, 1947, he wrote to the Prime Minister,
like that either.
Shri Nehru :
“
I would like you. ; to tell me what you can
.
about the Punjab tragedy. I know nothing about it save what is

allowed to appear in the Press which I thoroughly distrust. Nor
am I in sympathy with what may be termed by the old expression
of * hush hush policy. ’ It is amazing how the country is adopting
almost the very measures which it criticised during British ad mini-
stration. Of course, I know the reason behind it. It makes no appeal
to me.”
India was divided and the communal frenzy was at its height.
Pakistan Press was exaggerating reports of riots. One such was
regarding Kathiawad. Gandhiji sent his workers to investigate the
matter. It was found out that reports were mostly false. The local
Muslim leaders admitted, through a wire to Gandhiji, that there had
been much communal riots. Gandhiji nar-
exaggeration about
rated this in his prayer meeting on December 5, 1947. “ The proper
thing,” he said, “ is to trust truth to conquer untruth.” Later on,
in his prayer speech, he gave a practical suggestion as to how to
report on communal disturbances and avoid exaggeration. There
should, he said, be a joint board to which all reports about com-
munal troubles would be submitted for scrutiny. The board, if
necessary, may refer such cases to State Ministers before giving
publicity. 42
For sometime past he was thinking of closing down the Harijan.
In a letter to Sardar Vallabhai Patel, in July 1947, he wrote :
“ .... I also feel that Harijan should now be closed. It does not
seem to me to be right to give contrary guidance to the country.”
He was sick at heart when he did not see eye to eye with the acti-
vities of some of his colleagues.
To the Manager of the Harijan, he wrote :
“ Perhaps we may
have to decide to close Harijan. My mind rebels against
. . .
many things that our leaders are doing. Yet I do not feel like
actively opposing them. But how can I avoid it if I am running a
" D. G. Tendulkar : Mahatma (V. K. Jhaveri and D. G. Tendulkar,
Bombay, 1954), Vol. VIII, p. 61.
67
Journalist
Mahatma GantM-The
want to run it without me, nor does tire
paper ? You do not
*
Sardar V’
readers of the Harijan, Gandhiji said “ It
Addressing the :
occurs to that now that freedom from the British rule has come,
me
are no longer wanted.” He was for the last few
the Harijan papers
on an average, only one and a half columns
months contributing,
columns of the paper were filled with his prayer
for a week. The
him, was “ hardly satisfactory.” He,
speeches. This, to therefore,
readers’ frank opinion as to the need of the publication.
asked his
wanted him to retire and close down
Some correspondents the
weeklies. “ I detect anger in this advice My life line is cast in
not attained the state which is known as
public service- I have
‘
action in inaction ’. My
activity, therefore, seems at present
to continue till the last breath. Nor is it capable

to be destined of
into watertight compartments. The root of all lies
being divided
in Truth, otherwise
known to me as Non-violence. Hence the papers
as they are. ‘ One step enough for me Thus he
must continue
of September 28, 1947.
wrote in the Harijan
Under the caption ‘
My Duty,’ he summarized the replies
the Harijan “ A fair number of replies have
and wrote in :
been
received in answer to
my query. The majority of the readers, with
only a few exceptions, want the papers to be continued. The pur-
the readers desire my views on the present
pose of these letters is that
This means that, probably, after my death, these will
day topics.
no longer be required.
Soon Gandhiji had to go to Noakhali, now in East Pakistan,
on a peace mission, to restore confidence among tire Hindus who
and properties at the hands of the Muslims. The charge
lost lives
of the Harijan was temporarily vested in two of his colleagues.
They soon resigned. In spite of the heavy burden, Gandhiji was
prepared to take up the
full responsibility provided the Trustees
agreed. Earlier they

expunged some of his remarks in a prayer
meeting from the text reproduced in the Harijan. He wrote to one
“ I fully reaIise Harijan does not belong to me.
of the Trustees :
It really belongs to
you who are conducting it with such diligence.
Whatever authority I exercise is moral.”"
- It reads like a
pathetic confession from one who not only built
" • Mahatma Gandhi— The Last Phase (Navajivan Publishing

Pyarelal
House, Ahmedabad, 1956), VoL X, PP- 598-599.
68
Sponsor or Editor
up the morale of the people through his writings but led the nation
to Independence. The colleagues in whom he had explicit faith,
followers whom he made national leaders, people whom he made
ministers were, on many occasions disagreeing with him on funda-
mental issues on which he felt his theories were based and his life
principle dedicated. He was noticing the change and silently with-
drew from the active field.
Gandhiji came to Delhi in May, 1947, and resumed writing for j
the Harijan, after a lapse of over six months. He wrote till the end, \
which came on January 30, 1948. He was killed by an assassin’s

bullet while going to conduct a prayer meeting in Delhi. The frail
voice which moved and inspired millions of people stopped
suddenly.
The next issue of the Harijan dated February 3, 1948 carried a
photograph of Gandhiji on the front page. In a signed editorial
—
‘Out of the Ashes’ Dr. Rajendra Prasad, later elected President
of the Republic of India, wrote
“ Mahatma Gandhi is no more in flesh and blood to speak to us, to console
us, to guide us. But did he not tell us often that the body is mortal and transient,
that the
4
atma ' alone is immortal and imperishable ? Did he not tell us that
God would keep his body so long as He had any use for it ? May be that bis
spirit freed from the body will work all the more freely and
limitations of the
create instruments to complete and fulfil what remains unaccomplished. May
be that out of the ashe9 on the banks of the Jamuna will arise forces that will
blow off all the mist and cloud of misunderstanding and distrust and establish
the kind of peace and harmony for which he lived and worked and alas l at
last victim to the assassin's bullet. ..."
“ My my
message/’ said Gandhiji.. The life was gone
life is ;
so how messages could be poured through the columns of the

Harijan ? The Journal announced the following item on Feb-
ruary 15, 1948, under the signature of C. Rajagopalachari, the
then Governor-General of India.
“ The Harijan was Bapu’s voice. And when his body has been consigned
to the elements, the Harijan cannot go on. Any attempt to continue it must
take a different shape."
It continued for some time. Rut the journal ceased publication
soon.
69
1
3 Running the Desk
/
“ The post card is now finished and slipped into the basket. Again he turns
to the khadi stationery case. It is evidently an article that he is going to write,
because he extracts a number of odd sheets, with writing on one side, but
unused on the other. These are his ‘ pusti * sheets, carefully collected from the
blank pages on the backs of letters and other communications which come in
endless numbers by each post. Bapu begins to write. The article seems to be of
a serious nature, probably on some burning problem of the day, for a concen-
trated, even stern, look appears on his countenance. Before the article is finished
he begins to feel sleepy. The pen is laid in tne stand, and the tiny tin top is placed
on the balm bottle. The ‘ pusti ' sheets are carefully put on one side, and Bapu
turns and lies down on his gaddi. He removes his glasses, places them by the
side of his pillow, and in one or two minutes he is fast asleep, and breathing as
peacefully as a little child.” 1
Thus described Miss Mirabehn, the editor of the Young India
and the Harijan running the desk.
In his book Seven Months with Mahatma Gandhi Shri Krishnadas
gave another pen picture of the editor, in a different setting :
“ As I found Mahatmaji looking grave at all times, I rarely went to him
unless sent for. I suppose he assumed this seriousness in order to get through
his work.
Once or twice,had even seen him cooling his forehead and head with ice.
I
And yet everyday, whether in his room or in the train, he would go on calmly
and patiently writing articles for the Navajivan and the Young India, while all
round him people were making noise and the crowds were howling outside.
Such complete mastery over the mind seemed to me unique. When he had done
with the report of the Sasaram speech, he took up that of his Gauhati speech,
but put it by, having looked through it a little.”*
Unfortunately nobody has recorded a graphic picture of Gandhiji

1 Mirabehn Incidents of GartdhijVs Li/ef Ed. by Chandrashankar Shukla,
:
(Vora & Co., Bombay, 1949), pp. 186-187.

* Krishnadas : Seven Months with Mahatma Gandhi (S. Ganesan Co., &
Madras, 1928), p. 34.
70
Running the Desk
while editing the Indian Opinion in South Africa. Whatever titbits

we get, are from his own writing or passing references made by
Mr. Henry Polak. But we can visualize a short and thin man,
dressed in European attire, sitting on a chair, busily jotting down
notes for publication in the next issue of the Indian Opinion.
To Shri Chhaganlal, he wrote on October 26, 1906, from
London :
“ I have not a moment to spare. 8-30 p.m. and I have

It is now
not touched the Gujarati want to give you one
letter. If I can, I
leading article and one correspondence letter in continuation of

what I have sent you already.”
Gandhiji as we had seen, would insist on objective writing. As
model, he had before him the example of the Times, London,
as it used to be published in his student days. Gandhiji who started
reading newspapers only in England, had a strong liking for the
way the Times was edited. It was moderate in tone, accurate in
presentation of news.
Mr. Henry Polak recalled many incidents showing Gandhiji’s
high standard of responsibility while running the Indian Opinion.
“ He was always exact in his facts and he would never magnify his
case for the sake of argument.” 3
Once Mr. Polak commented vehemently “ and somewhat
acidly ” on certain reports, appearing in other papers, relating to
the Indian community in South Africa. Gandhiji advised him, to
quote Mr. Polak, “ ... it would be much better for me, as a
matter of professional self-discipline, and would have more desir-
able results for the cause of what we were both seeking to serve,
if I were to model my style rather upon the moderation and objec-
tiveness of the London Times than upon the more picturesque if

less accurate ways of the * cheaper,’ press. ” And Mr. Polak fol-
lowed his advice.
He would, in turn, not hesitate to accept good advice from his
colleagues. “ I remember telling him once, with mock editorial
gravity, that I could not send his * copy ’ to the printer unless he
rewrote it, which he did with due humility and with an amused
twinkle in his eye, ” recalled Mr. Polak. Gandhiji had not yet
acquired that commendable command over English which he
* H. S. L. Polak : Incidents of Gandhiji' s Life, fid. by Chandrashankar Shulda,
(Vora & Co., Bombay, 1949), p. 236.
71
developed in later years. Nor did he develop that news sense in
that early period of his journalistic life.
But from the very beginning he was against stunt in journalism.

He hated false or exaggerated reports. He abhorred discourtesy
’
in writing. In an editorial note captioned ‘
Journalistic Courtesy
in the Indian Opinion of November 3, 1906, he criticized the Natal
Advertiser saying “ There are times when mockery is permissible,
:
when one is desirous of defeating another's argument, but there

can never be an excuse for vulgarity. We fear very much that our
contemporary has overstepped the limits of journalistic courtesy
in what purports to be a reply to our article on Durban and its ‘
unemployed published in the issue of the journal of 20th

’
ultimo.”
Under an unsigned short note
—
is journalism ?
‘ What ’
the Indian Opinion of January 19, 1907, wrote : “ The Natal Adver-
tiser continues to bestow attention upon us, even if it be at times
without acknowledgment. We have read with great pain our con-

temporary’s remarks on Mr. James Godfrey’s address to the
London Indian Society. We have always necessitated that the
one true test of journalism is that it gives facts to the public. We are
constrained to say that our contemporary ignominiously failed in
conforming to the first days in the article we have referred to.” The
short note then gives facts about the case.
Under the sub-heading ‘Back-door Journalism,’ the Indian
Opinion of February 2, 1907, criticized the paper, the Natal Witness,
for misrepresentation of facts which inter alia said : “ Without
the Act practically no would have existed upon the
restrictions
back-door competition of the Arab Trade.”
Again on February under the sub-
9, 1907, the Indian Opinion,
heading ‘
Journalism of a Sort “ Last week I called
5
wrote :
my readers’ attention to the back-door methods of the Witness.

This week the Ladysmith Gdzette has made itself conspicuous.
It refers to the Indian Opinion as being one of the mouth-pieces of
‘
nasty, cheap, coloured labour of Natal.’ This seems to show that

the editor does not read this journal or else he would have seen,
on 29th December last, a leading article advocating repatriation of
Indian indentured labourers and offering its cooperation in the
matter. But I suppose we must not expect an editor to read a
journal which he vilifies.”
12
Running the Desk
During Mr. Henry Polak’s visit to India, in 1909-10, Gandhiji

wrote :
“ Keep your standards right. Everything else will follow.”
To his son Shri Manilal, Gandhiji wrote, as mentioned earlier,
“ You should write what is the truth in Indian Opinion What is
truth in journalism ? How does it differ from accuracy ? Are they
the same thing ? Truth is not only a question of knowledge. It

means more. It means the balancing of judgment in a most dis-
interested manner. It may be achieved in a weekly ; but it is very
to be truthful in the daily newspaper. When we consider
difficult
the condition in which it is produced, the number of agencies

through which the news passes, and the speed with which it is
gathered from all parts of the world, translated, transmitted,
selected, sub-edited, and printed.
Further, dependent on the time factor. In the hustle of a

it is
daily newspaper with a pull of conflicting interests always present

and the necessity of pleasing a wide public never out of mind,
truth in the sense of careful and balanced presentation can only
with luck, and occasionally, emerge. Even the most highly trained
and best informed journalist must be conscious as he writes that
his thought and knowledge are not sufficiently mature and that
had he not been writing to the habitual length and pattern of the
particular publication, he might not have taken just precisely the
view he did take. Whether his article is a report of complex
events or an editorial comment on the significance of these events,

to test it only by the accuracy of the facts it contains is to show an
abysmal ignorance of the art of journalism. Any practised jour-
nalistcan write a column which contains no single mis-statement of
fact and which is yet a damned lie from the first word to the
last.
Si milarly, incidental inaccuracies in fact or expression may occur
in an article by an honest reporter or who, with

editorial writer
the sweat of his brow, attempts to reach the truth by a careful

4
balancing of the fact and vigorous expression of his convictions.”
This is no apology for incorrect news or views. This is a point of

view arising out of peculiar circumstances caused by the vast tech-
nological imp rovement which has completely revolutionized news-
paper and turned it into a big commercial proposition.
In one of the unauthorised leaflets of the Satyagraha published
« Kingsley Martin : The Press the Public Wants (The Hogarth Press, London,
1947), p. 114,
73
between April 16 and April 28, 1919, Gandhiji wrote about the
poems that were attributed to him. He denied his authorship.
“My writings cannot be poisonous, they must be free from
anger. There can be no room for untruth in my writings.
. . . . . .
My writings cannot but be free from hatred towards an indivi-

”
dual
Gandhiji, as an editor, would correct himself publicly if he
found that some untruth had crept in his writings. To cite a
typical example, he compared the Jallianwala Bagh massacre,
immediately after the First World War, to that of Glenco. A
correspondent drew his attention saying that the latter was much
more horrible. In the next issue of the Young India Gandhiji ,
corrected the statement.

Mr. Jack C. Winslow narrated a similar incident during his first
visit to Gandhiji as arranged by Mr. C. F. Andrews “ One cha- :
racteristic incident of that visit remains with me. Charlie and I

had left Bapu lying on the verandah, and Charlie was telling me
about an article he had just written for the Manchester Guardian
about the Satyagraha movement then in progress in Travancore.
In glowing terms he had described how all eyes were now concen-
trated on this wonderful movement and no one was interested
any longer in the proposed Government reforms. ‘ 1 will just go
and show it to Bapu,’ said Charlie, * before I send it off ! ’ Pre-
sently he returned, thoroughly crest-fallen.What did Bapu think
of it ? I asked. *
Oh,Bapu said
* said Charlie,
Charlie, it is :
‘
what you would like to be true but it isn’t true.’ With all Bapu’s
:
idealism went a strong strain of realism, which Charlie Andrews

5
sometimes lacked.”
Why are papers chary to the idea of correcting mistakes or
publishing protests against misrepresentations ? man can be A
misrepresented, his ideas may be twisted. He has to read such
reports every day and cannot do anything unless he takes legal
action against this deliberate action. It is even difficult to persuade
a paper voluntarily to print even a letter of protest or correction.
The reason is psychological. No human being
would like admit-
ting himself in the wrong. Partly due to the papers’ belief that
it is
today and tomorrow are news, but yesterday is history. They do

* Chandrashaakar Shukla (Ed.) : Reminiscences of Gandhiji (Vora & Co.,
Bombay, 1951), p. 217.
74
Running the Desk
not want to pin-point attention to old news, particularly if it was

inaccurate. They desire to like their readers to assume that they are
infallible. And often they get the desired result.
To Gandhiji
correction had a meaning. In the Harijan of January 16,
different
1937, he wrote
“ I know there are readers of
:
Harijan who study
many articles that appear from time to time in Harijan. The
weekly is not published for providing momentary amusement or
pleasure for the reader. It is designed to be a serious contribution
to the Harijan cause in the widest sense of the term. It, therefore,
often contains writings of more than transitory value. Hence serious
errors need to be corrected. Such an error was detected in the
Harijan of the 9th inst. at page 383, 2nd Column, line 2. Read
”
‘ sub-human for * human ’.
’
Though he was well conversed with the subject he was writing

about, he would invariably check the information. “ Gandhiji
loved beauty of language too and always appreciated a well-written
article or letter. He was meticulous where his weekly articles for
the Harijan were concerned. They were always given in the first
instance to one of us to read and suggest any verbal or other
amendments, and then finally edited by himself before being sent
8
to the press.”
He would also try to guess the public reaction, whether that would
hurt the feelings of the people. “1 always aimed at establishing
”
an intimate and clean bond between the editor and the readers,
said he. He would not allow unfair criticism to be published
in his journal. That, to him, constituted violence. He would not,’
attack even when he was hit below the belt. Mrs. Annie Besant,
in her journal the New India, for weeks, wrote slanderous articles
against him. She went, as we saw, to the extent of advising the
Government to and stop his seditious activities
arrest Gandhiji
once for In reply, Gandhiji did not say or write anything.
all.
The British Press was at its worst critical mood so far as Gandhiji
and Indian National Congress were concerned, during the period
Gandhiji was in England, attending the Round Table Conference.
The well-known British journalist, Mr. Solocombe, represented
Gandhiji as prostrating himself before the Prince of Wales.
“Mr. Solocombe,” Gandhiji only remarked, “this does not
do any credit to your imagination. I would bend the knee before
• Illustrated Weekly of India (Bombay, October 20, 1957).
75
the poorest scavenger . . . much less before the Prince of Wales,

7
for the simple reason that he represented insolent might.”
He was called a simpleton.’ Truth, to which he tried to clinch,
‘
was dismissed as humbug. British papers were full of indecent

cartoons of Gandhiji.
“ I referred to the vicious attacks upon him in certain of the
London newspapers and expressed the hope that they did not
trouble him unduly. ‘ No,’ he said, ‘ they do not trouble me,
but they pain me terribly. Think of how fully and freely I have
talked to the reporters. I have told them everything. And yet they
print these slanderous lies. It hurts me that such things can be done.’
‘
he continued with a smile, ‘ I don’t let them worry me.
But,’
”
They do not harm. Nothing can injure truth.’ 8
But he was disappointed in British journals. The Times, London,
could no more serve as his ideal.
He was always ready to weigh opposition points of view. Here
is a typical example of his approach to controversial topics.
Under the caption ‘ No and yes,’ he wrote in the Young India :
“ Comrade Saklatwala is dreadfully in earnest. His sincerity is
transparent. His sacrifices are great. His passion for the poor is
unquestioned. I have, therefore, given his fervent appeal that

close attention which that of a sincere patriot and humanitarian
must command. But in spite of all my desire to say * yes to his ’
1
appeal, I must say no if I am to return sincerity for sincerity and
’
if 1 am to act according to my faith.”

“ On occasions, Gandhiji wrote to individual editors, some-
times acknowledging the weight of a point in criticism and at other
times explaining his point of view in great detail with an earnestness
which clearly showed his anxiety to remove misunderstanding
rather than silence criticism.” 9
Gandhiji thus won over, even the hostile press. He encouraged

the editors to express their views freely. Through his weeklies he
would argue with them if they opposed his views on non-coopera-
7
C. Rajagopalachari and J. C. Kumarappa (Ed.) : The Nation’s Voice (Nava-
jivan Publishing House, Ahmedabad, 1947), p. 116.
8 John Haynes Holmes : My Gandhi (George Allen &. Unwin Ltd., London,
1954), p. 44.
*India Government : Report of the Press Commission, Part II, Comp, .by
J. Natarajan (Manager of Publications, Delhi, 1954), p. 155,
76
Running the Desk
tion.
“ The variety of subjects he touched on quickened public
discussion and as he always struck an unusual note, the arguments
10
had a perennial interest.”
Another great quality of Gandhiji, the editor, was his direct
and forthright manner in conveying things. Direct presentation
was the beauty of all his writings. He had a clear thinking and
knew well what he was going to say. He would put forth his ideas
and arguments in crisp short sentences, pregnant with meaning.
From the Indian Opinion to the Harijan was a long way and we dis-
cover with the passing of each year a mature journalist in him.
“ ‘Who wrote these two articles,' asked Gandhiji, pointing out the editorials
from the latest issue of the Young India when Shri Prabhu, the dc facto editor
of the journal went to hand over the charge.

“ He signified his preference for one ; the other he criticised. Giving his
reasons he said :
<
in the first, you have said all that you wanted to say in a direct manner,
while the writer of the second article indulges in all sorts of innuendoes and says
things which he does not really mean.'
when you want to say a thing, don’t beat about the bush, don't indulge in
‘
euphemisms and pin-pricks, but tell it in a straight-forward way,’ he advised."

But he was in a devastating mood when he wrote the following
letter to a young journalist on June 7, 1919 :
“ It is dangerous to call me ‘Revered Father’ as you will see presently. I

have no doubt about your prodigality. The very slovenliness of your writing
is eloquent proof of it and it certainly requires a prodigal son to write to his
adopted ‘Revered Father’ a letter containing almost as many corrections as
there are lines in it written anyhow and unrevised. son frugal in his A
adjectives, obedient in reality, would write to his father, especially when he is
deliberately adopted, a careful letter written in his best
handwriting. If he
has not enough time, he will write only a line, but he would write it neatly.
article on Mr. Jamnadas was ill-conceived and hurriedly

“ written.
Your
Itcould not be printed in Young India, nor is it worth printing in any other
character, nor will you
paper. You will not reform Jamnadas by letters of that
benefit the public thereby. Your second article is not much better. . . You .
really lose yourself in the exuberance of your

own verbosity. If you will
give more attention to the thought than a
mere lengthening out of your
”
story, you will produce readable matter . . . ,
u
Shri Krishnadas narrated the following incident :
“ Today being Monday, Mahatmaji’s day of silence, I have to be constantly
by his side but as I had to write the article I could not spend much time with
;
" Ibid., p. 203.

Krishnadas : Seven Months with Mahatma Gandhi
11 (S. Ganesan & Co.,
Madras, 1928), p. 115.

77
him. At three in the afternoon he sent for me through Devadas. He had given
me a second Urdu message concerning the Moplah rebellion from the pen of
Maulana Azad Sobani to translate into English. Knowing, as I did, that he had
not been particularly impressed by the Maulana’s first message on the same
subject, I had not yet taken up the second. When I said that, he wrote down
4
for me the words, Just condense the whole into a single paragraph/ This I
did. I wanted also to explain my article * Under Swaraj as I had written, as
also a note on the arrest of Shri Sengupta of Chittagong. He looked through
4
them and wrote the following remarks : Under Swaraj is shaping itself all
right ; you should finish it. The Chittagong note is not bright enough, and is
somewhat censorious/ I explained that it was my intention to complete Under 6
Swaraj with one more paragraph. He wrote in reply, 4 As it is, it does not read
'
—
complete, or as if it is ending with two or three sentences but try/ I said
that I was under the impression that the article was growing too long, and I had
therefore thought fit to cut it short. But now I would write rather elaborately.
Mahatmaji nodded assent/'
Shri Sri Prakasa, a colleague of Gandhiji, was sent to Jodhpur,
much later in 1942, to collect first-hand information of certain
happenings over there. He visited the place, met people and
prepared a statement which was submitted to Gandhiji. The rest
may be put through the pen of Shri Sri Prakasa.
44
Withinthis period of my stay at Scvagram, Monday, the day of keeping
silence,came on which he would speak to nobody. Same day he devoted in
writing articles for the Harijan. After reading my report, he prepared a brief
for the Harijan and sent it to me for checking whether he had not missed any
point. I remember that my type-written report was spread into 14 or 15 sheets,
of foolscap size from which he had prepared the brief for the Harijan in only
half a column, I was surprised how he had put in all the facts contained in my
long report in a few lines. I read his brief several times but I could not say
that he had missed any of the points presented by me in the report/' 12
44
As washis wont, he would write a great deal for the Harijan Anything .
written by someone else was published in that paper only after being closely
scrutinised by him/' 13
Shri A. S. Iyengar recalled Gandhiji’s deep consideration for the

press. He went through all the reports of the All India Congress
Committee proceedings and would make necessary changes in each
copy submitted. “As for the corrections he made in the copy,
I must say that they were very vital and essential, revealing his
superior knowledge of editing including grammar and punctuation,
“ Sri Prakasa : The Navabharat Times : Sunday Supplement (Delhi, June 2,

1963).
“ Rajendra Prasad : At the feet of Mahatma Gandhi (Hind Kitabs, Bombay,
1955), pp. 238-239.
78
Running the Desk
•and all this he did whilst the proceedings were on, and whilst he
was thinking out his own speech/’ 14
On October 20, 1921, after the prayers, Gandhiji said ;
“When lately all sorts of rumours of my arrest were in the air, I expressed
the wish that the publication of Young India should be suspended. But since
then (and even so recently as the day before yesterday), many friends have
approached me and given me their assurance that there was no need to worry
over Navajivan and Young India and that they would be able to conduct both
in a manner worthy of their past, during my absence in gaol. I am not particular
about Navajivan, but my belief is that it would not be easy to preserve the style
and individuality of Young India But the tiling may be possible if I can give
.
the necessary training to people from now. For this I have chosen Pyarelal
and Krishnadas. Every one of us here in the Ashram should think it his duty
to become responsible and specialise in, some particular work.” 16
for,
Rajkumari Amrit Kaur, writing in the Harijan of April 1], 1948,

after Gandhiji’s death mentioned :
“ To those of us who had the privilege of working with Gandhiji every week
when the Harijan was being edited by him, it seems strange to be writing for its
columns without submitting the same to the searching gage of that prince of
journalists. The care and thought he bestowed on whatever he himself wrote,
the eagle eye with which he vetted every word of what even a man like Mahadev
Desai wrote, his insistence on right expression, on the adherence to the truth
where facts were concerned, on the necessity of not using one word more than
necessary, Ills appreciation of a good literary style, his ruthless weeding out of
much or wholesale discarding of what one thought was good, all these are
never-to-be forgotten lessons. But the remembrance of them makes one pause
and wonder whether any one of our poor efforts can ever come up to the high
standard of journalism which was one of Gandhiji's incomparable contri-
bution to public life. ...”
No subject was big for Gandhiji's editorial : none was too small.
Louis Fischer, the celebrated journalist, said that Gandhiji would
attach equal importance to a letter written to President Roosevelt
as much to an article on the subject of rape.
Gandhiji was very much laconic in speech. He seldom used a
superfluous word. Each comma or colon conveyed something or
the other. Moreover, his expression was much less than his pro-
found thinking on the subject. It was like an iceberg, nine-tenth
beneath the water and only one-tenth above. He had suggestions
to give on each item published in the journal. Everything he wrote
14
A. S. Iyengar : All Through the Gandhian Era (Hind Kitabs Ltd., Bombay,
1950), p. 98.
15
Krishnadas : Seven Months with Mahatma Gandhi (S. Ganesan & Co.,
Madras, 1928), p. 108.
79
was with a purpose. He never jotted a line for mere writing's sake.
In preaching an ideal, Gandhiji would go deeper in the matter.
He would suggest living up to the principle enunciated. In the May
“ The propagation of
13, 1939, issue of the Harijan he wrote , :
truth and non-violence can be done less by books than by actually

living those principles. I do not say that we may not issue books
and newspapers ... we must make a sincere effort to enter into
his mind and to understand his view-point without that book . . .
and newspaper propaganda is of no avail.”

It was more. It was a self-educative process. The Editor has
much more responsibility in conducting a viewspaper. He wrote

in the Young India of July 2, 1925:
I have taken up Journalism not for its sake but merely as an aid to what I
have conceived to be my mission in life. My mission is to teach by example

and precept under severe restraint the use of matchless weapon of Satyagraha
’
‘
which is a direct corollary of non-violence and truth. I am anxious, indeed I

am impatient, to demonstrate that there is no remedy for the many ills of life
save that of non-violence. It is a solvent strong enough to melt the stoniest
heart. To be true to my faith, therefore, I may not write in anger or malice. I
may not write idly. I may not write merely to excite passion. The reader can
have no idea of the restraint I have to exercise from week to week in the choice
of topics on my vocabulary. It is a training for me. It enables me to peep into
myself and to make discoveries of my weaknesses. Often my vanity dictates a
smart expression or my anger a harsh adjective. It is a terrible ordeal but a fine
exercise to remove these weeds. The reader sees the page of Young India fairly
well dressed up and sometimes, with Romain Rolland, he is inclined to say
‘
what a fine old man he must be.’ Well, let the world understand that the
fineness is carefully and prayerfully cultivated.”
Newspaper or viewspaper is a social institution. Its success,

as is admitted, depends to the extent in which, through news and
views, it prepares and educates the minds of the readers, who are
educated, half educated or educated.
Unfortunately papers
ill
mostly cater to the lower taste of the reader, through sensation

mongering rather than educating him for better citizenship. A
crime or sex story serves as an outlet for making imagination for
such a readership. He pictures himself as a spy tracking the mur-
derer or an out-law defying law and God. This kind of journalism
satisfies a genuine craving in him. It is, in a way, an extension of
his personality.
We often hear ‘
Readers want this.’ Thisis how an average
reader is led to think so. Newspapers have now become industries

80
Runfling the Desk
with the greater application of science and technology to boost its

mass circulation. It is profitable, efficient, but costly. It cannot
do without advertisements, rates of which have increased enor-
mously. Old time newspapers or viewspapers found it difficult
to maintain themselves. Editors like Sir Robert Donland, Mr. J.
A. Spender and Mr. A. G. Gardiner lost their positions as they
declined to adjust to the new pattern of thinking. Business Managers
and Proprietors took their places. Papers changed their character.
Headlines became catchy editorial superficial. In Great Britain
;
serious papers, which depended so long for careful reporting and

intelligent comments followed the methods of crime journals with
a view to making these popular. Popular Press, thus, is an antidote
to education. It gives the public news and views which they read
on their breakfast table or in a train or bus coming tired from the
day's work.
Gandhiji under the circumstances, had an uphill task. He
belonged to the category of Spender and Gardiner, but unlike them,
had to write mostly for half educated readers. To turn the scale,
he was training a band of journalists inspired with ideals. He was
trying to raise the level of his readers. But this proved transitory,
as we saw He could not, side
the fate of his paper after his death.
by side with his educative role as an change the curriculum
editor,
for schools and colleges which could educate the younger generation
with advanced political, economic and social ideas so as to appre-
ciate a high level journal.
In this context Shri S. Natarajarfs description of the condition
of the press in India at a time when Gandhiji appeared on the
scene, is worth quoting :
“ Round about twenties had certain characteristics in that a small staff looked
after the working of the newspaper. Commercial page or sports page were
appearing though there were not much of specialisation. Cinema reviews were
regular feature. There were advertisements but advertisers commanded very
influence with the press. The front page was a page of advertisements and
little
not news as it is now-a-days. There was not much of theory or practice of

journalism as was done in other countries. Even the reporters could not know
shorthand. Horniman's claim that he could make a journalist out of any one,
was the order of the day.” 1 *
The reader was no better. He cared more for sensational news.
16
S. Natarajan : A History of the Press in India (Asia Publishing House,
Bombay, 1962), p. 224.
81
G—
Anything unusual was hot favourite with him. To him, to quote a
well-known cliche, it was not news if a dog bit a man but if a man ;
bit a dog, that was news. But Gandhiji's concept of journalism

was different. He would give the reader correct stories. He would
abide by truth. But Mr. Kingsley Martin said :
“ . we must face the fact that comparatively few people have a passion
. .
for truth as a principle or care about public events continuously when these
do not obviously affect their own lives. People want to be pleased, and truth
is not always pleasing. The scientist may have a disinterested desire for know-
ledge in his particular science, but he rarely applies the discipline of the labora-
tory to politics. Newspapers have always depended on their public, and the
public hands out fortunes, not to those who present the truest possible picture
of public events, but to the show man who can provide the most entertaining
kaleidoscope.”'17
Mr. Scott Mowrer does not agree that newspapers should
function like a school —
conducting study courses for the education
of the people. The newspaper is to give the news of the day. In the
selection of news editors have to be careful otherwise it might be
one-sided. It is also to be balanced so as to give cheap news for it.
Now there is a tendency on the part of the newspaper to have as
many sections as possible so that each group of reading public
gets the thing it wants. 18
what did Gandhiji think about the sensational
Incidentally,
press ? We
can get an idea from the following report. “ In one
of the voyages to England, his fellow passengers formed a club
4
called *
Billy Boats ’
and published a sheet, Scandal Times.’
The name suggested the materials in it and they brought an issue
to Gandhiji and asked for his opinion of it. He took the sheet,
extracted the pin which fastened the leaves and told them that he
had taken the most precious thing from the sheets.” 19
He was a serious and fastidious editor. Before starting the
44
Harijan, Gandhiji in a letter to Shri G. D. Birla, wrote : 1 would
warn you against issuing the English edition unless it is properly
got up, contains readable English material and translations are
accurate. It would be much better to be satisfied with the Hindi
edition only than to have an indifferently edited English weekly.”
" Kingsley Martin : The Press the Public Wants (The Hogarth Press, London,
1947), p. 67.
“ League of Nations : The Educational Role of the Press (Paris, 1934),
pp. 43-44.
18
B.B.C. Portrait : Impressions of Mahatma Gandhi (September 30, 1956).
82
Running the Desk
Gandhiji by nature was quite shy. “ It has taught me the economy

of words,” he admitted. It also helped him in disciplining his
thoughts. “ A
thoughtless word hardly ever escapes my tongue
20
or pen.”
He reminiscenced the South African days and said :
“ Indeed the journal (the Indian Opinion) became for me a training in self-
restraint, and for friends a medium through which to keep in touch with my
thoughts. In fact the tone of Indian Opinion compelled the critic to put a curb
on his own pen. . . For me it became a means for the study of human nature
.
in ail its caste and shades. ... It made me thoroughly understand the responsi-
’’ 2l
bility of a journalist. . .
.
Gandhiji knew the power of the press very well. It could make
or mar a case. a paper could do immense
If used judiciously,
good to the people and in the hands of irresponsible people, it
would work havoc. Like Mr. A. G. Gardiner he could say :
“ There is nothing more tempting to the journalist than to be an

incendiary.” He knew that it was the short cut to success. It was
always easier to appeal to the lower passions of men than to their
better instincts. He was convinced— and throughout his life he
followed it — that the aim of journalism was service.
He warned, “ The newspaper press is a great power, but just as an unchained :
torrent of water submerges whole countryside and devastates crops, even so an

uncontrolled pen serves but to destroy. It can be profitable only when exercised
from within. If this line of reasoning is correct, how many of the journals in
the world would stand the test ? But who would stop those that are useless ?
And who should be the judge ? The useful and the useless must, like good and
2*
evil generally, go on together and man must make his choice.”
The year 1946 ushered in a new atmosphere surcharged with

emotion. The Cabinet Mission came on an Exploratory mission.
Delhi became, in April, ‘ a seething cauldron of rumours.’ News-
papers, which were indulging in kite flying got a rebuke from
Gandhiji. “The newspaperman has become a walking plague,”
he told a prayer meeting gathering. “All that appears in the
papers is looked upon as God’s truth. . . That is bad.” 2 ® .
Gandhiji had, of late, been greatly distressed at the general fall

in the standard of the Press. He hated speculation. This was
«• M. K. Gandhi : An Autobiography or The Story of My Experiments with
Truth (Navajivan Publishing House, Ahmedabad, 1956).

» Ibid., p. 286.
22 Ibid., p. 287.
22
D. G. Tendulkar : Mahatma (V. K. Jhaveri and D. G. Tendulkar, Bombay,
1953), Vol. VII, p. 115.
83
sometimes mischievous and often misleading. He hated fabrication

of news ; he disliked the emphasis often laid on things of little value.
He did not believe in so called journalistic ‘ scoop As one who
believed in the service to the community, he would advise against
publication of doubtful news. It was, he felt, the duty of the press
to withhold publication of was released from authentic
it until it
sources. He on the good or the

laid the greatest stress imaginable
bad influence the Press could wield on its readers.
Gandhijiwas quick to reprove the Press, if there was too
much of speculation. “ If I were appointed dictator for a day in
tire place of the Viceroy, I would stop all newspapers “ With
the exception of Harijan, of course,” he added. That was just
before the transfer of power.
In an article, ‘
Standards of Journalism ’, published in the
Harijan on April 1 1, 1948 — after theRajkumari death of Gandhiji —
Amrit Kaur, testified “ The Harijan was read over the
: . . . .
whole of India and in many countries abroad not only because

of the rich food for thought which Gandhiji’s writings always give
but also because readers knew that what facts they gleaned there-
from were cent per cent true. And after having read the Harijan
there was always the satisfaction that one had learnt something
that one did not know before. And how obvious that
’
something ‘
often was. .
He was against accepting anonymous articles for the journal,

though, in earlier days in South Africa, he published many unsigned
articles. “ Why are you afraid of signed articles ? ” he would
ask contributors. He was the most well-informed editor with
scores of self-styled correspondents sending despatches regularly.
They were all unpaid. He read everything sent by them and replied
to important ones. He shared joys and sorrows, ups and downs,
with them. That is how he could feel the pulse of the nation through
a fleet of self-styled correspondents. They would, sometime, bring
to his notice important official documents. The most celebrated
of them was the publication of the secret circular issued by the
Government in 1942, under the direction of Mr. Puckle, the then
Home Secretary. Gandhiji explained :
“ I have had the good fortune who have supplied me with

to have friends
of national importance, such as I am presenting to the public here.
titbits
Mahadev Desai reminds me that such an occasion occurred some 7 years ago,
84
Running the Desk
when a friendhad unearthed the famous Hallet circular. Such was also an
occasion, when the late Shraddhanandji was given an important document,
though not of the sensational character as the Hallet circular, or Sir Frederick
Puckle's very interesting production and that of his lieutenant Shri D. C. Das.
The pity of it is that the circulars were secret. They must thank me for giving the
performance as wide publicity as I can. For, it is good for the public to know to
what lengths the Government can go in their attempt to suppress national
movements, however, innocent, open and above-board they are. Heaven knows
how many such secret instructions have been issued which have never seen
the light of day ... let the public know that these circulars are an additional
reason for the cry of ‘Quit India ' which comes not from the lips but the aching
hearts of millions. Let the masses know that there are many other ways of
earning a living than betraying the national interests. Surely, it is no part of their
duty to lend themselves to the very questionable methods as evidenced by Sir
Frederick Puckle's instructions/'
How could he manage the voluminous correspondence and
newspaper reports ? Shri Pyarelal, his erstwhile Secretary, said,
that he evolved, through experience, a quick and efficient method
of scanning the items. Nothing escaped him ; nor did he spend
much time on these. His talks with Shri Prabhu, when taking
charge of the Young India and regarding which references had
already been made, will be of interest in this context.
“ Gandhiji looking at the page of Young India which was made up of news
in brief, asked me who gathered those news items. Being told that I was res-
ponsible for them, he asked me whence I culled the news. I said I made the
clipping from the latest issues of the various Indian journals which were received
in exchange for Young India and the Bombay Chronicle .
44
How much time do you spend in gathering these items ? " he asked.
“ I replied that it took me hardly more than half an hour to clip and paste
these news items required to make up the page.
You spend only half an hour over them he remarked in surprise. Do
*
4
you know \ he added ‘when I edited Indian Opinion in South Africa, we received
some 200 papers in exchange and I used to go through all of them carefully
throughout the week and I culled each news item only after I was fully satisfied
that it would be of real service to the readers. When one takes up the respon-
sibility of editorship, he must discharge it with a full sense of one's duty. That
is the only way journalism should be practised —don't you agree with me?"* 4
24
Gandhiji— His Life and Work Published on his 75th Birthday October 2,
,
1944. Edited by D. G. Tendulkar and others (Published by Karnatak Pub-

lishing House, Bombay), pp. 272-273,
85
Editor with a Difference
Gandhiji proved that was the man. To him words flowed

style
like the rippling rivulet. a bird he chiiped at ease, and
Like
merrily too. His English was biblical. Some compared it with
that of masters like Ruskin or Thoreau.
We had seen how meticulous he was about the use of English
words ; how carefully he chose the correct word at the right
moment. Above all, his sentences were simple and lucid. The
fact that he wrote from his heart made his writings all the more
absorbing.
This style was a complete departure from the one that was in
vogue in India when he reached the country. Giants like Shri
Surendranath Banerjea, Shri Bipin Chandra Pal, Shri Balgangadhar
Tilak, Shri Aurobindo Ghose were writing in their Macaulayan
style. These writings were heavy in form and content. Sentences
were unusually long. For an average reader these were difficult
to follow. The following, for example, from Shri Ambika Charan
MazumdaFs presidential address before the Lucknow Session
(1916) of the Indian National Congress will illustrate the
point :
“ There are, however, those who say ‘ not yet/ Not yet : Then * when ? 9 —
asks the Indian nationalist. But here the oracle is dumb and echo only answers
4 4
when! * Edwin Sevan’s parable of the Patient and the Steel Frame ’ is oited
and the people are strictly enjoined to lie in peace and possess their souls in
patience until their political Nirvana is accomplished. Simile and metaphor
* '
are not safe guides in practical life, for all fables are but fallacies clothed in
equivocal language which captivates the imagination and deludes the reason.
For even the patient * steel frame ’ required a gradual relaxation and occasional
re-adjustment of his splints and bandages and, above all, a steady, substantial
improvement in his dietary arrangements, as after all it is the food and nourish-
ment and not the splint and bandages, that are calculated to give him strength
86
and cure him of his injuries. You cannot indefinitely keep him on milk and
granulation of the flesh/
sago to help either the knitting of the bones or the
*
Our critics however', would enjoin perfect quiet and repose ' without pre-
any kind of diet until the people shall have, in their spirit of quiescence,
scribing
fullyrecovered themselves in their steel frame. If any illustration were actually
needed, one might fairly suggest that the case of either the swimmer or the rider
would probably furnish a more apposite object lesson. You cannot expect the
one to be an expert jockey without training him on the back of a horse, as you
cannot expect the other to be an expert swimmer without allowing him to go
into the water. There must be repeated falls and duckings before any efficiency
can be attained by either. There is a school for the lawyer, the physician,
. . .
the educationist and the engineer where he can obtain his passport
and begin
his profession ; but is there any school or college where an aspirant can be
admitted to his degree for self-government ? It is through self-government
that the art of self-government can be either taught or acquired.
... In the
words of Mr. Gladstone, it is the institution of self-government which constitutes
the best training ground for self-government.
Compare this Macaulayan amplitude and richness of phrasing
and weight of trajectory learning with Gandhiji’s wisely utilitarian,

clear and direct language. In his appeal to the people of Gujarat,
1
in 1922, he said :
Let him who wants, come. Let him who can, join the fray. Everyone is
44
invited, but the hungry alone shall come to the feast.

Others, even if they come,
will only be sorry. He who has no hunger, will

not relish even a dry crust of
bread. Likewise, those who understand non-cooperation can
alone stand by
it. He who understands finds things

easy. For those who do not, everything
is difficult. What is the use of a mirror

to the blind ?
44
The times are difficult. Let us not take a thoughtless step, lest we may
rue it. . . . Civil disobedience of laws. We are no longer ignorant of it. Jail
is its inevitable destination. And we can court it. Why can we not do as much ?
It is not so difficult. But —?

But if martial law is declared ? If Gurkhas come ? If Tommy Atkins
44
comes ? Suppose they bayonet us, shoot us, make us crawl ? They are welcome.
Let them come. But if we are asked to crawl ? Then too, we must be
ready
to die rather than crawl. We shall then only die by the

bayonet instead of the
plague. We are not likely to run away, if we are fired on
we have now acquired :
so much strength that we will receive the bullets on our

chests, like playthings.
We shall convert the Gurkhas into our brothers. If not, what happiness is
greater than dying at the hands of a brother ? Even we
say this, we feel proud.
44
But if—
confident this time that timid Gujarati will show its mettle. But as I
44
1 am
write, my pen is heavy. Whenever did Gujarati
hear gunshots ? When did it
fired like crackers ?
see rivers of blood flowing ? Will Gujarata withstand shots
1
K. M. Munshi : Gandhi : The Master (Rajkamal Publications Ltd., Delhi,
'
194#}, pp. 52-53.
87
Heads broken like earthen pots ? If Gujarata sees others’ heads broken, it will
be immortal. Why do you want training ? Confidence ? You will never acquire
confidence by a Congress resolution. It is God who helps the weak. God alone
gives courage. Whom Rama protects, none can injure. He has given us the
body. Let Him, if he wants, take it away. Even if you so desire you cannot
treasure up your body. Like money, it has to be spent in noble acts. What is a
nobler occasion for giving up life than when you are combating this atrocity ?
Whoever believes thus sincerely, will receive bullets with his bare chest, his
face smiling.”
Or take another sample of his political writings:
46
has never been so reduced as under the British
Politically India’s status
regime. No reforms have given real political power to the people. The tallest
of us have to bend before foreign authority. The rights of free expression of
opinion and free association have been denied to us, and many of our country-
men are compelled to live in exile abroad and they cannot return to their own
homes. All administrative talent is killed, and the masses have to be satisfied
with petty village offices and clerk-ships.
“ Culturally, the system of education has torn us from our moorings,
our
training has made us hug the very chains that bind us.
fct
Spiritually, compulsory disarmament has made us unmanly, and the pre-
sence of an alien army of occupation, employed with deadly effect, to crush in
us the spirit of resistance, has made us think that we cannot look after our-
selves or even defend our homes and families from the attacks of thieves, robbers
and miscreants.”
While on the river Brahmaputra he wrote :
“ The steamer is gliding on the river. We are all sitting on the deck.
The
river looks wide as the sea. We can see the banks, far away on either side
; the
distance between the two may be two miles or a little over. The voyage will
take about fifteen days. Sublime peace has descended on the river. The moon,
hidden behind the clouds, spreads a soft light over the waters. The propellers,
even as they cut their way through the water, hum sweetly. Except for this
hum, peace is over everything and everywhere. I alone have no peace of mind.
The steamer is not mine, the river & not mine. I travel in the steamer through
the courtesy of the power of which I am tired, which has made India decrepit,
lustreless, poor.”
Or consider the obituary written by him, after the murder of

Swami Shradhanand by a Muslim fanatic in Delhi
“ Death is no fiend. He is the truest of friends. He is like
sleep. Though
Shraddhanand is dead, he is yet living. He is living in a truer sense than when
he moved about in our midst in his giant body. The family in which he was
born, the nation to which he belonged, are to be congratulated upon so glorious
a death as his. He lived a hero he has died a hero. But there Is another
;
side to the shield. The joy of his death is tempered by the sorrow that an erring,
misguided brother has been the cause of it It does not matter to me what
prompted the deed. The fault is ours. The newspaperman has become a walking
plague. He spreads the contagion of lies and calumnies. He exhausts the foul
58
vocabulary of his dialect and injects his virus into the unsuspecting, and often
receptive, minds of his readers. Leaders, intoxicated with the exuberance of
their own language, have not known
to put a curb upon their tongues or pens.
It is and the semi-educated class, that are responsible
therefore we, the educated
for the hot fever which possessed Abdul Rashid."
What a was the peroration in the old Johnsonian

contrast
style, Thunderer of Bengal \ Shri Surendranath Banerjea.
by the ‘
The occasion was the unveiling of the portrait of Dadabhai Naoroji

in the Cowasji Jehangir Hall, Bombay, in 1919 :
“ The truest memorial that we can have of the illustrious dead is to raise taber-
nacles in our hearts in their honour, to devote ourselves to the worship of those
principles which were theirs and to the furtherance of those aims which were
their lifework. Then men, emancipated from the fetters of
will these great
flesh and blood, our midst in a higher form of existence and be imperi-
live in
shable guides in our outward march which must lead to the accomplishment of
our highest destinies. Dadabhai Naoroji will be one such leader. You
may have your busts, your statues, your portraits. They serve a useful purpose,
they remind us of their mortal existence and of their imperishable work. But
let not our reverence, our affection and our esteem be confined to mere dead
forms, but let them be a living source of inspiration to us. Let them raise us
to the higher atmosphere fragrant with the breath of these immortals and inspire
us with a resolve to incorporate into our daily life the ideals which they have
left for our instruction and guidance. Let us imprint upon our minds the lessons
of sobriety, moderation, of lifelong devotion to the Mother Land which Naoroji

has taught us. Then we shall have raised in his honour a memorial more lasting
than brass or marble, a memorial transmissible from age to age, that will become
the lasting heritage of our people in the rich possession of those moral
qualities which are the truest guarantees of continued and undying national
progress.”
Gandhiji not only revolutionized the political thinking of the.,
day, but English writing of his countrymen as well. It had no

screaming headline, no catchy sub-headings or magic typography.
But it was universally read.
“ His thunder acquires a serve majesty, his appeal its persuasiveness, his
confession its poignancy, as much by proper use of the proper word as by his
personality. Sometimes, he is slyly humorous or playful With him, beauty
4
of expression has to be a humble housemaid to Truth/'
The Harijan was first published in 1933. Shri Jawaharlal Nehru
got copies of it while under detention. “I was delighted/’ Shri
Nehru wrote to Gandhiji, from Dehradun gaol, after reading the
two copies of the Harijan “ to see the old rapier touch of
first ,
* K. M. Munshi : Gujarata and its Literature, (Longmans, Green & Co.,

Ltd., Calcutta, 1935), p. 312.
89
overmuch kindness and inexhaustible patience which extinguishes,
or as you say, neutralizes the opponent." 3
Younger generation of writers got influenced by his style. They
tried to emulate him. Gone were the days of pompous style or
verbosity. Not only contributors to the Young India or the
Harijan but those to other papers and magazines started writing in
simple English. A
new class of journalists were coming to the fore.
More important than the style was the content of his writing.
The subject-matter he chose was down to the ground. Gandhiji
was able to divert the attention of the rising journalists and authors
from cities to villages. He impressed on them the fact that India
lived in her villages that the journalist's or author’s job was to
;
write about village and villagers. Thus he was able to put the
village of India on the wider and lively canvas of Indian writing.
The Gandhian era of writing a golden era —
came into existence. —
Presiding over the Gujarat Literary Conference on November 2,
1936, Gandhiji asked :
“ Lor whose sake are we going to have our literature

? Not certainly for the
great gentry of Ahmedabad. They can afford to engage literary men and have
great libraries in their homes. But what about the poor man at the well
who
with unspeakable abuse is goading his bullocks to pull the big leather bucket
?
Years ago I had asked Narasimharao, who I am sorry is too aged and ill to be
here in our midst, if he could give me something, inspired tunes or ditties,
which
this man at the well could lustily sing and forget for ever
the filthy abuse ? I
have hundreds of such folks for whom I want real life-giving literature. How
am I to do so ? I live in Segaon today where in a population of six hundred a
little over ten are literate. , . .
have loved to bring with me a Segaon boy here, I have not done
I should
so. What would he do here ? He would find himself in strange world.
“ As I am speaking to you just now, I think of Dean Farrar and his book
on the life of Christ. I may fight the British rule, but I do not hate the English
or their language. In fact, I appreciate their literary treasures. And Dean
Farrar's bookone of the rare treasures of the English language. You know
is
how he laboured to produce that book ? He read everything about Jesus in
English language, and then he went to Palestine, saw every place
and spot in the
Bible that he could identify, and then wrote the book in faith
and prayer for the
masses in England, in a language which all of them could
understand. It is not
in Dr, Johnson's style but in the easy style of
Dickens. Here have we men like
Farrar, who will produce great literature for the village
folk ? Our literary
men will pour on Kalidas and Bhavabhuti, and English authors, and will give
* From a letter from Shri Jawaharlal Nehru to Gandhiji,-
90
us imitations. 1 want them to go to villages, study them, and give something

4
life-giving.”
The Gandhian impact on contemporary Indian literature was

great. As regards
the writer's choice of language, one result of
the Gandhian influence had been a general preference for the
mother tongue or the regional language, and occasionally a
purposeful bilingualism, the same writer handling with mastery
hisown mother tongue as well as English. Besides, whatever the
language medium chosen, the stress has been more on simplicity
and clarity and immediate effectiveness than on ornateness or
profundity and artistry and this has been as marked in English
;
writing as in writing in the regional language. As regards the

choice of themes and the portrayal of character, the Gandhian
influence has been no less marked. There has been a more or less
conscious shift of emphasis from the city to the village, or there is
implied a contrast between the two —
urban luxury and sophistica-
5
tion on the one hand and rural modes and manners on th« other.
Gandhiji, in fact, brought in many new elements which introduced
a fresh life in the field of journalism. “ As a result of his wide
interest, his genius for simplification, his eagerness to reach the
largest number of people, and the startling nature of his activities,
there was a quickening of life in journalism. Many of his followers
were moved to write and publish in the Indian languages, and in
imitation of his own direct style they wrote a simple prose. Regional
journalism began to acquire an importance and there was hardly
4
an area of the country which did not have its newspapers.” ?
Gandhiji’s English had been praised by knowledgeable persons.
Did ho ever make a mistake in the use of this foreign language ?
The following piece appearing in the Harijan of December 23,
1939, should be read with interest.

4
Under the caption, My Handicap,’ Gandhiji wrote :
“ I wonder if all journalists, having to write in English, feel the handicap

*
which I do. The reflection arises from a stupid use I made of the verb cavil ‘
in my note on a learned Englishman’s letter partly reproduced in Harijan of 2nd
4
1952), Vol. IV, pp. 114-115.
* K. R. Srinivasa Iyengar : Indian Writing in English (Asia Publishing House,
Bombay, 1962), p. 22.
* S. Natarajan : A History of the Press in India (Asia Publishing House,
Bombay, 1962), p. 190.
91
4
December. In my comment I said The writer seems to cavil at the demand for
,
Independence as distinguished from Dominion Status.' The learned writer

4
draws my attention to the meaning of the word cavil ' as implying captious
criticism of which, he says, he was wholly unconscious. I take great care in the
use of English words. With all my care, however, I cannot make up for my
imperfect knowledge of a foreign tongue. I had never known the dictionary
meaning of the word. I must have picked up the word in the course of reading
or hearing. I had hitherto given it an innocent meaning in the sense of strongly
objecting. Knowing the writer as I do, I could never think of him as raising
captious objection. I have apologised to him for the unconscious error. It is
good that he drew my attention to it. Heaven only knows how often, though
wholly unconsciously I must have offended persons simply because of my
i
ignorance of English language and its subtle idiom and usage. The language
expands with the expansion of its people. I must struggle in the best manner
I can and expect the indulgence of the English readers who, knowing my limi-
tations, should believe that where my language seems to offend, the offence is
wholly unintended."
Gandhiji undoubtedly introduced a new and a noble element
in the field of journalism. It was his approach —
his human
approach — which gave his writings a character. He never looked
upon the reading public as target for propaganda. He regarded
them as living reality whose interests, tastes and foibles he
willingly shared and fathomed in order to bring a real change in
the country and the world. He belonged to the people by identi-
fying himself with them and wrote about their feelings and
aspirations. His voice was the voice of humanity not the —
voice of a pamphleteer. He wanted to change the human character
and would never be satisfied by changing a few laws or acts, here
and there.
To whom should the journalist be loyal to ? To the proprietor,
to one’s own self or to the particular class he belongs to ? This
has often been debated with different conclusions. But to Gandhiji,
readers were the most important. A journalist may be a patriot,
a party member, or a faithful employee but his loyalty according
;
to him should primarily be to his readers. Public has the right

to know the truth. He must be informed objectively as to what
is happening. If the paper looses confidence of his readers, it has
lost all that is worth in journalism.

Progress of science and education was continuously raising
the intellectual level of the public. Certain papers were inspired
to become promoters of ideals. This was particularly true in the
Victorian era when the British press, by and large, started
92
educating people on political and moral values. Gandhiji, when he

first South Africa, grew in this climate.
started journalism in
Though industrial civilization later dominated every aspect of
human life, Gandhiji was still preaching high standards and trying
to introduce a sense of value through his writings.
The educational mission that the press is capable of accomplish-
ing depends, in a large measure, upon the talent of those who write
for the papers. If a journalist possesses personality, he can
accustom his readers to follow him into almost every field and,
in the end, impose upon them a veritable education. The public is
fascinated by the radiation of his personality. The reader is auto-
matically attracted by personal magnetism. In tire field of
journalism, this is, perhaps, the one axiom that does not admit of
dispute. If a journalist, on the other hand, is strongly individual,
he will, from time to time, make his articles almost always un-
readable as he asks too much of the reader. To give his readers
an elementary course of politics would demand a great deal of tact,
and still more talent. He, perforce confines himself to writing
in his usual style, which is incomprehensible for the public and
often prevents it from taking interest in political happenings. In
brief, the writer alone is up with the very
in a position to link
sources of life an important event, be it political, social or economic
and in a few words, bring it into the strictly human domain which
is accessible to all.
This was Gandhiji’s magic. His treatment was like drat. That
was why his readers would read his writings as gospel truth. His
personality would attract readers, his writings would elevate them
to a higher plane, would help them in a holy communion with
God, which, in his case was truth.
“There was not only a new thought but a new language in
newspaper writing and what he wrote was the best in political
thought and finest in journalistic writings. No editor could escape
being influenced by Gandhiji's writings ." 7
Gandhiji had sometimes reviewed books. That was done also
'
from the point of view of service to the community. If he would

come across a book which would prove useful to the people, he
would write about it with his comments. He reviewed, at length
7 Bombay,
A. S. Iyengar : All Through the Gandhian Era (Hind Kitabs Ltd.,
1950), p. 28.
93
Mr. F. L. Brayne’s books on rural upliftment activities in Gurgaon
district,Punjab. He pointed out. the good points and the bad
points of the book vis-a-vis a better solution as he thought of the
rural problems.
He wouldignore reference of books if these were not useful.
Even South African days when he had to compromise on small
in
matters for the ultimate good of his paper, he was strict about
reviews, in the Indian Opinion, in his letter to Shri Chhaganlal
Gandhi, dated September 30, 1905, he wrote : “ I have seen
today the book written by Sheikh Mehtab. Do not take any notice
of it in the Opinion.” Sheikh, it may be mentioned, was his school
mate.
At times he would be highly critical of harmful books. The
best example is his review of Miss Mayo's Mother India. Under
the ‘Drain Inspector’s Report,’ he wrote, in the Young

title
India September 15, 1927: “ Miss Mayo has herself

dated
favoured me with a copy of her book .... The book is cleverly
and powerfully written .... But the impression it leaves on my
mind is that it is the report of a drain inspector sent out with the
one purpose of opening and examining the drains of the country to
be reported upon or to give graphic description of the stomach
exuded by the opened drains." He wrote at length with supporting
extracts from the book and concluded “ That a book like
:
Miss
Mayo's can command a large circulation furnishes a sad commen-
tary on Western literature and culture.'*
Under the heading ‘ A vicious book,’ Gandhiji, on July 25,
1929, mentioned about the book Swami Dayanand —
A critical
study of his and teaching. The caption of the review was
life
enough to indicate what Gandhiji wrote.

Gandhiji was a prolific writer. On way to South Africa from
England, in 1909, he utilized his time in writing the manuscript
of the book —
Hind Swaraj. It is in the form of 20 brief dialogues
4
between ‘ Reader and ' Editor.’ it covers subjects like India
and England, Civilization, Swaraj, machinery, Hindu Muslim

Unity, non-violence, Satyagraha, etc. What Gandhiji thought
and said and did during 40 years of his active life i.e. from 1908-48,
was epitomized in the book. The manuscript was found intact
even after many years. Shri Prabhudas Gandhi said “ Turning
:
over the pages of the manuscript, one realises Gandhiji’s genius
94
as a writer. In the 275 hand written pages only three lines have
been scratched out. A
few words here and there have been changed.
When Gandhiji got tired of writing with his right hand, he wrote
with his left.'” He finished the whole manuscript in ten days time.
8
He was asked later as to whether he would like to make any

change in the book. He made only one change. The word
‘ prostitute
’
used in connection with Parliament was taken out.
This was done to satisfy the sentiment of an English lady who
was annoyed over the use of the word.
What was Gandhiji's attitude towards the vernacular press ?
Did he like conducting English papers at the cost of vernacular
ones ? Was he happy in communicating his ideas with readers
through the medium of a foreign language ? These and many
other questions will naturally crop up while discussing Gandhiji as a
journalist. He had, as we will see, his definite view on the subject.
Kaka Saheb Kalelkar mentioned an incident which occurred
immediately after Gandhiji came back from South Africa. A
Parsi journalist interviewed him and as was the custom of those
days, started asking questions in English. Gandhiji, politely but
firmly replied, “ Friend, you arc an Indian and T, too, an Indian.
Your mother tongue is Gujarati, and so is mine. Why, then, do
you ask your questions in English ? Do you imagine that 1 have

forgotten my native tongue because 1 lived in South Africa. Or do
you consider it more dignified to talk in English because 1 am a
9
barrister.”
Newspapers carried this story widely. In those days when
affected English conversation and European dress were criteria
for a successful politician, at least here was a man who was not
ashamed to speak his language if he could.
Personally Gandhiji did not like to write much in English though
he loved the language and developed, as we saw, a style of his own.
He knew that English could not be the national language of India.
But so long as the national language, Hindustani, was not
developed, he had to choose a medium through which his message
could be reached to the four corners of the country. Indian
» Prabhudas Gandhi : My Childhood with Gandhiji (Navajivan Publishing
House, Ahmedabad, 1957), p. 87.

» Kaka Kalelkar Stray Glimpses of Bapu (Navajivan Publishing House,
:
Ahmedabad, 1950), p- 4.
95
in those days had to
publicists be, of necessity, bilingual.
Raja Rammohan Roy wrote in Bengali as well as in English.
‘
Lokaraanya Tilak edited the Kesari in Marathi and the
’
Mahratta in English. Sri Aurobindo Ghose edited the Bande-

mataram and the Kannayogin in English and the Dhanna in
Bengali.
Discussing objectives of the Young India, the first journal he was
going to edit in India, Gandhiji declared: “ . I recognise that
. .
for a few years to come, until we have accepted ‘ Hindustani ’ as

the common medium among
the cultured classes and until Hin- ‘
dustani becomes compulsory in our schools as a second language,

’
educated India, specially in the Madras Presidency, must be

addressed in English ”,
There was a suggestion from a correspondent that the English
edition should be stopped to help the growth of Indian language
editions. Apart from that,should not he give a lead and propa-
gate his ideas through the local language ? Otherwise how ‘ Hin-
dustani would thrive ?
’
Gandhiji was also, for sometime, thinking
on Once he resolved to write for the Harijan in nothing
that line.
but Gujarati and Hindi, and the articles were to be translated
into English. “ I personally was sad and begged of him to write
at least one small note in English because his English was quite
remarkable and his writings will certainly be included in years
to come as valuable contribution to English literature. But he
was adamant. However, after a while letters from abroad came
pouring in and in the end he could not resist the impassioned
appeal of his foreign readers to write original articles in the
10
English Harijan .”
Gandhiji explained the position thus :
“ I can’t stop the English edition for the reason that Englishmen, as well as the
Indian scholars of the English language consider me to be to a good writer in
the English language. My relations with the West are also increasing every day
.... I do not wish to forget that language, nor do I wish all the Indians to
give up or forget it."
Gandhiji's Gujarati style was as
commendable as his English.
Itwas much more. He set a new style in Gujarati literature about
which Shri K. M. Munshi discussed at length, in the book Gujarata
and its Literature.
10
Illustrated Weekly of India (Bombay, October 20, 1957).
96
Pi.. V. Papers that Gandhiji edited
lCourtesy V. K. Jhaveri and D. G. Tendulkar]
Gujarati language is greatly indebted to Gandhiji. It had its

heyday while he was editing and writing for the Navajivan and,
later on, in the Gujarati edition of the Harijan Even earlier he .
used to contribute Gujarati articles in the Gujarati section of the

Indian Opinion .
His autobiography Atmakatha Satyagraha in South Africa —

( Dakshina African Satyagrcmo Itihasa), Arogya Vise Samanya
Jnana were all written originally in Gujarati. So long there were two
distinct trends One was the Gujarati style
of Gujarati literature.
and the other Saurashtra Both were pedantic, with liberal
style.
use of Sanskrit or Persian. Moreover there were unnecessary

literary flourishes. Under Gandhiji’s influence the Gujarati and
Saurashtra were not only combined but were made into a powerful
people’s language. It was simple and direct. There was no verbosity
in it. Nor were Sanskrit or Persian words unnecessarily mixed.
Shri Munshi wrote :
. . . . Since he became the editor of the weekly Navajivan till it stopped in

1932, week after week, except when in jail, he has addressed to the Gujaratis
bis views and theories, his sermons, confidences, and battle-cries. Few other
newspapers in the world have had a similar popularity and influence in their
area of circulation as this small, unostentatious sheet which never screamed
a head line and never published an advertisement. With many, it replaced the
novel and the Purana in interest. A
single copy of this weekly has often brought
1,11
to a distant hamlet its only journal and gospel of life ... .
His autobiography, originally written in Gujarati but appearing

serially in the Young India translated by Shri Mahadev Desai, is
,
one of the best works in Gujarati. Though it lacks literary charm

it is frank and inspiring. It rings with sincerity. Gandhiji’s writing
form should not be compared with that of a literary man. He

developed his writing faculty as part of his communication with
people. Understanding the people was more important to him
than becoming a celebrated author. That makes his literary debut
more welcome.
Mr. J. H. Holmes wrote :
“ Gandhi's literary achievement is the more remarkable in view of the fact

that he was never, in any sense of the phrase, a literary man. Unlike his great
contemporary, Rabindranath Tagore, and his accomplished successor. Pandit
Nehru, the Mahatma had no special grace of style. Seldom, if ever, in his
11
K. M. Munshi : Gandhi : The Master (Rajkamal Publications, Ltd., Pelhi,
1948), p. 49.
97
G—
writings, did he rise to heights of eloquence and beauty. Memorable passages—

Le. memorable for their own —
sake are rarely found. Gandhi's interests were
never aesthetic, but rather pragmatic. He had no desire or ambition, no time,
to be an artist. His one thought was of his own people, and his struggle to
make them free. So he wrote with disciplined simplicity, seeking only to make
himself clearly understood. The result was the one most important quality of
literary art—namely, clarity. I doubt, if, in all his works, Gandhi ever wrote
a sentence which failed to express with utter precision the thought he had in
mind to convey. Gandhi mastered his medium. He wrought a style which was
perfect for his purpose of communication. To read his writings is to think of
content and not of style which means a triumph in the adaption of means
12
to ends.”
Gandhiji’ s letters, small or big, official or personal, were pure
gems. These were appropriately worded and spoken from heart.
**
Many are playful ; some loving. Many administer a paternal rebuke some ;
with indescribable restraint, hit, and hit well a few are intimates ; scarcely
;
any throbs with the impulse of an unguarded moment. The author adjusts the
tone, the language and the perspective of every letter with uncanny precision
so as to have the desired effect on the addressee. These letters have provided
him with his greatest instrument of controlling the conscience and conduct of
his friends and adherents. No man has wielded so great an influence through
his letters and few literary men have written theirs with such art.’' 13
;
Not only did Gandhiji introduce style in Gujarati, he tried to

—
do something for the children for the coming generation as —
well. Many do not know that Gandhiji tried to write primers
for the children. This he did, as already referred to, in the Yeravada
prison. It was a new style that he introduced in the form of —
—
a dialogue in telling things to the children. The dialogue was
between the mother and the child, Gandhiji hoped that the mother
in India will, in future, be her child’s teacher.
Last but not the least was the initiative taken by him in esta-
6 ’
blishing the Gujarat Vidyapeeth.’ Not only tire ‘
Vidyapeeth
was to and see that the Gujarati language thrive but would
foster
also help in cultural promotions amongst the people.
Apart from Gandhiji’s writing in original Gujarati, he took a
great lead in translating other useful materials into .
Gujarati
language. In fact he created a team of translation experts in the
Navajivan Press. They translated many pieces and books and
w Homer A. Jack (Ed.) : The Wit and Wisdom of Gandhi (Beacon Press,
Boston, 1951), preface pp. vii-viii.
13
K. M. Munshi : Gandhi : The Master (Rajkamal Publications Ltd.,
Delhi, 1948), p. 56.
98
published them through the columns of the Navajivan. Shri K. M

Munshi said “ Gujarat has taken a
: leaf out of Bapu’s book
and its insistence on a high standard of literature and on accuracy
in translation has increased considerably. Before Bapu’s influence
changed its outlook, Gujarat abounded in shoddy translations of
Bengali, Marathi and English books, in which the translators had
calmly ignored all the difficult words and gave only half the meaning
of difficult sentences.”
Gandhiji was interested in tire flourish of all Indian languages.
Towards the end of his life he tried to learn Bengali. His own
handwritings in Bengali can still be found. Even the day before he
was killed he wrote a passage in Bengali and showed it to his
—
teacher Mrs. Ava Gandhi.
Early in his South African life Gandhiji started to leam Tamil
so that he could easily communicate with the Tamil people residing
in South Africa. In a letter to Shri Chhaganlal Gandhi, dated
April 17, 1905, Gandhiji wrote : “I am studying Tamil very dili-
gently and, if all is well, I may be able to fairly understand the
Tamil articles within two months at the outside. I am rather anxious
to get the Tamil books.”
But Gandhiji made it his life’s mission to make Hindustani the
lingua franca of the people. As a nationalist he wanted a common
language for the country and, though aware of the richness of the
Gujarati literature, did not hesitate to support and foster the claim
of Hindustani for this honour. He made all efforts to make the
language acceptable in all India and for that he did not spare time,
men or money.
99
Managing the Paper
Managerial training for Gandhiji started with the Indian Opinion,

In fact he from the beginning, showed a tremendous grasp over
each detail in running the paper. That not only brought to surface
his qualities for smooth and efficient management, but sharpened
those faculties to greater extent. From type setting to printing,
from packing to posting, from collecting of subscription to overall
budgeting, he had a hand.
Being by birth and instinct a businessman
—
bania \ as he
*
would call himself—he knew that efficient management of the

business side of a paper was essential for its ultimate success. It
called for right sort of coordination among workers, effective
administration of office details and proper handling of corres-
pondence. He was doing all these in the midst of his other pre-
occupations.
In days of the Indian Opinion Gandhiji was
fact, in the early ,
practically doing almost everything single handed. In India, the

volume of work increased many fold while running the Young
India and the Harijan. But he was carrying on with his job magni-
ficently with the help of a few trusted workers who were trained
by him. And he was, as we had seen, beeping a watchful eye on
each detail.
knew that the business side of a paper, however small
Gandhiji
itmight be, must not be dealt in a slip-shod manner. All loose
ends should be plugged. The success of a paper did not depend
on the good editorials only it depended very much on efficient
;
management.
No matter how excellent the editorial tone and selective the
contents of a paper might be, they would avail little if circulation
100
Managing the Paper
was very much limited. As in a chain, there was no place for a

weak link in a paper. It must be strong at each strategic point,
i.e.writing, news editing, news selecting, printing and circulating.
Newspaper running was largely a matter of timing.
Flow of copy to the press should be regular and adequate. Plans
for selection of news and its placing must be done well in advance.
Once that was taken care of, timely printing was assured. The
foreman of the composing room, the head make-up and even the
copy cutter could then keep the editor informed about the hourly
development during the hours of production.
Because of its important and urgent nature, a paper should be
particular in maintaining contacts with all. In fact it should
set example in handling correspondence with parties. Gandhiji
was in that respect a past master. He was not only prompt in
answering business communications, but the quality of his letters
was superb. He was corresponding on all matters with every one
so to say. His correspondents were similarly keeping him abreast
with all development.
Gandhiji introduced a new tone in his correspondence. Unlike
the formal, stiff and highly artificial letters in an average news-
paper his was couched in simple and direct language. It

office,
was and very much to the point. It was fashioned to suit the
brief
needs of the occasion. Being more natural, it was very much infor-
mal in tone. His letters were, as one writer said, a model for ideal
correspondence : “ Correct, artistic in appearance, conversational
and informal in tone without sacrificing dignity, familiar without
being bold or aggressive, definitive in purpose and, above all,
courteous ”.
Gandhiji not only planned, but executed the work along with
other colleagues. When he was away from the scene, he would,
through letters, etc., keep constant touch with them.
Gandhiji, later on, shifted to Johannesburg. He was, regularly
from that place, advising management of the Press and the
on the
paper published from the Phoenix farm. He had an able assistant
in Shri Chhaganlal Gandhi to whom he was writing constantly
on matters of importance.
In the letter dated September 27, 1905, he wrote : “ There is a
letter from Hemchand to-day saying that a notice dispensing with
his services has been served on him. I have thereupon sent a
101
telegram asking that he be not discharged. I do not relish the idea

of discharging even Ramnath.” In the same letter he confessed :
“ I do not think I shall be able to train Gokuldas for Gujarati
in two months. He seems to be very weak in Gujarati.”
Shri Chhaganlal got nervous at the bleak prospect of the Inter-
national Press. But Gandhiji cheered him and wrote
“ I have :
already shown you conclusively as in a mathematical problem,

that the presswont break down. You had agreed with me in that,
and now you write that the circumstances are unbearable and pre-
carious. This is exactly what I consider a sign of weakness.”
Without his advice nothing could be done. In his letter to Shri
Chhaganlal ,
dated September 30, 1905, he wrote : “ Anandlal
writes that it has been decided to hire an office in Mercury Lane.
If this is so, it should not be done. I feel it essential that I should
”
be consulted before such changes are introduced . . . .
He would also take him to task for failing to carefully scan

through the paper. In his letter dated October 5, 1905, to Shri
Chhaganlal he wrote “ You still do not publish all the notices
:
from the Gazette. There are many notices from page 1705 onwards
in the current issue of the Gazette ... I have found these from
a casual glance at the paper carefully scrutinise the Gazette
. . .
”
henceforth . . . .
On January 5, 1906, he wrote to Shri Mansukhlal Hiralal Nazar:

“ have been discussing with Chhaganlal the question of Tamil
I
and Hindi editing .... The more I think, the more I feel that we
.”
ought for tire present to do away both with Tamil and Hindi . . .
But above all, was his meticulous care for proper accounting.
He was aware of the trust the public had in him in dealing with their
matter and also the responsibility that this trust entailed. In his
letter to Shri Chhaganlal dated February 13, 1906, Gandhiji
wrote “ I sent you sometime ago Miss Neufliess’ name as a paid
:
subscriber .... Manji N. Ghelani writes to me saying that he

has not received for the current year numbers two and three
Please change Mr. Ritch’s address at London .... Your imme-
diate mainwork is to put the books straight as soon as possible,
”
prepare the balance-sheet . . . .
In his letter of April 7, 1906, to Shri Chhaganlal he gave priority

—
to book keeping “ Books must be kept up to date.” In the same
letter he gave indication of recruiting new hands for the press
102
Managing the Paper
“ There are so many details to be attended to by me which I cannot

without information from you. Motilal writes to me saying that
there is a new arrival from Bombay. His name is Dhoribhai. He
says he knows the press work well. He offers his services at
£4 per month and free lodgings. It is worthwhile knowing
him .
”. .
Gandhiji was also advising on arrangement of news, etc. and

typographical setting. He developed such fastidiousness in printing
that, in later years, he could not stand bad or careless printing.
An artist in revolt him would
the politician in him would call
:
that an outrage and “‘

perpetration of ‘ Himsa
’
or violence.” ’
Like Mr. Aldous Huxley he could say that “ good printing can
create a valuable spiritual state in the reader.”
In his letter dated February 17, 1906, he wrote to Shri Chha-
ganlal :
“ You should divide the Gujarati pages into sections and
see that, as far as possible, a particular type of material always
appear in the same place.”
And again on March 4, the same year “You should have the :
same arrangement in the Gujarati section as you have in the English.

The leading article should come first, followed by the smaller leaders.
After that should come the translation of articles on important
subjects etc. followed by letters like the ‘Johannesburg Letter’
and last Reuter’s Telegram.”
of all,
Gandhiji also gave detailed instructions regarding advertisements.

To Shri Chhaganlal he wrote on March 4, 1906 “ Discontinue :
the advertisement from Haji Suleman Shah Mahomed as we are

not going to get it. Reduce Mr. Gool’s to half. He has made a
special request about it as his condition is not sound at present.
I see that many advertisements from Cape Town will be discon-
tinued. But I am not worried in the least by that. We shall get
others. I am persevering in my efforts.”
Gandhiji was harping on the same tune. In his letter of April 6,

1906, he wrote to Shri Chhaganlal : “ Why should there be any
difficulty in giving quotation for full page, half page and quarter-
page advertisements ? I do not think the rate depends upon the
quantity of type to be used. When a man hires so much of space,
we are bound to give him all he can acquire within that space, so
long as we can put it in reasonably, so that it should not be difficult
to give quotation for space. As soon as you give the quotation,
103
it is possible to get a very good advertisement from Cape Town.

Please therefore do not delay the matter.”
Later on, as we have seen, he discontinued taking advertisements
for his papers.
Even in England, where he went as a deputationist, the Indian
Opinion was always in his mind. On October 26, 1906, he wrote
to Mr. H. S. L. Polak “lam sending you all the cuttings that I
:
consider to be useful. If I can find the time, I shall translate the

substance of the fight of the women suffragists for the Gujarati
columns, but if I do not, let Chhaganlal translate them, and make

an effective use of these valuable cuttings. I have asked
Mr. Mukeiji to deal with the matter in his London letter."
He would go into sorts of details. On January 5, 1907, he wrote
to Shri Chhaganlal Kalyandas is now busy recovering
the dues here. Many subscribers complain that they do not get
Indian Opinion regularly .... Kalyandas believes that some of the
people there pack the copies and stick the wrappers carelessly,
and they therefore, fall apart and the papers get lost. I am
writing to Mr. West also about this. We ought to be very careful.
I think it necessary for someone to supervise the work of
”
wrapping
Earlier on April 6, 1906, he wrote :“.... Am i to understand
from your letter that you received the Gujarati matter from me
only on Wednesday ? If so, there must be something terribly
wrong, for L took special precautions that the matter written on
Sunday was posted before four o’clock. The matter written on
Saturday was posted in due time. I have asked you to send me the
envelopes bearing the dates so that I may have the matter investi-
gated here
To Mr. J. C. Mukerji, London, he wrote on October 27,
1906 “ ...
: Although you may send your correspondence
.
on Friday nights, I think you should send from the Times the
latest news and Parliamentary reports on Saturdays and post them,
if necessary, up to the last moment at the General Post Office.
That is the only way, I think, you will be able to make your corres-
pondence effective and up to date.”
Again he reverted to accounts and wrote to Shri Chhaganlal
on January 28, 1907 “ This is the time for you to give your
:
fullest attention to realising the dues and to the account books,
104
Managing the Paper
We must on any account satisfy our customers. If they do not
when they have begun to be interest&d*jjpl ;y^a£
get satisfaction just
we write, we shalin’t be able to keep them on the register rTT'.'**
In the same letter he planned for the future of the Press. Wrote
he :“.... 1 have therefore decided to send a person to
England, whom I consider the most steadfast of all. He should go
there with the firm resolve that he should not make a single pie for
himself from the education he receives but would pass on all the
benefit of that education to the Press and would accept and live
on what the Press gave him. You appear to me to be the only
Indian who has attained to this degree of fitness. Our ultimate. . .
capital is not the money we have, but our courage, our faith, our
truthfulness and our ability. If therefore you go to England, your
intellect remains unspoiled and you return with your physical and
mental powers strengthened, our capital will have appreciated to
that extent.”
How would Gandhiji react to a new feature in the paper ? He
had an open mind, but would like to move cautiously. Some
>one suggested as part of sales promotion, riddle for the solution
of which prizes were also provided. Shri Chhaganlal wanted his
advice and got it (February 7, 1907) :
“ 1 did understand your
suggestion about the riddles. I do not think it proper to introduce
the riddles feature so long aswe are not in a position to have it regu-
larly and offer prizes ourselves. What can be the object of the man
who wants to spend money on this ? How long can he be expected
to do so ? Moreover, we can hardly expect many to take part in
the competition. However, you may inquire of your correspon-
dent if he intends paying for the prizes indefinitely. It would be
very strange indeed if he wanted to do so. On the other hand, it
would not be proper for us to start this feature if he agrees to
give prizes once in a while. You may, however, write to me if you
have more to say.”
It may be of interest to know the various methods adopted by
publishers to boost the sale of papers. “ An example of circulation
building by high-pressure methods, including premiums, that
exceeded all bounds was the contest in which London, England,
newspapers engaged some years ago. Lord Beaverbrook, in a page
one announcement, admitted that between March 1st and June
303is London Daily Express spent more than ? 1,000,000 in gifts
105
and prizes to get new readers or about $2 per new subscriber.’' 1

Gandhiji was resorting to unorthodox ways to promote sale
for the Indian Opinion Addressing the readers under the caption—
.
6
Suggestion to Readers ’
—
he wrote in the Gujarati section of the
paper on August 24, 1907 :
“ In our opinion, the Gujarati section of Indian Opinion is at present rendering

invaluable service. This claim will probably appear exaggerated. However,
the statement is justified. The Transvaal Indians are
at present carrying on a
heroic struggle and this paper engaged in furthering that struggle in every
is
possible maimer. We therefore deem it to be the duty of every Indian to read

every line of it pertaining to the struggle. Whatever is read is afterwards to be
acted upon, and the issue, after being read, to be preserved
and not thrown
is
away. We recommend that certain and translations should be read and

articles
re-read. Moreover, our cause needs to be discussed in every home in the
required number of copies of Indian Opinion to their friends and, advising them
to read them, seek all possible help from them. The present issue includes a
letter addressed by the Hamidia Islamic Society to Indian Muslims. We think
it necessary that hundreds of copies of this number should be sent out to
India.”
Gaadhiji made the following appeal on behalf of the manage-
ment, to the readers of the Indian Opinion (Gujarati), in its issue
of October 12, 1907 :
“ Our readers must have noticed that originally we gave four pages to the
Gujarati section, but later increased them to 8 and then again to 12. For some
weeks past the number has gone up to 13, 14 and even 15. Now we intend to
give 16 pages every time. Owing to several difficulties, it may occasionally
happen that we cannot give so many pages. Such an increase involves additional
expenditure to us, though that will not deter us, for our aim is to earn our bread
through public service. Service is the principal object. Earning a livelihood
takes the second place. From the time that Indian Opinion was founded till
today,no one has thought of making money out of it, and no one will ever think
of it Hence we intend to give to the reader greater benefits in pro-
in future.
portion to the rise in income. If and when there remains any balance after the
salaries of those connected with the journal reach a certain level, all of it will
be spent on public work.
" We are convinced that an increased circulation of Indian Opinion will mean
growth of education and patriotism among us. The journal has at present only
1,100 subscribers, though the number of readers is much larger. If all readers
buy their copies, Indian Opinion can render three times better service than
it doestoday. We hope it will not be considered unreasonable of us if we expect
encouragement in proportion to the increase in the number of pages. If those

who fully realise the value of the service rendered by this paper secure even one
additional subscriber each, we shall feel heartened thereby and get some help
1
J. E. Pollard : Principles of Newspaper Management (McGraw-Hill Book
Company, New York, 1937), p. 91.
106
Managing the Paper
in meeting the increased expenditure consequent upon the increase in the
number of pages."
In India, through the Navajivan Gandhiji proved, that a paper
could pay its way through and need not depend on advertisement
or external monetary help. The proprietors of the Young India

also came round to his views.
The Young India soon started selling in thousands. The press
was making profit. A correspondent suggested that because of the
profit made, the price of the Young India and the Navajivan should
be reduced simultaneously. It could be printed on cheap paper as
well. But Gandhiji disagreed and said “It is a bad policy to print
:
cheap newspaper by making profits from other work. I want the

much interested in the upkeep of the papers
readers to be just as
as the manager and the editor are.”
Was he allowing profit at the cost of the poor people ? No.
He knew who could well afford it were paying
that only those
for his papers. And whyshould they not pay ? If there is any
profit made by the papers, that could be utilized for some other
purpose—for the service of tire community. In fact, earlier, i.e.
on April 3, 1924, he said the profits of the paper run by him would
be distributed for all India work and to the propagation of Hindi.
He would never agree to spend money unnecessarily. He would
see that money was always spent on a worthy cause. He would not,
as he said in a message, spend an anna if it was not necessary ;
but if it was, he would not hesitate to spend a crore of rupees.
After 1920, Gandhiji was the undisputed leader of the Congress.
As an organization. Congress was expanding fast. The message of
the Congress was publicized through the cloumns of the papers in
the country. But what about outside publicity ? Some suggested
special bulletins or papers to be published at Congress expense,
from abroad, for educating the outside world. That was quite
an expensive affair. But something had to be done.
Gandhiji came out with a solution. He gave an alternative sug-
gestion to the Congress which not only showed his interest in pub-
licity, particularly external publicity, but his consideration for public
money and the best way of utilizing that. Special bulletins, he
thought, could be brought out and attached to the Young India
whose circulation was then 25,000. A
nominal charge would be
made for this extra supplement to cover part of whole of the
107
expenditure on the bulletin. His idea was to send such bulletins
mainly “ to the chief news agencies of the world ”. By this method
maximum result with minimum expenditure could be achieved.
In this context, it might be of interest to note that Gandhiji, a
former “Durban, Johannesburg and South African correspon-
dent ” of the India in England, recommended the winding up of
the paper as the return did not commensurate with the expenditure
made. In the 20 October, 1921 issue of the Young India he
wrote “ For the maintenance of India we pay i.e., the poor
: —
—
people of India pay £1,800 a year the paper had a che-
. .. .
quered career but was never a success from the propagandist point
of view. It has never had a constructive policy. To squander
£ 1,800 on a 3 d. weekly with a circulation of 500, and to spend
another £ 1,500 on establishment charges, £ 3,000 in all, looks like
reckless extravagance.”
Gandhiji would plan weeks, if not months, ahead for the arrange-
ment of the matters for the Young India or the Navajivan. Entries
in his diary of January 18, 1925 indicated his plan for the Young
India of 30 July 1925.
Here are the entries :
Young India 30th July

Congress and Political parties 17
An insult and Charkha 1
Too costly 7
Deshbandhu and spinning (not clear) 5
Congress corruption 3
China’s plight 3
The Crisis in China 8
Misunderstanding 4
AU-India Spinning Association 2
Q.B.M. Centenary 3
Varnashram & Untouchability 9
Congress unemployed 10
Currency and cotton 16
Agriculture and Khaddar 17
Earlier, on March 12, 1922, he was giving instructions to Shri

Krishnadas :
“ The correspondence, reports etc. should come
to you for disposal. Unless it is too much must
for you, all articles
finally pass through your hands. I have several names as Satis
108
Managing the Paper
Babu, Rajagopalachari, you, Swaih Kaka, Devdas. It would be
better now if Satis Babu gave you the permission to sign articles.
The room should be entirely at your disposal. You should lock the
verandah door from inside. Fix up the whole office there. Hordikar
and the bulletin staff should be there for work but under your
permission.”
Gandhiji was very methodical in whatever subject he laid his
hands on. He knew that mere good writing was not enough. He
must see that the paper was published and despatched in tirne ,
and that proper account was maintained. He used to take the

best out of his associates in running the paper.
The Swarajya, incidentally, was not accepting, like the Young
India any advertisement. It gained support from the people from
the beginning. It had a group of But after twelve
brilliant writers.
years it closed down had no solid financial
for financial reasons. It
ground to stand the stress and strain of the time. Moreover, it

subordinated journalism to politics. “ They recruited staff, some-
what in the manner of the Congress collecting volunteers ; and
they utilised the national enthusiasm for securing low-paid staff.” 2
The Harijan started its publication. On January 25, 1933,
Gandhiji wrote to Shri G. D. Birla “ Here is the estimate for the
:
proposed English edition of Harijan Sevak. As you can see, it is

a very moderate sum. I proposed to bring out, to start with,
10,000 copies. Then if there is not that demand, we might slow
down. My policy, as you know, is that I shall not handle the paper
except to make it self-supporting. If it does not become self-sup-
porting, I should conclude that there is inefficient management
or editing, or that there is no public demand
for such a paper.” 3
And again on March 9, 1933, he wrote to Shri Birla: “ The
English Harijan has become self-supporting already. The subs-
cription received to date from
and annual subscribers
street sales
leave a balance without the aid of the Rs. 1,044 from the Central
Board. This money, can, therefore, be refunded. My enquiry . . .
is merely with a view to saving commission on money order, draft
or cheque.”
a
Bombay, 1962), p. 188.
* O. D. Birla In the Shadow of the Mahatma
: (Orient Longmans, Bombay
1953), p. 97.
109
He would, as well, plan for the refund of money to the subs-

cribers of the paper who paid in advance. In the Harijan of Novem-
ber 10, 1940, he wrote One word as to the practical
question. You are a subscriber to one of the weeklies. I do not
know when, if ever, they will be resumed. You are entitled to the
On receipt of a
return of the unused balance of your subscription.
post card from you to the Manager, Harijan, Poona, for a refund,
a money order for it will be sent to you. Those who do not ask for
a refund will have their paper sent to them if it is resumed. If it
is not, the unused balance will be spent in covering any loss that
may be caused in winding up. And then the balance, if any, will
be sent to the Harijan Sevak Sangh for use in the service of Hari-
jans. If Harijan is not resumed within six months, it will be deemed
to have been finally wound up. Meanwhile good-bye.”
His punctuality in bringing out the journal regularly in time has
been referred to. He succeeded in doing so throughout his life
because of his meticulous care for details. He took particular pains
to see that materials for the press are sent in time.He used to
keep an exact time table of the working of the Post Office or the
Railways.
Shri Pyarelal wrote :
“ Despatching of matter for the Harijan weeklies always used to be a bit

of an exciting adventure, when Gandhiji used to be constantly on the move.
It involved poring over railway maps and columns of Bradshaw and Indian
Post and Telegraph Guide, checking up of train timings and train connection
not to mention the exigencies of late arrivals and erratic habits of certain trains.
It made some of Gandhiji’s staff fair experts in the arcana of India Postal world.
For instance, Gandhiji could tell with exact precision the time the post would
take to be delivered at particular place by the various alternative routes. Once
in the course of Gandhi-Irwin negotiations a question arose as to whether a
particular letter which Lord Irwin had sent to Gandhiji had been despatched
in time. Lord Irwin maintained that it must have been. ‘ Then it ought to have
reached me before I left Bardoli ’ replied Gandhiji. * You better make an
enquiry in your office. There is bound to have been some despatching delay
And so in the end it proved to be." 4
It was a special pride of Gandhiji that the papers he was asso-
ciated with—for about half a century—never got delayed. The
publication date was always kept up even though he was constantly
on tour in India. He even went abroad to Burma, Ceylon and
4
Pyarelal: Mahatma Gandhi The Last Phase (Navajivan
: Publishing House,
Ahmedabad).
110
Managing the Paper
England, But his papers were coming out in time. The way the
first issue of the Harijan was brought out after his release from
jail as recorded by Shri Pyarelal has already been narrated.

Gandhiji was punctual in everything and demanded the same
sternlyfrom his associates. Kaka Saheb Kalelkar recalled an
interesting incident of the Swami, who was requested by Gandhiji
to set right the Navajivan Press. Heup at the ap-
failed to turn
pointed date. Gandhiji coolly remarked “ Either he is dead or
:
has fallen ill. No one can promise to come on a certain day and
9
then fail to come if he can possibly help it. Gandhiji was correct '
in studying the nature of his colleagues whom he selected for parti-

cular jobs. Swami got sick in the train and had to detrain at Surat
for medical aid.
“One day I went to the Press. There was Swami, plunged in work as usual,
a glass of milk beside him, some ripe and luscious bananas lying before him and,
proof after proof coming into his hands from the press. He would break off
a bit of banana with his left hand, and correct proofs with his right. The proof
dealt with, he would take a hasty sip of the milk. The sip taken, back to his
proof again. This kind of thing used to go on for three or four days at a stretch.
No time to bathe. No time for anything at all—sleeping where he worked.
“This was the way he was working when he received a card from Bapu
(Gandhiji), despatched from some place in North India. It ran like this :
*
You are looking after Navajivan so well, that I have no cause to worry. I
hope your work progresses satisfactorily/ Swami was greatly puzzled. Why
4
had Bapu sent him such a card ? 1 have complained of no difficulties, nor is
it likely that any one has complained about me/ He wondered and pondered,
4 4
and then he suddenly remembered. Oh/ he said, of course, that is what it is :
I promised to work for the Navajivan Press for six months, and the six months
are up to-day. Oh ! the clever old ‘ bania ! ' This is the way of getting that
promise renewed. I had completely forgotten that I came here for six months
only. But that old man never forgets such things. Look at the way he is binding
me over for a further period Jivatram (Kripalani) is quite right when he says
!
5
that that old man is the wiliest bird you could come across in a day's journey !”
Such was the atmosphere in which co-workers of Gandhiji for
the paper worked. This was their relationship.
Any editor could reproduce his articles. He insisted on their
being ‘common property/ He was against copyright. In the
Harijan of February 25, 1933, he wrote I do not believe
in presenting the public with free literature on any subject. It may

be ever so cheap, but never free. F believe in the old Sanskrit
5
Kaka Kalelkar : Stray Glimpses of Bapu (Navajivan Publishing House,
Ahmedabad, 1950), pp. 93-95.
Ill
proverb
4
Knowledge is for those who would know \ But these are
my personal views. can only tender my advice to the organisa-
I
tions and organisers. There is no copyright in Harijan. Enter-

prising vernacular newspapers will publish their own editions of
Harijan Some have already written to me of their intention to
.
do so. I can prevent no one. I can only plead with every one to
follow the advice which I have tendered and which is based on
considerable experience/’
He published a letter from Shri Satish Kalelkar in the Harijan
of June 15, 1940 and gave his own views on copyright :
“ Being modem in my views and rather materialistic in temperament ”, thus

wrote Satish Babu, “ I have always been sceptical about your views on the
question of copyright. If I remember right, you needed some persuasion from
friends before you consented to hold the copyright and save the profits on your
Autobiography for the sake of the A.I.S.A. I agree that a seeker of truth should
welcome its spread, and not put obstacles by insisting on the copyright. But
surely there is a limit to this liberality, and an unscrupulous exploitation of it
ought to be prevented.
“ Perhaps you are aware that Harijan comes in very handy to the evening
papers on Saturday and morning papers on Sunday. Some editors, not content
with the ‘whole week-end off', draw liberally on Harijan even on Monday
morning.
“ I am not discussing here the possibility of raising the already excellent
sales of Harijan by stopping the reproduction of articles in other papers, nor
am I opposed to your views that truth should be spread widely. There are other
results, however, which must not be ignored. Some Anglo-Indian papers,
which are not exactly in love with the nationalist movement, sometimes repro-
duce convenient excerpts, and sometimes one side only, of the issues discussed
in a series of articles in Harijan. Take for example the Ajmer case. The Anglo-
Indian papers, that published an account of the incident and your cautious
advice to the Ajmer workers to restrain themselves, took care to publish the
Commissioner's ‘ explanation in that connection but they did not consider
*
;
it a part of the ‘ gentleman's agreement with regard to the free reproduction

'
of articles from Harijan , to publish the final and irrefutable reply from your
pen. Your unwillingness in accusing before all facts are known, and your
deliberate moderation and openness are interpreted as 4 Gandhi's admission \
The * awkward * articles that appear later in Harijan are safely ignored !
” Perhaps you would argue that truth needs no tomtomming, and that it can
never be suppressed in spite of a conspiracy of silence in papers. But surely
one may not be a party to the spread of untruth by indirectly consenting to the
publication of half-truths. Don't you agree that you should qualify your free
permission so as to stop misleading excerpts and only a few of a series of
articles being reproduced in other papers ? ”
“ There is much force in what young Kalelkar says,” wrote Gandhiji,
112
Managing the Pape?
“I own that often my articles suffer from consideration. They are made to
yield a meaning I had never intended. The Ajmer illustration quoted by my
correspondent is clinching. This matter of copyright has been often brought
before me. But I have not the heart to copyright my articles. I know that there
is a financial loss. But as Harijan is not published for profit I am content so
long as there is no deficit. I must believe that in the end my self-denial must
serve the cause of truth/'
And again on July 13, 1940, in the Harijan under the caption
5
Copyright he wrote
fi
“ It is strange that what I would not do in response to the advice of a corres-

pondent I have to do almost immediately after the refusal though, I feel, for a
very cogent reason. Since my main article will henceforth be written in Gujarati,
I would not like their unauthorised translations appearing in the Press. I have
suffered much from mistranslations when I used to write profusely in Gujarati
and had no time myself to produce simultaneous English translations. I
have arranged this time for such translation in English and Hindustani. 1
would therefore ask editors and publishers kindly to regard English and Hin-
dustani translation rights as reserved. I have no doubt that my request will be
respected.”
There had been comments on Gandhiji’s attitude towards
machines. The popular belief is that Gandhiji was against all types
of machines. But it was not correct. He used a watch to keep time.
A
thermometer, to measure temperature, was also handy with
him. Similar useful things, which do not harm Indian village
industries, were used by him. He talked over the telephone as and
when necessary. There were early pictures of Gandhiji showing
him riding a bicycle. There were similar pictures showing him using
a microscope.
The following note published in the Harijan of June 22, 1935, by
Shri Mahadev Desai, Secretary to Gandhiji, would give an idea of
his attitude towards machinery.
“A holding a brief for machinery asked Gandhiji if the village indus-
socialist
tries movement was not meant to oust all machinery.”
“ ‘is not this wheel a machine ? was the counter-question that Gandhiji,
'
”
who was then spinning, gave in reply.
“‘ mean bigger machinery/
I do not mean this machine, but I
“ ‘ Do you mean Singer's Sewing machine ? That, too, is protected by the
village industries movement, and for that matter any machinery which does
not deprive masses of men of the opportunity to labour, but which helps the
individualand adds to his efficiency, and which a man can handle at will without
being its slave/
“ ‘
But what about the great inventions ? You would have nothing to do
with electricity?'
“ ‘ Who said so ? If we could have electricity in every home, I should not
113
G—
Mahatma Gandhi The Journalist —
mind villagers plying their implements and tools with the help of electricity.
But then the village communities or the State would own power houses, just as
they have their grazing pastures. But where there is no electricity and no machi-
nery, what are idle hands to do ? Will you give them work, or would you have
their owners cut them down for want of work ?’
“ * I would prize every invention of
sciencemade for the benefit of all. 1
should not care for the asphyxating gases capable of killing masses of men at a
time. The heavy machinery for work of public utility which cannot be under-
taken by human labour has its inevitable place, but all that would be owned
by the State and used entirely for the benefit of the people. I can have no con-
sideration for machinery which is meant either to enrich the few at the expense
of the many, or without cause to displace the useful labour of many.’
“
‘But even you as a socialist would not be in favour of an indiscriminate
use of machinery. Take printing presses. They will go on. Take surgical
instruments. How can one make them with one's hands ? Heavy machinery
would be needed for them. But there is no machinery for the cure of idleness,
but this,' said Gandhiji, pointing to his spinning wheel. ‘I can work it whilst
I am carrying on this conversation with you, and am adding a little to the wealth
of the country. This machine no one can oust l’."
As a journalist and publicist, he was in early years taking help
of the typewriter. In his letter to Messrs. Nazar and Khan (June 3,
1902) he wrote :
“ Soon after reaching Bombay, I invested, in a
typewriter, Rs. 200. The machine has been wholly used for public
work.”
On November from London, he wrote to the Manager
17, 1908,
of the Empire Typewriting Company : “ With reference to the
‘
Empire ’ hired by me, I shall keep it for a month as from the
12th instant. I understand that tire monthly terms are 15. You
have already received 7/6 and I now enclose cheque for the
balance. I shall thank you to let me have the receipt.”
It appears that in the later period he was averse to typewriters.
In his letter to Mr. Richard Gregg from Nandi Hill, dated May
29, 1927, he wrote “ because of my dislike of typewriters,
: . .
if I could possibly write with my own hand, I would inflict an illegi-

ble hand in preference to having my letters typed or typing them
myself. The typewriter is a cover for indifference and la'zi-
. . .
ness. . And the inroads that the typewriter is making have

. .
all but to destroy magnificent art of calligraphy. I wonder if you
have seen old handwritten manuscript when people used to pour

forth their very soul into their work.” 8
• Gandhi Marg (Gandhi Smarak Nidhi, Rajghat, New Delhi, October, 1959),
Vol. in, No. 4, p. 279.
114
Managing the Paper
Gandhiji would not stand wastage in whatever form it might be.
He would like to utilize even the used envelopes,

unused portions
of letters, wrappers on packets or any piece of torn paper that was
handy. He would keep notes, dictate instructions, or keep accounts
on such scraps. Each one of these, addressed to his numerous
colleagues and followers, were of great importance, as they indi-
cated his thinking. Unfortunately, because of their very nature,
many of these scraps were lost. But those which have been pre-
served would show his mastery of details and his clear instructions
on writing, editing, printing and despatching of paper. On Mondays
—
—days for silence these scraps would be much more voluminous.
“ Entering Mahatmaji's room at mid-day, I found him smiling all by himself
in a gleeful mood. As soon as I entered, he said, ‘Krishnadas, so many telegrams
come to me daily, and yet not knowing what to do with the forms, I used to tear
them. It gave me pain, and I was thinking on what use they could be put to.
At last I have hit upon a plan/ He then took up a form and showed me how to
make a cover out of it. He then directed me to prepare envelopes from the
telegraph forms received by us every day. I have begun to make those covers,
and he has been using them for the purpose of his letters. He has given them
the name of * Patent Envelope \ He finds so much genuine pleasure in using
such covers that he would not touch envelopes of far superior quality even when
they would be placed before him/* 7
4
Shri K. G. Mashruwala mentioned small things ’
that he learnt
from Gandhiji.
“ This was perhaps when 1 met him for the first time in Champaran in 1917.
He asked me to copy out a passage from the Indian Year Book on a sheet of
foolscap paper. As the paper was larger than I needed I folded it up, made a
crease by passing my fingers over it, and began to tear it along the crease.
Gandhiji stopped me, and asked me to cut it with a knife. ‘ When you tear
along a crease with your hands/ he said, ‘ fibres appear along the edges. They
jar upon the eye. You should make it a rule always to divide the paper with a
paper-cutter or an ordinary knife/
“ Once he showed me how to open up the flap of an envelope, the gum of which
had got stuck. He introduced a fountain pen into a slight opening under the
flap, and quickly rolled it round the edge. He said : Do you see how it opens
*
up without injuring the paper ? This is a method which everyone should know/
“ He was displeased if he saw a letter placed in an envelope with irregular
foldings. He said *
: When you fold your letter you must see that the edges
coincide properly and the fold is regular. An irregular folding creates a bad
”
impression upon the receiver about you. It looks slovenly/ 8
7
Krishnadas Seven Months with Mahatma Gandhi (S. Ganesan & Co.,
:
Madras, 1928), p. 117.

8
K. G. Mashruwala Reminiscences of Gandhiji, Ed. by Chandrashankar
:
Shukla (Vora & Co., Bombay, 1949), p. 173.

6 Curse of Advertisement
6
Addressing a meeting of the Friends of India Club, at Dundee,"
on October 7, 1953, Mr. B. G. Kher, the then Indian High Com-

missioner in the United Kingdom, spoke about the weeklies edited
66
by Gandhiji, and remarked They were unique in that they were
:
entirely without a single advertisement and thus free from reliance

on external commercial support for their circulation.” 1
But Gandhiji had to secure external commercial support at the
early stage of his journalistic career. The Indian Opinion in the ,
beginning, was making all-out effort to secure advertisements.

Ft announced, in the first issue “To Europeans and Indians alike
:
it would serve as the best advertising medium. ...”
Advertisements were mostly from resident merchants, for sale

of their products. The advertising rates were Single Column :
2s 6d per inch Double Column 5s per inch repeat half charges.

; ;
One inch single column, for one year, would cost £ 2 10s. The
Indian Opinion further intimated “ Liberal discount for standing
:
advertisements for long periods. For further particulars : write to

the Manager.”
Reproduced below is a sample of an advertisement of the press
from where the Indian Opinion was published :
“FOR ARTISTIC PRINTING

TRY THE
INTERNATIONAL PRINTING PRESS”
Advertisements were miscellaneous in character, from dried

1 Gandhi Marg (Gandhi Smarak Nidhi, Rajghat, New Delhi, October, 1957),
Vol. I, No. 4, p. 27 6.
116
Curse of Advertisement
fish tocheap washing soap. Sometimes advertisements were secured

from parties in India keen on selling goods in South Africa.
But slowly Gandhiji was changing his mind regarding acceptance
of advertisements in the paper from practical and ideological points
of view.
In his book Satyagraha in South Africa Gandhiji spoke about
his departure in policy. He found that some of the best men, his
co-workers, were tied down only for securing advertisements.
Their services to the community, which could otherwise have been
even more substantial, were thus restricted. Then there was the
problem of deciding as to which advertisements should be accepted
or rejected. Sometimes an advertisement could not be refused,
even if the management so desired, as the advertiser, an important
person, had to be obliged. Years later, in 1916, when he, from
India, sent his son Shri Manilal to edit the Gujarati edition of the
Indian Opinion, Gandhiji wrote :
“ I have never desired to take
advertisements.” 2
Realizing outstanding payments for advertisements published,
involved much wastage of time and energy. Last but not the least
of all was the spirit of service which dominated his entire activities
in running the paper. If the Indian community in South Africa
did not feel the necessity for the paper, better close it. The paper
—
was for them to voice their grievances against discriminating
laws. It was by no means a commercial venture to make money.
If there were adequate subscribers, there was no necessity of adver-
tisement at all.
Gradually Gandhiji was limiting the space and scope for adver-
tisements. Those of luxury goods or concerning entertainment
were stopped long before the Satyagraha movement started. At
the time of the movement the number of active workers for the
paper dwindled and so, perforce, advertisements were stopped
altogether. Gandhiji explained that the additional columns thus
saved would be devoted for better coverage of the Satyagraha
movement. He appealed to the readers to patronize the journal
liberally and see that it continued for the service of the co mmunity.
Mr. Henry Polak narrated the decision to stop all advertisements
in the following dramatic manner :
“ It was about this time that Gandhiji amazed me by informing me one day
* Indian Opinion— Mahatma Gandhi Memorial Number (March, 1948), p. 22.
117
Mahatma Gandhi -The Journalist
thathe had come to the conclusion that Indian Opinion should no longer depend
upon advertisements for its support. It seemed to me the death-knell of the
paper, and I asked him whether that meant that he intended to close it down.
*
By no means,’ was his reply. Let us try to get a substantial increase in the
‘
number of subscribers to make up for what we shall lose by dropping the adver-
’
tisements.’ ‘
But ’, I said, ‘
how we do
Well,' he replied, ‘ you
arc to this ? ‘
can yourself travel around the country and get to know the Indian people better.
You can bring the paper to the notice of many who are not already subscribers,
and if you can convince them that they ought, they will certainly persuade
others to subscribe. Explain that this is a non-profit venture for the com-
munity’s service, and that all the workers responsible for it are performing a
labour of love.’ .... This was, indeed, the fact. I set out on a most interesting
series of journeys which gained for the paper considerable number of
. . .
new and enthusiastic subscribers at what proved a critical period of the commu-
3
nity’s history.’’
If exigency primarily compelled Gandhiji to stop securing adver-

tisements for the Indian Opinion, it was, in the case of the Young
India, a calculated move. He had now come to a definite view in
respect of advertisements after weighing the good and bad points.
Bad points far out-weighed the good ones. In the first issue of the
Young India October 8, 1919, Gandhiji wrote: “ The proprietors
of the Young India have decided to give up advertisements.
I know that they have not been, entirely, if at all, converted to
my view that a newspaper ought to be conducted without adver-
tisements. But they are willing to let me make the experiment.”
It was an experiment for the proprietors. But so far as Gandhiji
was concerned, it was a decision which he arrived at after years

of work in the field of journalism. He appealed to his readers
to make the venture a success and make the Young India free from
the curse of advertisements. He continued “ The : Gujarati Nava-
jivan has already demonstrated the possibility of conducting a
newspaper without advertisements soiling its pages.”
Why was Gandhiji against advertisement? First and foremost
was a product is good, why
his consideration for social service. If
|
^should the producer spend money to advertise that product ? All
journals should advocate the utility of such product for the benefit
of the community. Was not the aim of journalism service ? Kaka
Saheb Kalelkar mentioned about giving publicity to, through the
columns of his paper, a pumping set which Gandhiji was convinced
* H. S. L. Polak : Incidents of Gandhiji’s Life, Ed. by Chandrashankar

Shukla (Vora & Go., Bombay, 1949), pp. 237-238.
118
would bring about immense good to the rural people. 4
it was something which will help the farmers, who
If constitute
the overwhelming majority in the country, he would publish
special
write-ups. He would advertise, on his own, the improved oil crusher
which could crush more oil ; he would talk about hand pounding
machine for husking paddy which would give producer more
vitaminous rice with less exertion. He and his co-workers would
endlessly talk about hand spinning and hand weaving gadgets
which could make quick turn over. Any improvement on any
of the existing looms or spindle would get prominence in the
paper. Any invention in this line would be heralded with fan-fare.
A special prize of one lakh of rupees was announced in the shape —
of regular advertisement on behalf of the All-India Spinners Asso-
ciation—for a spinning wheel which would revolutionize the
quantity and quality of production. Incidentally, the Young India
was also advertising Gandhiji’s books, particularly his autobio-
graphy, Shri Mahadev Desai’s book on Bardoli Satyagraha and
similar useful works.
For Khadi, he would go all the way to propagate it. He would
even recommend any media for publicizing its use etc. The foll-
owing question and answer appearing in the Harijan of June 1,
1940, would demonstrate his attitude on the subject.
“ Q. ‘Do you approve of the policy that is being followed by the Charkha
Sangh in some places, of pushing the sale of Khadi by the use, for instance,
of loud speakers, popular gramophone records and the like ? Don’t you thinV
that advertising, apart from supplying the necessary information about the
marketing of Khadi is undignified and incompatible with the Khadi spirit? ’’
“A. ‘ I see nothing wrong or undignified in making use of loud speakers, etc.,
to popularise khadi. Through these means, too, one does no more than give the
prices and other information about khadi. It will be certainly undignified and
worse if false information is given whether with or without the use of loud
’’
speakers and the like.’
If it was a product which would ultimately help the people,

why should the manufacturer spend money in advertising that ?
If thepaper could not bring that to the notice of its readers, what
for was the paper there ?
“ I would be no party to the advertisement of tooth-brushes,
even when they are made in India. I should declare my preference
for the tooth-stick ” — he wrote in the Harijan. He was convinced
* Mentioned in the course of his talk with the author.
119
that neem and * babul sticks, which nature provided in plenty,

* ’ ’
were more useful to India’s teeming millions than costly brushes.

It may be of interest, in this context, to recall the findings on
advertisement by the Press Commission which published its report
in 1954. It estimated the total advertisement revenue of the daily
papers to Rs. 5 crores per year. The Commission could not for
certain difficulties, find out the same for weeklies and other perio-
dicals.On the basis of the reports of the Advertising Agencies,
the Commission expected the total value of advertisements in the
periodicals to be about Rs. 2 crores. Of this total Government
advertisement would be round about 7 per cent.
Discussing the nature of advertisement, the Commission came
to the following conclusion :
“ Taking the total volume of consu-
mer advertising, it will be seen that quite a large proportion is of
items which would appeal only to those who are comparatively
well-to-do. The advertisements of automobiles and accessories,
refrigerators, washing machines, etc., watches, clocks and jewel-
lery, transport, airlines, come to nearly one-third of the total.” 5
These advertisements were mainly inserted in city papers and
journals and meant for sophisticated people. Articles beneficial
to the rural people hardly find, even now, much space.
Incidentally, advertisements in newspapers up to ’thirties were
mostly on imported goods. Cigarettes were the main item, soap
coming close to Newspaper representatives had to go round to
it.
secure advertisements from the parties. Since the Second World

War, the parties, whether Government or non-government, became
conscious of the importance of advertisement.
Gandhiji supported his contention by the economic theory that
advertisements cost money, thus enhancing the price of the product.
That was indirect taxation. India’s poor people could not afford it.
Advertisement is a huge national waste when a sizeable portion
of the national wealth is diverted for this doubtful rivalry among
manufacturers. Mr. John Kenneth Galbraith, in his book Affluent
Society, suggested that this wealth could be better utilized for poorer
sections of the people. Competition between advertisers raises the
price of the product and the general public suffer. It creates new
demand by stimulating want, without correspondingly opening
* India Government : Report of the Press Commission (Manager of Publi-
cations, Delhi, 1954), Part I, p. 81,
130
avenues for people to earn more. Wrote Gandhiji in the Young

India of August 10, 1919 “What financial gain it would be to
:
the country if there was for each province only one advertisement
medium —
not a newspaper containing innocent, unvarnished
notices of things useful for the public. But for our criminal indiffe-
rence, we would decline to pay the huge indirect taxation by way
of mischievous advertisements.”
It also, through psychological approach, coerces people to buy
things which, otherwise, they would not. Probing and mani-

pulating of consumers’ desires for goodsis helped by psychologists,
called by American advertisement consultants as motivational

analysis. They have found their expert advice profitable as it helps
in boosting up sales. Psychologists have become oracles of
American business as they are successfully probing the minds of
buyers. They are trying to prove that sales of goods are governed
by the libido.
Dr. Dichter, in his publication — Motivation — said in April,
1956 :
‘
* We now are confronted with the problem of permitting the average American
to feel moral evenwhen he is flirting, even when he is spending, even when he is
not saving, even when he is taking two vacations a year and buying a second
or third car. One of the basic problems of this prosperity, then, is to give people
the sanction and justification to enjoy it and to demonstrate that the hedonistic
approach to his life is a moral, not an immoral, one. This permission given to
the consumer to enjoy his life freely, the demonstration that he is right in sur-
rounding himself with products that enrich his life and give him pleasure must
be one of the central themes of every advertising display and sales promotion
plan."
This playing up of the part of the tempter is an unhealthy sign
in any society. The famous Mr. Arnold Toynbee, put it

historian,
rather forcefully and called the whole game of advertising as
1
unchristian.’ “ A considerable part of our ability, energy, time
and material resources is being spent today on inducing us to . . .
find the money for buying material goods that we should never
have dreamed of wanting had we been left to ourselves.” Prof.
Toynbee concluded by saying that Christ would have rejected
6
“this skilfully engineered besetting temptation.”
Advertisement creates systematic dissatisfaction. Take the
example of cosmetics. Advertisement promises that use of such
• Time (New York, September 22, 1961), p. 74.
121
and such product will make women more beautiful. Constant

dinning of this idea into their ears make women critical and anxious
about their appearance. They wistfully look for advertised goods
and often switch on to new products. There is no end to this.
By playing upon weaknesses and frailities, house-wives are
encouraged to be non-rational and impulsive in buying family
food. Customers are treated as voters. It would be difficult to
lend moral support to advertisements which exploit human beings
of deepest sexual sensitiveness and yearning for commercial
purposes.
But can advertisements create artificial desire and demand ?
There is another school of thought which will argue that advertise-
ments can only stimulate existing desires by telling people what
goods can be had, what they are like or what satisfaction they are
likely to bring. It helps in the mass demand for products which,
in turn, employs people in thousands. Mass distribution and mass
buying help in building up an affluent society and people should
work hard to achieve it. People should not aspire for a bare sub-
sistence and should not admit that poverty is an essential condition
of human existence.
The Indian Society of Advertisers in one of its recent statements
claimed that advertisements play a tremendous part in building
up mass participation for mass The whole scheme of
benefit.
insurance which is the basis of security in industry, in
commerce
and in family life draws its immense strength and solidity, the
society claims, from members on participation. The more people
insure, the more is the risk divided, the greater is the individual
benefit both in lowered premiums and maximum indemnities.
Gandhiji objected to advertisements more on moral and ethical
grounds. It became difficult, as he experienced in South Africa,
to draw a line between what is bad or beneficial advertisement.
Once a newspaper agreed to take advertisements, there was no
limit to that. In their quest for money, they published indecent
and harmful advertisements. This was, according to him, not the
objective of journalism. Rather than serving the community, such
action would run to the detriment of its interest. As far as the
Young India or the Harijan was concerned, he would come down
with a heavy hand on indecent or obscene advertisement and all
along crusaded against it,
122
In the editorial of the Young India of October

8, 1919, to which
reference was made
he said “ Some readers who are
earlier, :
interested in the purity of the paper sent me a most interesting

extract from a well known newspaper. I have refused to soil the
pages of Navctjfvan by reproducing it. Anyone turning advertise-
ment of leading magazines can verify the truth of my criticism.”
The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary defines obscenity as
“ indecency or lewdness (especially of language) ". Indecency
and obscenity are more or less synonyms and are used for the same
To “ Indecency ”
purpose. quote the Dictionary : is a “ quality
savouring of obscenity”.
The Geneva Conference of 1923 on the Suppression of the
Circulation of, and Traffic in. Obscene Publications could not
satisfactorily define the word obscene ’. In India there is no
‘
statutory definition of the word though the Obscene Publication

Act 1925 was enacted to give effect to the Geneva Convention
recommendation of 1923. Gandhiji's agitation had some effect
in the sense that Government’s attention was drawn to this vital
problem. The Act, among others, set down that whoever “ advertise
or makes known by any means whatsoever that any person is
engaged or is ready to engage in any act which is an offence under
this Section or that any such obscene object can be procured from
or through any person . . shall be punished with imprison-
.
”
ment . . . .
But though the statutory provisions were made, no statutory

definition, was given to the word * obscene \ Even as late as 1940,
in a case in Calcutta, 7 the observation was made that picture of a
nude woman was not per se * obscene ’, when it would shock or
offend the taste of a decent man. If such a picture does not excite
the sensuality or impure thoughts to an average person, they are
outside the purview of the provisions of the Penal Code. It was
observed “ For the purpose of deciding whether a picture is
:
obscene or not, one has to consider to a great extent the sur-

rounding circumstances, the pose, the posture, the suggestive
element in the picture, the person into whose hands it is likely
to fall etc.”
Because of the conflict in attitude between the conservative
’ Emperor vs. Sree Ram Saksena, Indian Law Reporter (Calcutta, 1940),
Vol. I, p. 581.
123
—
Mahatma Gandhi The Journalist
outlook on sex prevalent in India and the influence of English
Indian Courts, the offenders, even
judicial decisions in British
if they were brought to court, which was one in thousand on the
most optimistic estimate, would go scot free. In some cases they
could take shelter under the exception clause of the Act which
laid down, “ This Section does not extend to any book, pamphlet,
writing, drawing or painting kept or used bona fide for religious
purpose represented on or in any temple, or on any car used for the
conveyance of idols, or kept or used for any religious purpose.”
Under the heading Indecent Advertisements,’ Gandhiji wrote,
‘
in the Young India of June 25, 1927 :

“ .... I glance upon
advertisement sheets of newspapers. They are sometimes painfully
instructive.I see often in respectable papers advertisements of
lewd nature. The headlines are deceptive. In one case the heading
was * Book relating to Yoga.’ Looking at the contents of the
advertisement, I discovered hardly one book, out of ten, having
any reference to yogas ; all the rest had reference to sex suggesting
that young men and women may indulge in sexual pleasures
without coming to grief, promising to divulge secret remedies.
I came upon worse things which I do not propose to copy in these
pages.” He was pained to see the editors not averse “ to derive

an income from advertisements which are obviously intended to
spread the evils which they should shun.”
Under the heading ‘ Advertisement Lewdness,’ in the Young
India of October 31, 1929, he said that immoral advertising
pictures were used by sellers of foreign clothes. He received a few
specimens from a correspondent, and was told that more indecent
pictures could also be made available. One such picture was
marked 4
Vilas Jivan.’ Gandhiji commented :
“ The un-
scrupulous ways adopted for enticing simple folk by foreign cloth
ought to disgust decent men . .
”.
There are many types of advertisements which mislead simple

folks. These are mostly in cases of medicines and drugs for ail-
ments which would require the treatment of qualified doctors and
not quacks. Doubtful drugs to cure venereal diseases, or to stop
pregnancy, are freely advertised which are likely to prove harmful.
Credulous public are also lured to make investments in non-existent
concerns. Offers of jobs on some security to be made in advance
are also made through certain advertisements. There are advertise-
124
merits of drugs which are habit forming and most dangerous from
health point of view. “ A single issue of a weekly or a monthly
journal has often been found to contain about 10-15 advertisements
relating to drugs for bringingabout abortion under the title Regula-
tion of menses, rejuvenation, and lascivious literature.” 8
The Press Commission also reported, “ . lapses from good
. .
taste are most noticeable in case of advertisements of drugs intended

for use in connection with women's ailments, venereal diseases or
sexual indulgence. Even a widely respected Hindi literary monthly
9
carried a large number of such advertisements.” Magical cures
were also suggested for all sorts of known and unknown, curable
and incurable diseases.
There are advertisements which are fraudulent in nature. Some
of these try to exploit the unemployment situation in the country
and lure simple folk into snares for purposes of extortion of money.
Services of astrologers making predictions for all kinds of thing's
are also offered through the columns of advertisements. On the
top of it there is the cheap way of drawing attention of the
readers by exposing nude poses or near nude poses of females
to which the text of the advertisement has no relevance whatsoever.
Then there is large proportion of cinema advertisements, illustra-
tions and texts of which are sometimes quite objectionable.
Lack of good taste is also found while composing the advertising
text. Matrimonial advertisements are sometimes crudely worded.
While these may be done unwittingly, advertisements of medicines

to be used for women's ailments or so called advice to the married
couple are deliberately written in the most offensive manner.
Advertisers did not even hesitate to play with the national flag
and photos of national leaders to boost up their products, imme-
diately after independence. The public and the press were equally
thoughtless in taking things lightly which they adore most. The
pictures of Hindu Gods and Goddesses on match-box, cigarette
box, liquor bottles, prominent sign boards of shops and calendars
were abundant. Writing in the Harijcm of April 18, 1948, Shri
K. G. Mashruwala lamented :
* K. G. Mashruwala “ False and Obscene Advertisements,” in Harijan,

:
(Ahmedabad), November 7, 1948.

* India Government : Report of the Press Commission (Manager of Publica-
tions, Delhi, 1954), Part I, p. 97.
125
Mahatma Gandhi- -The Journalist
h<
. On the one hand we worship them (Gods and Avatars) as divine beings
. .
and on the other display them on the stage and screen and name our business
concerns after them. You will not see Jesus or Mohammad represented on the
stage or displayed on advertisements and sign-boards or business houses, such
as Jesus Christ Mills or Rasul Mohammad Pharmacy. Christian or Muslim
public opinion would not tolerate it. When you attach a kind of divinity to a
person, it should be considered bad manners— if not blasphemy to reproduce —
his image or presume to play his part or name your concerns after his in a light
manner.**
It is an irony that Gandhiji who was fighting against indecent

advertisements, became himself an object of exploitation by the
advertisers. Acharya J. B. Kripalani, Secretary, Gandhi National
Memorial Fund, had to come out with a statement (reproduced
in the same editorial referred to above) wherein he said :
“ I have been pained to read in the papers advertisements inserted by private

firms invoking the name of Gandhiji, ostensibly to pay homage to his memory
but really to help in advertisement of their particular wares. Often the wares
advertised are such as Gandhiji would have considered harmful and unpatriotic
to use. . . . Gandhiji, as is well known, was against advertisements in general
and never accepted any for the journals with which he was connected .... I
hope the business community will respond to my appeal and will refrain from
the use of Mahatma Gandhi*s name in their advertisements.**
The Press Commission discussed the whole question of advertise-

ments in detail, their nature, problems, and suggested certain
remedies. Objectionable advertisements could be grouped under
the following main heads : (i) Indecent Cinema Advertisements,
(?7) Misleading advertisements including those on spurious drugs and
(Hi) advertisements regarding obscene literature.
Reference has been made regarding cinema advertisements.
There are many whose illustrations or texts may be considered
objectionable. As remedy to this, the Commission pointed out the
system in vogue in the United States of America where film
advertisements are approved by a central body for the industry.
This committee ensures that the advertisement does not show or
narrate anything which does not find a place in the film which
has been censored.
The Medical Association has recommended a procedure
British
for advertisement and sale of medicine passed by the Council,
One of the recommendations was against any advertisement which
should claim to cure any ailments. It also banned any offer to
diagnose by correspondence disease or symptoms of ill health.
126
Nor could it advertise treatment by correspondence. In addition

the Association listed certain diseases for which medicines, treat-
ments, etc. could not be advertised.
Article 19 (2) of the Indian Constitution allows legislative
measures curtailing freedom of speech and expression, for main-
taining decency and morality. This clause can be used for checking
imfccent advertisements. The
Drugs and Magic Remedies
(Objectionable Advertisements) Act of 1954 was designed to
eliminate many indecent advertisements but it could not check it
altogether because of certain exemptions. One such exemption
was the permission given to doctors to advertise on sign boards
or notices the treatment of diseases. The Act banned advertise-
ments of Talisman, Mantras and Kavachas for curing diseases.
But it did not ban Talisman claiming to win friends or make
fortunes. Sexual tonics were outside its purview. But there was no
mention of advertising love-philtres. Unlike the British Medical
Association, no ban had been placed for diagnosing or curing
diseases through correspondence.
Under the signed article ‘Spurious Medicines' published in
December 12, 1948, Sltri K. G. Mashruwala who
the Harijan dated ,
took over the editorship of the paper after the death of Gandhiji,
published the copy of the resolution passed by the Newspapers
Proprietors' Association in Great Britain. This was sent by an
1
Indian doctor. The resolution was as follows :
“1. No advertisement will be accepted which is claimed to be effective

in Bright’s Disease, Cancer, Tuberculosis, Diabetes, Epilepsy, Fits, Locomotor
ataxia. Disseminated sclerosis, Osteo-arthritis, Spinal, Cerebral and Venereal
diseases,Luppus, Paralysis, or for the cure of Amenorrhoea, Hernia, Blindness,
Rheumatoid arthritis and for procuring miscarriage, or for the treatment of
habits associated with sexual indulgence or for any ailment connected with
these habits.
“ 2. No advertisement will be accepted from any advertiser, who by printed
matter, orally or in his advertisement undertakes to diagnose any condition
or to receive a statement of any person’s symptoms, with a view to advising or
providing treatments by correspondence.
44
3. No advertisement will be accepted by containing a testimonial, other
than limited to the actual views of the writer or any testimonial given by a
doctor other than a recognised British Medical Practitioner.
“4. No advertisement will be accepted, containing illustrations which are
distorted or exaggerated to convey false impressions.
“ 5. No advertisement will be accepted which may lead persons to believe
that the medicine emanated frqm any hospital or official source or is any other
127
than the proprietary medicine advertised by the manufacturer for the purpose
specified, unless the advertising agent submitting the copy declares that the
authority of such hospital or official source has been duly obtained.”
The doctor who sent this copy was the Chief Medical Officer of
a T. B. Hospital. He narrated his seven years’ experience. Accord-
ing to him many T. B. patients bought costly medicines as
advertised in the press. They not only spent their money, but much
of their health before they go to the public hospital. Thousands of
poor arid ignorant people could be saved of millions of rupees which
they waste by becoming victims of fraudulent advertisements.
There is much undesirable literature in the country resulting in the
demoralization of the people, particularly on the young ones who
are the future hopes of the country. The advertisement of such
literature is couched in a language from which it is difficult to know
the exact content of the book. Earlier we have seen how the
Young India drew the attention of the readers to some books on
‘
Yoga.’ After years of agitation the Young Persons (Harmful
Publications) Act of 1956 sought preventing circulation of publica-
tions which are likely to have baneful effects on young persons.
In this case young persons are those under the age of 20. The
harmful publication, according to the Act, was “ Any book,
:
magazine, pamphlet, leaflet, newspaper or other like publication

which consist of stories told with the aid of pictures or without
the aid of pictures or wholly in pictures, being stories portraying
wholly or mainly (i) the commission of offences, (ii) acts of violence
and cruelty or (iii) incidents of a repulsive or horrible nature, in
such a way that the publication as a whole would tend to corrupt
a young person into whose hands it might fall, whether by inciting
or encouraging him to commit offences or acts of violence or
cruelty or in any other manner whatsoever.”
Not only persons distributing such materials, but advertising
in harmful publications could be punished with imprisonment up to
six months or fine or both. On conviction Court might order
destruction of copies of such harmful publications. Any offence
objectionable under this Act was declared cognizable offence or
an offence for which a police officer could arrest without any
warrant.
The reforms in advertisement advocated by Gandhiji were later
on pursued, though half-heartedly, by the Indian and Eastern
128
Newspapers Society which adopted a code for the press. Un-

fortunately most of the papers interpreted this code by saying
that it was recommendatory and not obligatory. There had been a
few exceptions where some papers tried to honour this code but
they also soon fell prey to the same. The Press Commission said :
“ The Association of Advertising Agencies and the Indian Society
of Advertisers have both informed us that they are in favour of
a code of advertising that would keep out advertisement of an
objectionable or doubtful character and are taking steps for its
adoption.” 10
In this matter they decided to follow the codes adopted by the
International Chamber of Commerce and by the widely known
paper —
the New York Times. The Commission recommended
.
that the Indian and Eastern Newspapers

Society, and the Indian
Language Papers Association, should adopt a strict code of
advertisement conduct and appealed to all their members to follow
that. This code would also be binding on the Association of
Advertising Agencies and Indian Society of Advertisers through
whom a major portion of advertisements were distributed. The
Commission further recommended that these four bodies should
join and form an advertisement council by laying down high
standards of ethics. These might leave out small language papers
and periodicals. For that the Commission recommended strong
legal measures. Such a council is yet to be formed. Such strong
legal measures are still to be taken by the Government, though
West Bengal and Bihar enacted Undesirable Advertisement
Control Act, 1948 and Bihar Drug Advertisement Control Act of
1946, respectively. There were many lacunae and they did not
coverthe wide range of subjects as they should. Moreover advertisers
of objectionable advertisements would often go unpunished because
of the reluctance of people to bring the matter to the notice of the
Court. The Commission suggested that to stop this nuisance the
Government and the press had joint responsibility. It suggested
that the Government could make an enactment whereby it could
declare publishing of objectionable advertisement as “ an offence
punishable with fine or imprisonment It also recommended
that the Government should investigate advertisement of books
6
offered to *
adults only advertisement items of birth control
10
Ibid. ‘p. 98.
129
G—
Mahatma Gandhi - The Journalist
4
clinics’ or massage establishments \ furnishing 'nurses’, etc.
The Press Commission appealed “ We would also urge upon
:
the publishers and editors the wisdom of passing on for investiga-

tion any advertisements which they receive and which in their
judgement are of this nature.” 11
Gandhiji did not believe that newspapers were to be published
at any cost. It was not money but service which was the motto.
He asked “Is it necessary to conduct newspapers at any cost ?
:
Is the good that they do so great as to outweigh the evil that mis-
chievous advertisements cost ?”
As in other fields Gandhiji had a constructive approach to this
problem as well. He did not believe much in the theory of imposing
something from above. He had faith in self-control and self-
restraint. He fervently hoped for a code of conduct amongst
journalists which could alone stop such mischievous advertise-
ments. He queried “ We have a Journalists’ Association. Is it
:
not possible, through it, to cultivate the uniform code of morals

among them and create public opinion that would make it
impossible for a respectable journal not to follow the prescribed

code?”
Under the heading :
4
How to stop obscene advertisements \
Gandhiji wrote in the Harijan of November 14, 1936 :
“ A sister, sending me a cutting from a well known magazine containing the

advertisement of a most objectionable book, writes :
« The enclosed came under my eye when glancing over the pages of ...
‘
.
I do not know if you get this magazine. I do not suppose you ever have time to
glance at it even if it is sent to you. Once before I spoke to you about the
obsoene advertisements. I do wish you would write about them sometime.
That books of the type advertised are flooding the market today is only too true,
but should responsible journals like. encourage their sale ? My woman’s
. .
modesty is so utterly repelled by these things that I cannot write to anyone but
you. To think that what God has given to woman with intent for an express
purpose, should be advertised for abuse is too degrading for words. ... I
wish you would write about the responsibility of leading Indian newspapers
and journals in this respect. This is not the first by any means that I could
have sent to you for criticism/
**
From the advertisement I do not propose to reproduce any portion except
to tell the reader that it describes as obscenely as it can be suggestive contents
of books advertised. Its title is Sexual Beauty of the Female Forms and the
*
'
advertising Ann tells the reader that it will give away free to the buyer two
» Ibid., p. 101.
130
more books called

4
New Knowledge for the Bride *
and 4 The Sexual Embrace
or How your Partner \
to Please
44
1 fear that in relying on me in any way to affect the course of the advertisers
of such books or to move the editors or publishers from their purpose of making
their productions yield profits, she relies on a broken reed. No amount of
appealing by me to the publishers of the objectionable books or advertisements
of them will be of any use. But what I would like to tell the writer of the letter
and other learned sisters like her, is to come out in the open and to do the work
that is peculiarly and specially theirs/*
He obviously wanted to create a strong public opinion, with

women as the vanguard, against such advertisements. Earlier, he
appealed to fellow journalists to adopt a code of conduct and put
a stop to these horrible advertisements. There was some response.
In the same journal, on January 2, 1937, he wrote “ corres- : A
pondent who saw my article on obscene advertisements writes :
**
You can do much in preventing obscene advertisements by exposing the
names of the papers and magazines which advertise such shameless things as
you have mentioned.
44
1 can't undertake the censorship my correspondent advises, but 1 can sug-
gest a better way.
“ If public conscience
is alive, subscribers can write to their respective papers
ifthey contain objectionable advertisements, drawing their attention to them

and stopping their subscriptions if the offence is not cured.
44
The reader will be glad to know that the sister who complained to me about
the obscene advertisements wrote also to the editor of the offending magazine
who expressed his regret for the inadvertent admission of the obnoxious adver-
tisement and promised to remove it forthwith.
44
am
glad also to say that my caution has found support from some other
1
papers. Thus the editor of the Nispruka of Nagpur, wxites :
<4 4
1 have not only read with great care your article in the Harijan regarding
obscene advertisements but have given a detailed translation of it in the Nis-
pruha. I have also added a short editorial comment thereon/
“I am enclosing a typical advertisement which though not obscene, is yet
immoral a sense. The advertisement is obviously bogus and it is generally
in
the villager who falls a prey to it. I have always refused such advertisements
and I am also writing to this party similarly. If an editor must supervise the
reading matter that he will allow, it is as much his duty to supervise the advertise-
ments, and no editor can permit his paper to be used by people desirous of
duping the simple villagers/*
Though Gaiidhiji believed in self-imposed restrictions by the

editors in not giving publicity to such things, he would not, as we
saw earlier, hesitate to recommend to the Government sterner
actions. As a practical man, he knew that while big papers would
take steps to ban indecent advertisements, smaller language papers
131
and journals would ignore such decisions.- There the imposition

of law was necessary. The Press Commission, as we have seen,
also recommended the same thing.
In a country like India where democracy has not yet stood on
solid grounds, some sort of legal action may be necessary in the
initial stages. When is not inte-
average people see that the State
rested in controlling bad things, nor does it extol virtues, they are
likely to infer that the law has only negative sides. In the last ana-
lysis we come to the people who should be educated and be able
to distinguish between right and wrong and should put voluntary
restraint on things. Gandhiji believed in raising the standard of
the community and creation of a strong public opinion which
would force people to do things in the correct way.
In his book Essays On Education Mr. Whitney Griswold wrote :
“ Books won’t stay banned. They won’t burn. Ideas won’t go to

jail. In the long run of history, the censor and the inquisitor have
always lost. The only sure weapon against bad ideas is better
ideas.”
In the editorial — •'
False and Obscene Advertisements ’
—pub-
lished in the Harijan, November 7, 1948, Shri K. G. Mashruwala
wrote :
“Public libraries and reading rooms can also play a great part in controlling
papers and advertisers. They can keep a black-box, in which readers should put
in complaints about a journal not keeping to a proper standard either in its
writing, pictures or advertisements. The managers of libraries should verify
such complaints, and draw the attention of the journal asking them
if satisfied
to correct themselves, and if not heeded refuse to patronize it. This would, by
the way, be a superior and more effective censorship than that exercised through
Government Executive.”
Was Gan'dhiji afraid of taking advertisement lest it influenced
the policy of the paper ? It is difficult to believe that he would
personally have cared for any such outside influence. But none the
less it raises an interesting issue. Cannot advertiser exert influence
on the papet through which he advertises his products ? The
Harijan of October 18, 1948, published an editorial by Shri K. G.
Mashruwala, wherein it stated :
“ We have been talking of freedom of the Press ; it has been called the
Fourth Estate and so on. But what about the sacred responsibility of the jour-
nalists ? They seek to corrupt the Government through the criticism, but
they themselves are under the effective control of their advertisers or the
industrialists who pay them. They accept any rubbish of an advertisement or
132
afford any industrialist interest if they are paid their price. They write a leader
to denounce drink and at another place give a full-page advertisement of some
wine."
The Press Commission went through this question and came to
the conclusion that a single advertiser could not bring about pres-
sure on the policy of a paper. Their finding is as follows :
It is difficult to envisage that a single advertiser can
act as a source of
pressure on the general policy of a paper. We
have naturally been anxious
to ascertain whether it would be possible, even of any group of advertisers, to
hold a paper to ransom or to force it to change its general policy. We find
that out of a total estimated revenue of Rs. 5 crores to the daily newspapers
about 60% reaches them through the Advertising Agencies and the balance is
placed directly by small individual adveriisers in the form of local and classi-
fied advertisements, each of which, by itself, would be of very small value.
Taking the big advertisers who generally operate through agencies, we do not
consider it likely that pressure would be exercised through the agencies, since
the interests of one group might differ from the interests of another group
handled by the same agency."
There is another type of advertisement which, though not much
in vogue in India in the time of Gandhiji, has now become quite a
problem. This is political advertisement—- buying of newspaper
space to sponsor a political cause or advertise a particular condition
in a country. Sometimes Governments spend huge amount to
publicize their point of view on certain issues. The Daily Express,
London, disclosed on December 20, 1962 that the Soviet Govern-
ment paid it £20,000 to print the full text of Mr. Khruschev’s
address to the Supreme Soviet on December 12, the same year. 13 It
is often difficult to decide as to what is desirable and what is un-
desirable in paid advertisements for * wonder cures ’, etc. in standard

newspapers. But how to check controversial political advertise-
ments ? If a businessman is allowed to advertise the good points
of his merchandise why should not a politician do the same for
his party or for his country ? This has been the argument of many
people now-a-days.
Recently, the Government of India wanted to regulate foreign
governments attempting to advertise their views through the
columns of newspapers in India. The Government was seeking
the advice of Indian and Eastern Newspapers Society on this matter.
The Statesman of January 6, 1962, in an editorial note said:
“ Historically there is a case for anxiety. Before World War I, perhaps a
u The Statesman (New Delhi, December 21, 1962).
133
major part of the Parisian Press was not unjustly popularly supposed to be
subsidized by foreign embassies, partially though not exclusively that of
Russia. Between the wars, similar charges were alleged without effective con-
tradiction against the regimes of Mussolini and Hitler .... Present argument,
however, concerns paid advertising: at least a less devious approach than some.
In the USA this is not merely prevalent but difficult to assail without violating
constitutional guarantees. If the erstwhile Trujillo regime in the Dominican
Republic spent money on full-page announcements in the New York papers,
Americans, whatever they thought of the content, found it difficult in principle
to object. A reader was expected to form his own opinion, as in Britain of
equal recently extensive publicity for the Federation of Rhodesia and Nyasa-
land. There is also—still not eliminated here through shortage of newsprint—
the allied question of foreign sponsored supplements. What is most necessary
to ensure is that advertisement should be clearly recognizable as such and
not masquerade as news or the newspaper’s own comment.”
But Gandhiji would raise the basic question the duty of a —
journalist to thecommunity. If the system was good and worth
emulating, why should space be purchased to publicize it ? Why
should a conscientious newspaper black out a useful news item ?
Is not money, in such cases, trying to influence the policy of some
papers ?
134
Liberty of the Press
It was a coincidence that the year the Indian Opinion started pub-
an Amendment in Indian Official Secrets Act of 1889 was
lishing,
brought about by the Government of India. But Gandhiji was not
remotely concerned with that. Though his contemporaries in India
were facing various repressive measures under Press Acts, he was
not, during his entire stay in South Africa, handicapped in
running the paper nor did he publish anything to incur the local
;
Government’s displeasure.
Tolstoy’s letter to Gandhiji — Letter to a Hindoo — was published
in the Indian Opinion It was reproduced in the journal Gujarat
.
Patra of Nadiad, a town in Gujarat. A notice under the Indian

Penal Code was served on the journal by the Government of India.
In the Gujarati edition of the Indian Opinion of April 9, 1910,
Gandhiji mentioned about this and said :
“ ft is not a little sur-
prising, though it does not contain a single sentence which can
promote violence, the person who reproduced it is being prose-
cuted. This betrays sheer madness on the part of the officers. . .
Our only regret is that though ours is the primary responsibility

for publishing this letter, nothing is done to us and it is the editor
of Gujarat who is in danger. We hope that the editor and the
manager of Gujarat will do their duty fearlessly and not retrace a
single step.”
c
Gandhiji also mentioned about the Repressive Laws ’ in India
for * Suppression of writings’ and cautioned; “Indiscriminate
suppression of newspapers by the Government will not ensure
peace. .True, the letter gave a vivid account of the harm
. .
done by the British Rule. That thought cannot be erased by sup-

pressing writings,”
135
Gandhiji was not quite sure what to do under the circumstances.
He said “ Will our readers be intimidated by these developments
:
or will they do their duty ? That is what remains to be seen.”

In the Gujarati edition of the Indian Opinion of April 23, 1919,
6
Gandhiji wrote an article under the caption Journalist’s Duty \
66
He referred to the case against Gujarat Tatra and asked : What
should an editor do when something he has published displeases
the Government or is held to violate some law but is none the
less true ? Should he apologise ? We should say, certainly not.
True, he is not bound to publish such matter, but once it has been
published, the editor ought to accept responsibility for it.”
But he qualifies his statement and says :
“ This raises a very important issue. If the principle we have laid down
is correct, it follows that if any provocative writing has been published
unintentionally and no apology is offered for the same, the newspaper will in
consequence be prevented from rendering other services as well and the
community will go without that benefit. We would not therefore, apply this
principle to matter published unintentionally, but it should apply to what is
published after full deliberation. If a newspaper runs into difficulties for
publishing any such matter, we think the closing down of the newspaper will
be a better service to the public. The argument that in that case one may
have to face the confiscation of all one’s property and be reduced to poverty
has no force. Such a contingency may certainly arise, and it was precisely
for this reason that we said that the editor of a journal devoted to public
service must be ever ready for death.
“ Let us take one or two obvious illustrations. Suppose that in a certain
region there obtains the cruel practice of Kanya-Vikraya. Areformer starts
a newspaper there and writes strongly against this practice. Those who
follow the practice are angry with him and decide to outcaste him if he does
not apologise. We are sure the reformer ought to go on writing against
offering girls in marriage for a price, even if he has to face total ruin or be
outcaste for that, and, when he is left without a single pie, he should close
down the newspaper, he must not apologise, whatever happens. It is only
by such conduct that he can prepare the ground for rooting out the practice.
“ Let us take another illustration. Suppose that Government has com-
mitted a gross injustice and robbed the poor. A progressive newspaper is
being published in such a place. It writes against the oppressive measure and
advises the people to disregard the unjust law of the Government. The
Government takes offence and threatens confiscation of property if no
apology is forthcoming. Should the reformer apologise? We think the
reply is again the same, that he should stand the confiscation of his property
and close down the newspaper but certainly not offer an apology. The
people would then see that, if the reformer could lose his all for their sake,
they should also in their own interest oppose the law. If the reformer should
m
apologise the effect on the people would exactly be the reverse of this. They
would know that the man would not be concerned over much even if their
houses were on fire, that, from a safe distance, he would only indulge in
meaningless declamations. When he himself ran into trouble (they would
say), he meekly retired. And
so they will think of doing likewise and resign
themselves to the inevitable.They will thus argue themselves into greater
weakness. It is, therefore, clear in this instance that the best service that the
reformer can render will be to stop the newspaper.”
Early twentieth century was a period of expansion in the news-
paper world in India. It also saw the emergence of nationalist
press. Slowly but surely, newspapers were being sharply divided
into those which supported the alien Government and those which
advocated its withdrawal. The Indian Official Secrets Act was
first promulgated in 1880 with a view to restricting information
of military importance being published in newspapers. The amend-

ment also placed civil matters, of public interest, at par with
military matters. This was applicable to anybody, who “ without
lawful authority or permission (the proof whereof shall be upon
him) goes to a Government Office, and commits an oifence under
the Act”. 1 Thus the Government was empowered to prosecute
any newspaper it chose. Among others, Shri Gopal Krishna
Gofchale, whom Gandhiji had earlier accepted as his leader, criti-

cized the amendment by saying “ It is dreadful to think of the
:
abuse of authority which is almost certain to result from this

placing of Indian editors, especially the smaller ones among them,
completely at the mercy of those whom they constantly irritate or
displease by their criticism”. And again: “. From the
. . .
standpoint of rulers, no less than that of the ruled, it will be most

unfortunate if Indian papers were thus debarred from writing
about matters which agitate the Indian community most.” 2
Shri Gokhale in his campaign against the Act pointed out the
irony of the fact that while India was governed, of all the colonies,
in the most strong handed manner and where, compared to other
countries, press is weak, the Government tried to further restrict a
weak press in their functioning. To him the press, like the Govern-
ment, was a custodian of public interest. Any attempt to put
1
Margarita Bams : The Indian Press (George Allen and Unwin Ltd., 1940),
p. 318.
* Gopal Krishna Gokhale : Collection of Speeches, (G. A. Natesan & Co.,
Madras, 1916), pp. 214-216,
137
obstacles in its free work will detrimentally affect the interest of the
people. He was also drawing a parallel with the
liberty of the press
enjoyed in England. There, he stated, even if the disclosures were
of the most embarrassing nature to the Government such attempts
would be looked upon as “journalistic enterprise”.*
Shri Gokhale’s comparison with the British Press, though cogent,
was not quite valid considering the coridition in India. In F.n gjan rj
the cry for the liberty of press was given by the pioneers of demo-
cracy, and the middle class which, after the Industrial Revolution,
was coming to power. They regarded monopoly, patronage or
Government interference as obstacles to democracy. Free press
was part of their political programme which also included un-
hindered elections, enlarged franchize and free trade. Free press
was necessary to them to criticize the controlling feudal group in
the Government responsible for mal-ddministration which ham-
pered their policy. These champions could not then foresee that
newspaper running would grow into a profitable business an'd would
be converted into a vehicle for personal or class propaganda, with
an altogether different connotation of liberty.
The Act of 1910 “ to provide for the better control of the press ”
was later passed in India. In outlining the objective it was said
that “ the continued recurrence of murders and outrages has shown
that the measures which have hitherto been taken to deal with
anarchy and sedition require strengthening and that the root source
of the evil has not been touched. Prosecutions have invariably
proved successful, but have produced no permanent improvement
in the tone of the press.” The most objectionable clause in the
Act was that the executive could take recourse to punitive action
at its own will.
Again the champion of the press was Shri Gokhale who declared
that the Indian press had been “ a potent instrument of progress :
it had quickened national conscience ; it had spread in the country
ideas of justice and equality not only between man and man but
also between class and class it has stimulated public spirit, it
;
had set higher standards of public duty.”

But the Government was not quite sure of that. Its repressive
policy against the Press remained unabated. To uphold “the
liberty of the Press and protest against the Press Act of 1910" a
* Ibid., pp. 222-223.
138
largely attended meeting of the citizens of Bombay, under the

Chairmanship of Mr. B. G. Horniman, Editor, Bombay Chronicle,
was convened on June 24, 1916. Gandhiji was invited to speak.
He spoke in Gujarati against the Press Act and read the text of
the resolution which ran as follows :
“That this meeting of loyal and law-abiding Indian subjects of His

Majesty the King-Emperor, believing the existence of a free public Press to
be one of the first essentials of a healthy and progressive State and necessary
to the proper development, political and moral, of civilised peoples; and
further that the extension and maintenance of freedom in all departments of
public life is the surest guarantee of popular progress and contentment and
of mutual trust between the Government and the people, asks that the Press
in the country should enjoy the utmost liberty of expression, subject to the
legal restraints of the ordinary law and of penalties inflicted only after proper
trial and conviction.”
He spoke of the “attack made by die Government against

Mrs. Annie Besant,” Editor, New India , and said “ It is simply
:
a waste of time to hold these meetings and carry these resolutions.

But what else can we do? There is no alternative for us — the
subject people — to do aught but on record our view on a
place
given subject. And, therefore, I have come here in response to
an invitation. I feel that something should be done in this
matter — something done so that our complaint may reach the
ears of the Government.” He agreed that some restraint is
necessarily to be exercised on newspapers. But he was against
“ unwarranted restraint **.
He had, till then, faith in British justice and appealed to the
Government “ to do everything that is just and righteous ; if that
is done, there would be no necessity for these meetings ”, As one
who had edited a newspaper in South Africa, he made a special

request to the Government “on behalf of the newspaper
writers “ Do not harass the respectable editors and proprietors
.... Treat us as generously as you would the English people.” To
the Indian newspapers his advice was “ Say openly whatever
you have to say. That is our duty,” and concluded by saying
that at best the Government could take the bodies of the Editor.
But souls will remain free.
In a Diwali message in November, 1917, to the Gujarati Daily
of Bombay, Hindustan, he said :
“ What is the duty of newspapers when laws like the Seditious Writings
Act and the Defence of India Act are in force? We often find our papers
139
guilty of equivocation. Some have method into a science.
preferred this
But, in my opinion, this harms the country.
People become weak and
equivocation becomes a habit with them. This changes the form of
language: instead of being a medium for the expression of one's thoughts, it
becomes a mask for concealing them. I am convinced that this is not the
way to develop strength in the people. The people, both collectively and
individually, must cultivate the habit of speaking only what is in their minds.
Newspapers are a good means of such education, for those who would evade
these laws had better not bring out a paper at all ; the other course is to
ignore the laws in question and state one’s real views fearlessly but respect-
fully and bear the consequences. Mr Justice Stephen has said somewhere
that a man who has no reason can speak no reason. If it is
in his heart
there in the heart, one should speak it out.one does not have the courage
If
for this, one should stop publishing a newspaper. This is in the best
interests of all. v
During the war, 1914-1918, Indian press suffered heavily at
Government hands. In its memorandum, the Press Association
of India, which was formed in 1915 to protect the interests of the
Press, pointed out that “ up to 1917 twenty-two newspapers had
been called on to furnish security and 18 of them had shut down
rather than function under official tutelage. Between 1917 and
1919, some 963 newspapers and printing presses which had existed
before the Press Act of 1910, had been proceeded against under
the Act —
in all 286 cases of warning which stifled the victims, and
705 cases of demand of heavy security and forfeitures by executive
orders. There were 173 new printing presses too and 129 new
newspapers that were killed at birth by security demands, and
many more were deterred from coming into being by the very
presence of the Act. The Association observed that the Goverfi-
ment collected nearly Rs. 500,000 during the first five years of the
Act by securities and forfeitures, and that later there were more
accelerated receipts it was also stated that over 500 publications
;
were proscribed under the Act.” 4

After the war discontent was rampant in India. Farmers were
not getting price for their agricultural produce. Industries, ex-
panded during the war, had to shrink resulting in unemployment.
There were strikes by the labourers. Muslims were unhappy about
the treatment given to the Caliph of Turkey. Those, and Gandhiji
who came to India in 1915 was one of them, who relied on British
4
Bombay, 1962), p. 172.
140
justice and helped the war efforts, were disillusioned. The extremists
in the Congress wanted some sort of action against the Government.
While conducting the Indian Opinion Gandhiji had not any ,
occasion to discuss, participate or uphold freedom of expression

or liberty of the press in South Africa. There was no restriction on
his paper. But in India the situation was different. Here the free-
dom of expression and the liberty of the press were being suppressed
by Government action. Gandhiji had not yet associated himself
directly with the Navajiv.an and the Young India As editor, he .
had not yet faced, as others did, the direct assault of censorship
and other associated evils. Nationalist leaders who had their own
papers to express views were, on the other hand, debarred from
freely commenting on political matters. They felt aggrieved but
were helpless before the might of the British Government. Shri
Gokhale, the champion of the liberty of press, died in 1915. Who
was to stand up against various Government gagging orders ?
Thus from political exigency Gandhiji emerged as the champion
freedom of expression and for the liberty of the press. The
for the
moment the Rowlatt Committee’s recommendations came to be
known, Gandhiji drafted a pledge which was signed by many
important people. It said :
“ Being conscientiously of opinion that the Bills known as the Indian Crimi-
nal Law (Amendment) Bill No. I of 1919, and Criminal Law (Emergency
Power) Bill No. II of 1919 are unjust, subversive of the principles of liberty and
justice and destruction of elementary rights of individuals on which the safety
of the community as a whole and the State itself is based, we solemnly affirm
that in the event of these Bills becoming law and until they are withdrawn, we
shall refuse civilly to obey these laws and such other laws as a committee, to
be hereafter appointed, may think fit, and we further affirm that in this struggle,
we will faithfully follow truth and refrain from violence to life, person or pro-
perty.”
it was agreed that

4
The Satyagraha ’ pledge was signed and
private literature should be sold openly and that the registration
of newspapers could be civilly disobeyed. In the list of the pro-
hibited literature were Gandhiji’s ‘Hind Swaraj’ and
*
Sarvodaya \ These were sold openly and in defiance of the law.
“ Gandhiji and Mrs. Naidu went out in cars to sell the books. All the copies
were soon sold out. People willingly paid more than the published price of the
book which was four annas. As high as Rs. 50 were paid to Gandhi for one
copy. The intending purchasers were told that they were liable to be arrested
and imprisoned for possessing the proscribed literature. But they had shed
141
all fear of jail-going. The proceeds of the sale were utilised for furthering the
civil disobedience campaign.” 5
Mention has been made about the unregistered weekly the —
Satyagraha —
edited by Gandhiji. This was again in defiance
of the law which required registration of newspapers. In the first
issue, dated April 7, 1919, he wrote editorially “ .... A :
‘
Satyagrahi ’ for whom punishments provided by law have lost
all terror can give only in an unregistered newspaper his thoughts
and opinion unhampered by any other consideration than that of

his own
conscience. His newspaper, therefore, if otherwise well
edited, can become a most powerful vehicle for transmitting pure
6
ideas in a concise manner.” The Government might confiscate
all such newspapers. Gandhiji advised workers to copy out extracts
for readers.
The Navajivan and the Young India first made their appearance,
under Gandhiji’s control, on October 7 and October 8, 1919,
respectively. In the first issue of the Young India Gandhiji Wrote
a front page article under the heading ‘No Security’, wherein
he informed readers that though the Young India could escape
security the Navajivan had to pay Rs. 500. But he was not happy
to publish the papers in the abnormal situation at a time when the—
objectionable “ features o'f the Press Act continue to disfigure it ”.
He wanted fearless editors. He wanted to keep up their morale
at a time when Government was waging, so to say, a war against
them. Simultaneously with the suggestion for a defiant attitude,
he was giving the press constructive ideas. He advised :
“ We must devise methods of circulating our ideas unless and until the whole
Press becomes fearless, defies consequences and publishes ideas, even when it
is in disagreement with them, just for the purpose of securing that freedom.
An an original idea or an effective prescription for India's ills can
editor with
easily write them out, a hundred hands can copy them, many more can read
them out to thousands of listeners. I do hope, therefore, that Non-cooperation
editors, at any rate, will not refrain from expressing their thoughts for fear of
the Press Act. They should regard it as sinful to keep their thoughts secret
a waste of energy to conduct a newspaper that cramps their thoughts. It is
negation of one’s calling for an editor to have to suppress his best thoughts.”’
* D. G. Tendulkar : Mahatma (V. K. Jhaveri and D. G. Tendulkar,

Bombay, 1951), Vol. I, p. 302.
* The Satyagraha (Bombay, April 7, 1919).
’ S. Natarajan A History of the Press in India (Asia Publishing House,
:
Bombay, 1962), p. 195.
142
4
Speaking about the Khilafat ’ agitation later on, he narrated
the story of one of his friends asking him whether his speeches
could not come under the sedition section of the Indian Penal
Code. Gandhiji said that it would be difficult for him to plead not
guilty if he was charged under it. He further elaborated by saying
that his speeches were of such a nature so that people “ might
consider it a shame to assist or cooperate with the Government
that had forfeited all title to confidence, respect or support His
stand was that when the Government forfeited its claim to rule,
it was but right for the people to express their feelings openly.
This would bring the rulers to senses so that they could behave
according to civilized rules.
In the Young India of January 12, 1922 he wrote on the liberty
of the press :
“ Liberty of speech means that it is unassailed even when the speech hrnts ;
liberty of the press can be said to be truly respected only when the press can
comment in the severest terms upon and even misrepresent matters broken ;
against misrepresentation or violence being secured not by an administrative

gagging order, not by closing down the press but by punishing the real offender,
leaving the press itself unrestricted. Freedom of association is truly respected
when assemblies of people can discuss even revolutionary projects, the state
relying upon the force of public opinion and the civil policy, not the savage
military at its disposal, to crush any actual outbreak of revolution that is
designed to confound public opinion and the state representing it."
In his letter to the Viceroy, written from Bardoli on February 1,
1922, Gandhiji wrote :
“ . nor again can the administrative interference with the liberty of the
. .
Press under a Law that is under promise of repeal be regarded as anything but
repression. The immediate task before the country, therefore, is to rescue from
paralysis freedom of speech, freedom of association, and freedom of Press. . *
I would further urge you to free the Press from all administrative control and
restore all the fines and forfeitures recently imposed. In thus urging, I am
asking Your Excellency to do what is today being done in every country which
8
is deemed to be under civilised government."
Gandhiji was charged for writing seditious article and gaoled.

Soon was released
after he but there was no peace in the
;
country. In 1929 Labour Party formed Government in England.

Gandhiji, the same year, started the Civil Disobedience movement
by launching his famous march to Daridi, from Ahmedabad, to
break the Salt Laws.
* B. Pattabhi Sitaramayya : The History of the Indian National Congress
(Padma Publications, Bombay, 1946), Vol, I, pp. 233-234.
143
There was excitement throughout the country and the Govern-
ment enacted the Indian Press Ordinance of 1930, aimed at con-
trolling the press. Magistrates were given power to ask for securi-
ties from printing presses. The magistrate could also demand
securities from publishers of papers. Such securities could any
moment be forfeited.
In 1931, the Indian Press (Emergency Powers) Act was passed.
The magistrates were empowered to ask for security along with the
declaration under the Press aud Registration of Books Act of 1867.
The same could be done in case of publishers. It also empowered
the magistrates to issue search warrant for property where copies
of newspapers and books were suspected to be stored.
Under the relentless sweep of the Press Ordinance a toll of
Rs. 2,40,000 from 131 newspapers during the first six months of
the Civil Disobedience movement was exacted. The maximum
demanded from a single newspaper was Rs. 30,000. About 450
newspapers failed to deposit the security. In 1936, action was
taken against 72 newspapers and a total security of over a lakh
was demanded. Only 15 did fuirnish it. 9
Congress came to power, for the first time, in 1937, after elections
were held under the Act of 1935. People started interpreting civil
liberty very liberally. To many people it was a licence to do any-
thing as one pleased. Gandhiji once asked them to defy law.
Now, under changed circumstances, he wanted them to realize the
meaning of civil liberty. He focused on the subject of respon-
sibility which civil liberty presupposes. He wrote in the Harijan
of October 23, 1937 :
“ Civil liberty is not criminal liberty. When law and order are under popular
control, the ministers in charge of the department cannot hold the portfolio for
a day, if ... In seven provinces, the Congress
they act against the popular will.
rules. Itseems to be assumed by some persons that in these provinces at least,
individuals can say and do what they like. But so far as I know the Congress
mind, it will not tolerate any such licence. Civil liberty means the fullest liberty
to say and to do what one likes within the ordinary law of the land. The word
1
‘
ordinary has been purposely used here. The Penal Code and the Criminal
Procedure Code, not to speak of the Special Powers Legislation, contain provi-
sions which the foreign rulers have enacted for their own safety. These provi-
sions can be easily identified, and must be ruled out of operation. The real
test, however, is the interpretation by the Working Committee of the power
of the ministers of law and order. Subject, therefore, to the general instruc-
Ibid., Vol. II, p. 3.
144
tions laid down by Working Committee for the guidance of Congress

the
ministers, the statutorypowers limited in the manner indicated by me, must be
exercised by the ministers against those who, in the name of civil liberty, preach
lawlessness in the popular sense of the term.’*
His attitude on the question of liberty of expression and press

was again stiffened when India, without her consent, was dragged
to join the Second World War. The All-India Congress Committee,
under his guidance, accepted a few resolutions on the subject. In
a statement issued on August 13, 1940, Gandhiji said : “The
All-India Congress Committee cannot submit to a policy which
is a denial of India’s national right to freedom, which suppresses
the free expression of the public opinion and which would lead to
the degradation of her people and to her continued enslavement.”
Gandhiji himself explained the resolution and concluded by saying :
“ Freedom of speech and pen is the foundation of Sawaraj. If the

foundation stone is in danger, you have to exert the whole of your
might in order to defend that single stone.” 10
5
Before the ‘ Quit India movement, in 1942, Gandhiji was
preparing his fellow journalists for the coming struggle. He asked
them to preserve the sacred liberty of the press at any cost. Said
he :
“ The Press should discharge its obligations and duties freely
and fearlessly and not allow itself to be cowed down or bribed by
Government. Let the Press be ready to be closed down rather
than allow itself to be misused by the authorities and then be ;
prepared to sacrifice their buildings, machinery and big establish-

ment.”
The Press in India did not compromise where self-respect was
involved. And it had to pay dearly to preserve its liberty. Accord-
ing to All-India Editors’ Conference, in August 1942 alone, 96
journals were either suspended or suppressed. So that Gandhiji
could say :
“lam proud of the way the Indian Press as a whole has reacted to the Congress
resolutions. The acid test has yet to come. I hope the Press will then fearlessly
represent the national cause. It is better not to issue newspapers than to issue
them under a feeling of suppression. At the same time, I do not want them to
be blind followers of Congress and to endorse what their reason or conscience
rebels against. The national cause will never suffer by honest criticism of
national institutions and national policies/'
10
D. G. Tendulkar : Mahatma (V. K. Jhaveri and D. G. Tendulkar,
Bombay, 1952), Vol. V, p. 406.
145
G— 10
While explaining the ‘Quit India’ resolution on August

8,
1942, he made a special appeal to the journalists :
“A word to the you on the support you have

journalists. I congratulate
hitherto given to the nationaldemand. I know the restrictions and handicaps
under which you have to labour. But I would now ask you to snap the chains
that bind you. It should be the proud privilege of the newspapers to lead
and
set an example in laying one’s own life for freedom. You have the pen
which
the Government cannot suppress."
The man who relied so heavily on the Press, demanded so much
from them and, in response, got so much, was, as we had seen,
advocating banning of newspapers at the fag-end of his life.
Before the transfer of power, there were communal tensions
leading to, in some cases, mass killings. As in the ’twenties and
’thirties,he appealed to the press to publish such news very very
carefully. He asked them to verify before printing any such item.
He even demanded from Prime Minister Nehru, after transfer
of power, publication of correct information and criticized for his
‘hush hush’ policy. But papers, by and large, let him down.
His was the lone sane voice amidst mass frenzy and hysteria.
There were also political kite-flying by the press creating only
misunderstanding. Should they give correct news or their assump-
tion to the readers, he asked ?
Free India’s first Government under the leadership of Shri
Jawaharlal Nehru, tried to strike a compromise between the concept
of the liberty of press and its responsibility in a democratic set-up.
India adopted the Constitution in 1950 which, among other
things, gave people, under Article 19 the freedom of speech. It
said : “All citizens shall have the right —
(a) to freedom of
speech and expression.” It was interpreted to have included the
freedom of the press as well.
The Press Commission elaborated the point and said :
“ This freedom is stated in wide terms and includes
not only freedom of
speech which manifests itself by oral utterance, but freedom of expression,
whether such expression is communicated by written word or printed matter!
Thus, freedom of the Press, particularly of newspapers and periodicals, is a
species of which the freedom of expression is a genus. There can, therefore,
be no doubt that freedom of the Press is included in the fundamental right
of the freedom of expression guaranteed to the citizens under Article 19 (a)
(1)
of the Constitution." 11
11
India Government : Report of the Press Commission (Manager of Publi-
cations, Delhi, 1954), Part I, p. 357.
146
The Constitution adopted was democratic in character. It gave

all adults the right to vote. That entailed responsibility not only
to the Government, but to the press as well. Press, as is acknow-
ledged, ought to play a very responsible part in the democratic
country. It should educate the public — and was Gandhiji’s this
dream all along — about the happenings in the country and abroad
— an'd their possible impact on the political, social and economic
life in the country.
The Press Commission further said :
“In their memorandum to us, the All-India Newspaper Editors* Confe-

rence have said that journalism should strive to inform the people of current
events and trends of opinion, to create and sustain an ever widening range of
interest and to encourage discussion of current problems with due regard
to all points of view, all of which involves accurate and impartial presentation
of news and views and dispassionate evaluation of conflicting ideals. The Indian
Federation of Worldng Journalists have emphasized the need for constant and
conscious striving to distinguish between fact and comment, to present objec-
tively and fully * all the news that is fit to print/ to give impartially news of
interest to all sections of the community, to maintain high standards of public
tasteand national culture, to support and promote public causes and to foster
a due sense of the rights and responsibilities of citizenship.** 12
The Commission discussed in detail the various implications of

the freedom of expression and liberty of press vis-a-vis the demo-
cratic society. It said :
“ Democratic society lives and grows by accepting ideas, by experimenting

with them, and where necessary, rejecting them. It is necessary, therefore, that
as many its members hold are freely put before

as possible of these ideas which
the public. We
would, however, emphasise that the right of free expression is
derived from the responsibility for the common good. Acceptance of that
responsibility is the only basis for this right which has been accepted as fun-
damental. Freedom of the Press does not mean freedom from responsibility
for its exercise. Democratic freedom in India, and the freedom of the Press,
can have meaning only if this background is properly understood. In any
modem democratic society, freedom of the Press from political restrictions is
as vital as before, and it is generally taken for granted. But there are other
pressures, which we have discussed elsewhere, which have become more res-
trictive and inhibitxve than political pressure, and which have also to be fought
with vigilance and courage. We would emphasise further that the right of free
expression is essentially as an appeal to reason, and its accent should, there-
fore, be tolerant and friendly. One cannot in the name of free speech give vent
to malice or prejudice/'
12
Ibid., p. 339.
14 ?
But papers were, as Gandhiji saw in 1547, or earlier in the

giving vent to such malice and prejudices. They were
’thirties,
publishing exaggerated news of communal disturbances without

verifying them. That also increased tension leading to mob-
violence. When his appeal to the press fell into deaf ears, he
solicited the influence of the reading public not to patronize these
papers. He earlier approached the editors “to see that false
was not published in their
report or report likely to excite the public
13
newspapers.” But these requests were of no avail. In des-
peration he said “ The kind of stuff that was read
:
out to him
(from press) should never be allowed to be published. Such news-
papers should be banned.” 14
As a journalist how could he recommend the banning of papers ?
He had very definite views about freedom of Press which was, as
we saw earlier, so dear to his heart. He was all for press liberty,
excepting the liberty tocommit a crime. Service and not irrespon-
sibility,he expected, should be the motive behind papers. Mis-
chievous papers, if these did disservice to the community and the
country, should be banned. He had no compromise on that issue.
It was no infringement of the liberty of Press. “ It is my certain
conviction that no man loses his freedom except through his own
weakness,” he said.
He was also criticizing those papers which were indulging in
political kite-flying. They were publishing scoops giving so-called
inside information of the impending political changes. Such
unconfirmed reports, according to Gandhiji, created unneces-
sary misunderstanding with detrimental results. On May 3, 1947
at the prayer meeting, he criticized a newspaper report. The
occasion was attempted disclosure in a leading newspaper in
Delhi the decision of the Viceroy and the Congress Working
Committee. He thought that to act in such a fashion was nothing
but lowering the standard of journalism. The tendency of the
up the bits from here and there and dish them up
journalists to pick
for the purpose of creating sensation was, according to him, back
door journalism. That misled the public and harmed the cause.
Calling them bad examples of foreign journalists, he requested the
la
M. K. Gandhi : Delhi Diary (Navajivan Publishing House, Ahmedabad.
1948), p. 73.
14
Ibid., pp. 104-105.
148
Indian counterparts to desist from such cheap performance.

15
Gandhiji did not believe in any imposition from outside to curb

thisfreedom from responsibility. But the Government of India,
soon after the adoption of the Constitution, when freedom of
expression was declared a Constitutional right, became involved
in a number of problems leading to an amendment of the Constitu-
tion qualifying Article 19.
Government had to take certain action against some newspapers.
But the High Courts and the Supreme Court overruled the action
of the Government on the ground that they were ultra vires of
Article 19(2) of the Constitution as it laid down that “ nothing
in sub-clause (a) of clause 1 of the Article (which guaranteed the
right of freedom of speech and expression to all citizens) shall affect
the operation of any existing law in so far as it related to or present
the state from making any law relating to libel, slander, defamation,
contempt of court or any matter which offends against decency or
morality or which undermines the security of, or tends to over-
throw, the State.”
In the amendment introduced by the Government, it was said :
“ (iii) of Article 19 and validation of certain laws : (1) in

Amendment
Article 19 of the Constitution (A) for clause (2), the following clause shaU be
substituted, and the said clause shall be deemed to have been originally enacted
in the following form, namely : (2) Nothing in sub-clause (a) of clause (1)
of any existing law in so far as it imposes, or prevent
shall affect the operation
the State from making any law imposing, in the interests of the security of the
State, friendly relations with foreign States, public order, decency or morality,
restrictions on the exercise of the right conferred by the said sub-clause,
and
in particular, nothing in the said sub-clause shall affect the operation of any
existing law in so far as it imposes related to, or prevent the State from making
any law relating to, contempt of court, defamation or incitement to an offence.
“ No law in force in the territory of India immediately before the com-
mencement of the Constitution, which is consistent with the provisions of
Article 19 of the Constitution, as amended by sub-section (1) of this section,
shall be deemed to be void, or ever to have become void, on the ground only
that, being a law which takes away or abridges the right conferred by sub-clause
(a) of clause (1) of the said Article, its operation was not saved by sub-clause
(2) of that Article as originally enacted, and notwithstanding any judgment,

decree or order of any court or tribunal to the contrary, every such law shall
continue in force until altered or repealed by a competent legislature or other
competent authority/'
16
D. G. Tendulkar Mahatma (V. K.
: Jhaveri and D. G. Tendulkar, Bombay,
1953), Yol. VII, p. 457,
149
The Select Committee amended it by putting :
“ 3. Amendment of Article 19 of the Constitution and validation of certain

laws
(1) in Article 19 of the Constitution :
For clause (2), the following clause shall be substituted and the said clause
(a)
shall be deemed always to have been enacted in the following form, namely :
(2) Nothing in sub-clause (a) of clause (1) shall affect the operation of any
existing law, or prevent the State from making any law, in so far as such law
imposes reasonable restrictions on the exercise of the right conferred by the
said sub-clause in the interests of the security of the State, friendly relations
with foreign States, public order, decency or morality, including, in particular,
any existing or other law relating to contempt of court defamation or inratwm<»l1 t
to an offence."
All-India Newspapers Editors’ Conference characterized the
amendment ‘unwarranted and uncalled for.’ They called it
as
‘
a threat to freedom of expression,’ and declared “ Freedom :
of expression is our birthright and we shall not rest until it is fully

guaranteed by the Constitution.” The Indian Federation of
Working Journalists also made similar protest.
In the same year the Press (Objectionable Matters) Act became
a law which “ made all actions by Government against the press
subject to judicial sanction.”
Government also agreed to create a Press Commission which was
subsequently formed with, among others, representatives of All-
India Newspapers Editors’ Conference, [Indian Federation of
Working Journalists and Indian Languages Newspapers Associa-
tion, to investigate the entire field of journalism.
The amendment, as mentioned, qualified freedom of expression.
No doubt the liberty of the press should be harmonious with
individual’s or group’s duty to the community. But that implied
some restrictions. M. Lopez
report to United Nations
in his
cautioned by saying that “ concept of freedom with responsibility
can be pushed to a point where the emphasis on responsibility
becomes in effect the negation of freedom itself. It should be the
common concern of developed and undeveloped countries alike to
seek a cure for the disease without killing the patient. The doctrine
of absolute freedom of information has its dangers ; but they may
be no more formidable than those which could arise from the
irresponsible use of the concept of responsibility.”
The American Press Commission was more emphatic. In the
book A Free and Responsible Press it pointed oqt
150
“ Freedom of the Press is essential to political liberty. Where men cannot
freely convey their thoughts to one another, no freedom is secure. Where free*
dom of expression exists, the beginnings of a free society and a means for every
retention of liberty are already present. Free expression is therefore unique
•
among liberties.
The right to freedom of expression is an expression of confidence in the
ability of free men

to learn the truth through the unhampered interplay of
competing ideas. Where the right is generally exercised, the public benefits
from the selective process of winnowing truth from falsehood, desirable ideas
from evil ones. If the people are to govern themselves, their only hope of doing
wisdom derived from the fullest possible infor-
so wisely lies in the collective
mation, and in the fair presentation of differing opinions. The right is also
necessary to permit each man to find his way to the religious and political beliefs
which suit his private needs.”
More dangerous than the Government restrictions, there is the
tendency now of baneful effect of other subtle but more vicious
control of which Gandhiji could not much foresee. It was the
emergence of big industrialists as newspaper proprietors. They
6 5
controlled a number of papers and formed chain which would
give people news and views designed to suit their own class or group
interest, quite contrary to the Press Commission’s concept when
it said :
“ Just as the public have a vital interest in the purity of their water supply
so have they an equally vital interest in the accurate presentation of news and
fair presentation of views. In other words the news and views which newspapers
purvey carry with them a vital public interest.”
The Link magazine, in its issue of September 2, 1962, gave a
detailed account of the rising vested interest in the free flow of news
and views and said :
“Alistair Hetherington, editor of the Manchester Guardian , interviewed

by a group of Asian students over the BBC television system early last year,
pointed out that in Britain the big newspaper proprietors are mainly concerned
‘
with newspapers and not with other things. Lord Rothermere, Lord Beaver-
brook, Cecil King, Roy Thompson—these people are primarily in the news-
paper business. They are not making soap. They are not selling soap. They
are not making steel, or bananas, or whatever else it may be \
He contrasted this with the situation in India :
“ the ownership of newspapers often

‘I well realise that in India. . . is
much more concealed and that newspapers are frequently run as andllaries to
another business or part of a large trading empire. It may be that the news-
paper will be used—it sometimes has been the case—to forward the interest of
the particular empire. It can lead to a measure of political corruption
This tendency in newspapers in India has indeed a danger in that

news and views are handled to suit the big industrialists whose
business policies are not always to help common people. They are
utilizingnewspapers to bring in pressure on the Government so
that they toe their line. They know very well the power of the
press which had formed public opinion in the country for years.
Hence they purchased a number of them. To quote the Link
magazine again :
“ ... In buying up newspapers the founders of Jute Press were in fact

investing not so much in a source of direct profit as in a weapon with which
the State could be made to protect and defend the profit motive. . . .
46
By the time the Press Commission submitted its report, the exploitation of
the press by the most powerful section of the Indian Industrialists had become
an established fact in Indian public life. The Press Commission said, for
example :
*
We
have seen instructions given to the editor in the name of the
him to give special prominence to an interview on a subject
proprietor, directing
of economic controversy and another which calls for full publicity to state-
ments issued by the president of the Sugar Merchants' Association.'
The Commission also mentioned a directive ‘issued to every
5
member of the editorial staff and referring to the criticism that the
proprietor had chance to make regarding the news and articles
published on princes. He (the proprietor) says, “however
strongly onemay dislike the princes, it is a hard fact that the rights
of princes are popular in Rajasthan like anything. All friends
should keep these things in view.”
Shri Jawaharlal Nehru, speaking at the seminar, on February
*
17, 1963 on the subject, The Prospect for the Indian Press,
1963-73,’ sponsored by the Press Institute of India, asked people
to be cautious about the news and views dished out by the
monopoly press. He said :
“ Freedom of the press usually means non-interference by Government.

There is such a thing as interference by private interests, by limited private
interests, by the individual or the group that owns the Press. I am unable to
understand how a small group represents the freedom of the press although
he may not be interfered with by Government or anything. But surely the power
of money itself is a very important element which interfered with the freedom
and so many other things .... If one person owns all the major news-
papers, well, naturally he will see to it that his views are expressed and contrary
views are not expressed in a way that he dislikes. The man may be a good
— —
man since there is no question of an individual but it is obvious that free-
dom of the press cannot easily subsist where there is monopoly. Where there
are chain newspapers, the same thing appears everywhere and gives the impres-
sion that large numbers of people, intelligent people, hold a certain opinion,
while it may be the opinion of just the individual who writes, who does not
represent anybody but himself. He may influence others, certainly, but it is a
152
misleading phenomena brought about by concentration of money." 16

Reaction of the chain papers to this speech of the Prime Minister
was as expected. In the leading editorial of February 19, 1963
— What is a Free Press
‘ —
The Indian Express wrote
’
:
“ The bogey of monopoly of the capitalism and of the menace of the private
sector is a favourite war-cry to conceal the ineptitude and bungling of a great
part of the public sector whose loss of public moneys would by now have created
an outcry, if not an uproar, among the shareholders of any private company.
But the public sector continues unabashed in its own sheltered inefficiency. Is
the official protective umbrellanow to be extended to the public sector of the
Indian Press, represented by the anti-monopolist, anti-capitalist and anti-public
sector patriots of the Communist press which we notice is spreading its tenta-
clesbeneath the benign gaze of the Government. If the much maligned private
sector press is tobe chastised day in and day out by the Government we seem
to be on the threshold of a regimented press required to say and do as an
omnipotent Government, using its emergency powers and decrees. This might
be a press in the Government's image. It would not be a free press."
The Hindustan Times; in its leader of the same day — c
A Free
Press’ — explained the circumstances leading to the growth of
newspaper monopoly. It said :
“ Not unexpectedly, Mr. Nehru used the opportunity to speak to an audience

of journalists on Sunday to dwell on the threats to the freedom of the Press
that are inherent in the manner tne Press is organised in this country. Mr. Nehru
deplored the fact that the big newspapers were controlled by industrial interests
and he referred to the stranglehold of the power of money on the dissemination
of news and the expression of views. A
great deal of thought has been given
to the countering of these dangers by, among other, the Press Commission.
But one difficulty that anyone who has given any consideration to the subject
has come up against is that the resources required to run a good modem news-
paper are of a scale which have made newspapers themselves very big business.
This cannot be changed. Quite apart from this, it may be pertinent to remind
ourselves that newspapers were acquired by big industrial interests at a time
when the Press was a business hazard. What those who had started newspapers
in the days of the national struggle were looking for were rich men to pay the
losses. Times have changed for the newspaper industry and, by the
certainly
may now be said to have entered
standards of those early years of struggle, they
a period of prosperity. But we may doubt that the prosperity is such as to
attract public investment interest for new newspaper ventures.”
In conclusion it said :
“ On must also be acknowledged that those who control big

the whole, it
newspapers have not used them for anti-social ends though the outcry against
' has been made a fashionable one by a certain type of politician.
* monopoly
But the dangers mentioned by Mr. Nehru are very real ones and it would be
16
Press Release (Press Information Bureau, Government of India, New
Delhi, February 17, 1963).
153
freedom of the Press to the continued good

folly to entrust such vital issues as
sense and enlightenment of the newspaper magnates. If a change in newspaper
ownership in today's conditions is not practical, new thinking could more
usefully turn to other methods of achieving the results mentioned by Mr.
Nehru. In Great Britain, for instance, the separation of ownership and respon-
sibility for editorial conduct has been adopted successfully in several news-
papers. There is no reason why the pattern cannot be followed here by creating
trusts charged with the special function of keeping an eye on editorial policy
and insulating the editor and the editorial staff from the influence of the pro-
prietors."
The colossus of newspaper trade, in this context, was nicely put
in by Mr. Kingsley Martin. He said :
“ Before Lord Northcliffe died, the owner of some seventy papers of various
types,he declared that no one could in future start a daily paper with less than
£2,000,000 capital. In 1947 the figure would be much higher, even if supplies
of newsprint could be obtained. Thus the freedom of the press, still immensely
important in the sense of the freedom freely to inform, comment and criticise,
has become, in the sense of the right to start and run a daily newspaper, as
meaningless as the slum-dweller's legal freedom to live in the Ritz or to spend
his unemployment pay in touring the Riviera in a Rolls-Royce. The position
is much worse now." 17
Considering all these obstacles in a country when democracy is
in its infancy, the Press Commission, while dealing with the subject
of liberty of press suggested some course which is worth reproducing
in details 18
“ The tender plant of democracy can flourish only in an atmosphere where
there is a free interchange of views and ideas which one not only has a moral
right, but a moral duty, to express. As Mahatma Gandhi has stated in words
which have been inscribed in the portals of All India Radio at Delhi, I do not ‘
want my house to be walled in on all sides and my windows to be stuffed. I

want the culture of all lands to be blown about my house as freely as possible.
But I refuse to be blown off my feet by any of them. Mine is not a religion of
the prison house. It has room for the least among God's creation. But it is
proof against insolence, pride of race, religion or colour/
*
4
Democracy can thrive not only under the vigilant eye of its legislature,
but also under the care and guidance of public opinion, and the Press is, par
excellence, the vehicle through which opinion can become articulate. Its role
consists not only in reflecting public opinion, but in instructing it and giving it
proper orientation and guidance. For this, the Press has not only a moral right
to free expression, but is subject to certain responsibilities also. *
In the absence
of accepted moral duties, there can be no moral rights. From the moral point
X7
Kingsley Martin : The Press the Public Wants CThe Hogarth Press, London,
1947), p. 32.
18
cations, Delhi, 1954), Part I, pp. 359-350.
154
of view, freedom of expression does not include the right to lie as a deliberate
instrument of policy. The moral right does not cover the right to be deliberately
or irresponsibly in error.’ But the terrain of moral restrictions is not always
co-e?xtensive with the legal restrictions which may be imposed upon the right.
Upto a point the restrictions must come from within. The legal protection may
continue to remain even though the moral right to it has been forfeited. To
quote again from the American Commission’s Report, ‘ Many a lying venal,
and scoundrelly public expression must continue to find shelter under a ‘ Free-
dom of the Press ' built for widely different purposes, for to impair the legal
right even when the moral right is gone may easily be a cure worse than the
disease. Each definition of an abuse invites abuse of definition. If the courts
had to determine the inner corruptions of personal intention, honest and neces-
sary criticism would proceed under an added peril. Though the presumption is
against resort to legal action to curb abuses of the Press, there are limits to legal
toleration.’ Within the limits of this legal tolerance, the control over the Press
must be subjective or professional. The ethical sense of the individual, the
consciousness that abuse of freedom of expression, though not legally puni-
shable, must tarnish the fair name of the Press and the censure of fellow jour-
nalists, should all operate as powerful factors towards the maintenance of the
freedom even without any legal restrictions being placed on that freedom.”
By suggesting this, the Commission, more or less, voiced the
feelings of Gandhiji who did not believe in Government measures
to protect the liberty of press. Besides suggesting control of pen
while writing for papers, he gave, long back, a solution to check
irresponsibility. He said :
“The real remedy is healthy public opinion that will refuse to patronise
poisonous journals. We have our journalists’ association. Why should it not
create a department whose business it would be to study the various journals
and find objectionable articles and bring them to the notice of the respective
editors ? The function of the department will be confined to the establishment
of contact with the offending journals and public criticism of offending articles
where the contact fails to bring about the desired reform. Freedom of the
press is a precious privilege that no country can forego.”
But are the journalists listening ?
15?
In Retrospect and Prospect
Gandhiji breathed his last on January 30, 1948. On March 29,

1949, the Harijan which Gandhiji had been editing for a long time
,
issued the following :
“All work in whatsoever sphere, was a means primarily of service in Gandhiji's

eyes. Newspapers and journals can build up a fitting memorial to him in this
matter by conforming or trying to conform to the unimpeachable standards
of journalism practised by our revered and beloved leader.”
Since 1903, Gandhiji, through his journals the Indian Opinion ,
the Young India , the Navajivan and the Harijan , not only did pro-
pagate his views, but, in the process, laid down a standard for
journalists to emulate. While running the papers, his idea was to
educate the people so that they could understand not only the
significance of independence —
political, economic and social —
but also participate actively in freeing humanity from the bondage
it was in. His motto, as a journalist, was service. He declared
<c
earlier : One of the objects of a newspaper is to understand the
popular feeling and give expression to it ; another is to arouse
among the people certain desirable sentiments and the third is
1
fearlessly to expose popular defects/
All through his life Gandhiji tried to uphold these tenets of faith.
He did not take a short-term view on anything. He would not care
for quick or spectacular success. His was a steady and sure process
with a clear-cut objective. To him means were as important as
ends. Moreover, truth with him was God. He could not barter
away truth for anything.
The Press Commission also felt the absolute necessity of truthful
and objective presentation of news and views and said :
“ The need for truthful, objective and comprehensive presentation of news

from all comers of the world was never more urgent. Hundreds of millions
156
of our people have been enfranchised. A

large number of them may yet be
illiterate. But they have also shown considerable shrewdness and understanding
of political events. The man behind the plough is eager to understand the
world community of which he has become a part. He wants to know all that
is happening around him, and he reads the newspapers eagerly or listens to it
being read out. The future of the country depends on him, and it is his choice
that is going to decide questions of peace or war. He wants facts, but also
expects his newspaper to give him the truth about the facts.” 1
Mr. Henry Polak, as mentioned earlier, recalled stories when
Gandhiji would insist on high standard of responsibility while
editing the Indian Opinion. The Times, London, was his model in
those days. Like the famous John Thaddous Delane, editor of
The Times, Gandhiji could say The duty of the journalists
: .
is the same as that of the historian —

to seek out the truth, above
all things, and to present to his readers not such things as state-
craft would wish them to know but the truth as near as he can
attain it.”
With Mr. Henry Polak he was insistent that objectivity must be
maintained —
‘Keep your standards right.’ To his son Shri
Manilal, in South Africa, Gandhiji wrote : “ You should write
what is the truth in the Indian Opinion. If you err do not hesitate
to confess it.”
And again in 1919, he reiterated in the unauthorized paper the
Satyagraha :
“ There can be no room for untruth in my writings.”
Gandhiji will correct any mistakes found in his writings.
Instances of these have been given earlier. He had his own concept
of newspaper running which was not only unconventional, but
diametrically opposite to the usual norm. Gandhiji did not like
the idea of building up the sales of his paper on the theory of what
‘
the readers want.’ He would never, for that, publish sensational

stories with breath-taking headlines.
He believed that the readers should support the paper for whom
it was published. If they did not want it, Gandhiji would not run
it on advertisement or adopt any and every means to promote
sales. He would never be a party to exploit the base elements in
human beings. He believed in the nobler traits in them and would
feed his eternal craving —
the quest for truth.
He tried, as we saw, to understand peoples’ feelings and give
1 India Government : Report of the Press Commission (Manager of Publi-

cations, Delhi, 1954), Part I, p. 340.
157
expression to these.He identified himself with the common man.

He and was successful to a very great extent, in feeling the
tried
pulse of the mute millions, so that he would know what exactly
they wanted.
He would communicate with his readers. He would talk to
them, not talk at them, as Mr. Louis Fischer said. His was not a
sermon from the hill top. It was a communion with people. He
broke the convention of Town Hall speeches and pulled down the
decorated rostrums set up for brilliant speeches. He walked
straightdown to the field where millions were slogging. He would
sit with them and speak about things which affect their lives,
in a language understood by them. This was a big departure from
the technique of Indian journalism of the ’twenties and
’thirties. He was an editor leading his readers to the righteous
path. He was * Bapu ’ or father to all. He did not like to be called

Mahatma, and with his frank sincerity declared the mission of his
life. He said :
“To it has appeared to me, and in the exact manner

describe truth, as
in which I have arrived at it, has been my ceaseless effort. The exercise has
given me ineffable mental peace ....
“But is hard and steep. To attain to perfect
the path of self-purification
purity one has to become absolutely passion free in thought, speech and action ;
to rise aboye the opposing currents of love and hatred, attachment and
repulsion. I know that I have not in me as yet that triple purity, in spite of
constant ceaseless striving for it. That is why the world’s praise fails to move
me .... ”
me, indeed it often stings
Journalists began to imitate him. They went to the field and

collected stories about the common man —
his thought and feeling,
his desire and ambition. Whether it was a political, economic or
social article, it invariably centred round the masses.
Gandhiji’s editing of the Navajivan, in Gujarati, gave language

papers a prestige, they had hitherto lacked. In practically all the
provinces language papers began to be published. In a few cases
they showed the largest circulation in the country. This circulation
was not only confined to towns ; it travelled down to remote
corners. Newspapers appointed correspondents in many far away
places to get news from the villages.
“ Many of his followers were moved
and publish in the Indian
to write
languages, in imitation of his own They wrote a simple prose.
direct style.
Regional journalism began to acquire an importance and there was hardly any
158
area of the country which did not have its newspaper. These did not displace
the English Press which provided all-India media.’’*
Among the regional papers the Nayale, the Basumati, the
Nabashakti, the Sanjibani in Bengali, the Sandesh, the Lokmanya
in Marathi, the Bharat Mitra the Vishwamitra in Hindi became
,
quite well known. Pandit Madan Mohan Malaviya himself started

the Abhyudaya. Similarly, the Urdu papers, particularly Abul
Kalam Azad’s the Al Hilal, Mohammed Ali’s the Hamdard, and
others published from Lucknow and Lahore became quite popular.
In Kerala the Malayala Manorama, the Kerala the Malayalam, ,
etc., are worth mentioning in this connection. In Tamil the
Swadeshamitran, the Desabakhtan, among others, soon made their

mark.
This growth of Indian journalism was not without problems.
Newspapers had to appoint many people as correspondents,
reporters, sub-editors, etc. They were mostly new in the field.
The reports coming from them were in many cases faulty. Editors
or proprietors could not check all that was coming in as news and
being printed. In many cases, they willy-nilly, were party to the
printing of such incorrect news.
The Press Commission, much later, opined :
“ The analysis shown in inaccuracies, mistakes and slips are more numerous
in the Indian language newspapers than in those published in English.
Instances are not many of the essential facts being deliberately omitted or
suppressed to Suit the editorial policy of the newspapers. In most cases, the
many causes.” 8
mistakes are unintentional and can be attributed to
-
In 1946 47 before partition of the
,
country, the situation was
very bad. Rather than stopping rumours newspapers were adding
to these. Gandhiji in desparation said :
“The newspaperman has become a walking plague. In the East as in the

West, newspapers are fast becoming the people's Bible, the Koran, Zend-
Avesta and the Gita, rolled into one. All that appears in the papers is looked
upon as God's truth. For instance, a newspaper predicts that riots are coming,
that all the sticks and knives in Delhi have been sold out, and the news throws
everybody into a panic. That is bad. Another newspaper reports the occur-
rence of riots here and there, and blames the police with taking sides with
the Hindus in one place and the Muslims in another. Again the
man in the
street is upset. I want you all to shed this craven fear. It is not becoming of
3
Bombay, 1962), p. 190.
3
159
men and women, who believe in God and take part in the prayers, to be afraid
*
of anyone.*
On another occasion, he advised the pressmen as to their duties.
He said, “ There are occasions, when a journalist serves his pro-

fession best by his silence.”
“ But it is a journalist’s job to purvey the facts and let the public
judge for itself,” the journalist argued. Did not Gandhiji believe
in the capacity of the average man to judge correctly, provided he

had enough knowledge of facts ? But Gandhiji demurred “ Not :
knowledge of facts. What passes for fact is only impressions or

estimates of things, and estimates vary. Hence, one gets different
versions of the same event.” As an illustration, he mentioned
the parable of seven blind men of Hindustan, each one describing
the elephant differently and each one believing himself to be right.
“ What is really needed to make democracy to function is not the know-
ledge of facts, but right education. And the true function of journalism is
to educate the public mind, not to stock the public mind with wanted and
unwanted impressions. A
journalist has, therefore, to use his discretion, as
to what to report and when. As it is, the journalists are not content to stick
to the facts alone. Journalism has become the art of ‘
Intelligent anticipation
of events’.”-4
Gandhiji differentiated between news and journalists’ impression
of coming events. He would not like interpretative news, which
to him, was journalistic kite-flying. He would advise journalists
to print authentic news with no He would
fear of contradiction.
ask them to withhold news as long as it could not be verified. But,
for the journalists it was not easy to listen to his advice. Not that
they differed theoretically from him on the question of authenticity,
but because of the keen competition amongst newspapers in coming
out with the news first. What could be true with Gandhiji and
his weekly paper, could not be true with a daily newspaper with
all the competition involved in running it.
Interpretativenews was a recent phenomenon of which Gandhiji,

apart from was not very well aware. The
his basic disagreement,
readers in the West were not only getting the news but speculative
news with particular slant or with different interpretations so as
to create a public opinion the paper desired. Gandhiji would on
the other hand educate them as intelligent fellow beings. He would
4
1953), p. 247.
160
not lead them by the noose as a politician leads the masses.

To a Director of an influential British paper, Gandhiji said :
“ We are today suffering from a double evil —
the suppression of
the facts and concoction.” 5
In another of his prayer speeches, he said : “ The press was
called theFourth Estate. It was definitely a power but to misuse
that power was criminal. He was a journalist himself and he would
appeal to fellow journalists to realize their responsibility and to
carry on their work with no idea other than that of upholding the
truth ..." 6
.
But as mentioned earlier, it is difficult to maintain truth all the

time. Besides the lack of trained workers in the field of journalism,
there are other impediments in the way. The Press Commission,
in the course of its investigation, didcome across instances where
news items were suppressed in order to please advertisers. In one
case an advertiser, involved in a criminal case would influence
that papers did not print the news which were earlier supplied by
news agencies. In one case a business magnate of Ahmedabad was
stated to have been arrested in a prohibition case in Bombay. But
the Ahmedabad papers, obviously, because of pressure, did not
publish the news. The Commission also pointed out how managing
editors or influential editors ‘accommodate’ their friends by
suppressing news which otherwise could embarrass them. In
conclusion, the report says :
“ Our view is that, once the editor
feels that there is a conflict between the loyalty to his friends (includ-
ing advertisers) and his duty with the public, there is a risk of his
falling short of the high standard of his profession.” 7
There can be pressure through other means. The AU-India
Newspapers Editors’ Conference alleged that papers were put to
pressure to support the policy of political and c ommunal
organizations.
Then there is pressure from foreign Governments. The General
Manager of a prominent Bengali paper, which has since dis-
continued publication, said that nearly 75 per cent of its circulation
was in East Pakistan was due to the fact that other papers had been
• Ibid., Vol. VII, p. 282. * Ibid., Vol. VII, p. 115.

7
161
G—11
banned. Asked whether the authorities there had no objection to

it had always maintained
the policy of his paper, he answered that
an independent editorial policy “ which might have suited the
East Pakistan Government.'" 8
Bias in news presentation may also be due to the fact that a
person or a group of persons, controlling a paper, belonged to a
particular class which subscribed to a particular faith. They may
believe in the institution of private property and hence black out
any news to control them.
Gandhiji was against premature disclosure of news. He did not
entirely agree with the dictum that the Press live by disclosures."
‘
He had, as mentioned earlier, disclosed top secret matters. But he

did that after ascertaining the correctness of the fact. Like the
famous Delane he would agree that the duty of newspaper is “ to
obtain the earliest and most correct intelligence of the events of the
time and instantly, by disclosing them, to make them common
property of the nation.”
In another prayer speech, Gandhiji criticized as already referred
to the attempted disclosures of the so-called agreement reached
between the Viceroy and the Congress Working Committee.
But could the Indian journalists get away from this influence ?
There was, and still is, to some extent, some sensation-monger-
ing in the Indian press. In 1954, the Press Commission did not
notice that rise in an alarming manner, whether in headlines or in
news presentation. It said, “ .The well established news-
. . .
papers have on the whole maintained a high standard of

journalism. We are glad to state that they have avoided cheap
sensationalism and unwarranted intrusion into private lives. They
represent a decisive majority of the total circulation in India.
Objectionable features have been noticed in a small section of the
Press.”
But Shri J. Natarajan, in his book, History of Indian Journalism ,
did not agree with this. He said :
“ The press developed in those early years of freedom the sensational side
of journalism which has now become a permanent factor in Indian journalism.
The bulk of the newspapers was politically minded. A
Bengal editor-
proprietor unblushingly avowed that he had to adopt a communal policy
« Ibid., p. 352.
162
because playing down riots and disturbances curbed
his sales. ‘Even the
newsboys refuse to touch my paper if my rivals report a large number
of deaths
than I do,’ he remarked, adding eloquently that he had taken the hint
and
been justified by results.”
Yellow journalism is not easy to define. Normally, it should
be malicious and wilful publication of reports known to be false.
It may also be building up of a cock and bull story on an insigni-
ficant matter. It may also include a lurid exposure of personal
livesof individuals. Also included in it is abusive or suggestive
language to debase public tastes.
“ Yellow journalism of one type or another is increasing
in this country.
It is confined not to any particular area or language but is perhaps more
discernible in some than others. It was a matter of great concern to us to
find, instances of such yellow journalism are to be found, everywhere the
majority of the journalists, who appeared before us, had little to say about it
except of course, to condemn in general terms.” 8
The Press Commission further said,

“Wo must mention with a great deal of the objectionable
regret that
writings scurrilous, obscene, indecent and personal does exist in the Indian
Press though it is convenient to the periodical Press, and the daily newspapers
have been comparatively free from these evils.” 10
Though, more or less, the Indian Press has maintained their
position till now, its counterpart in the West was going from bad
to worse.
More than thirty years after Gandhiji commented on such
catchy or misleading displays, we find President Kennedy worried
about the same. It concerned relationship of Mrs. Kennedy with
the press ; the danger of twisted and out of context captions, is
nonetheless of concern to all. The so-called confidential type of
magazines were continuously publishing Mrs. Kennedy’s photo-
graph on covers with headlines calculated to draw the immediate
attention of the readers in thinking that “ they will learn about
the most intimate recesses of Jackie’s life.” A few samples were :
“ How long can they hide the truth from Caroline Kennedy ? ”
Though the headline was breath-taking, the story was in the form
of an advice that Caroline must be protected from over exposure
to public. Another sample : “ Told for the first time. The illness
that’s breaking Jackie’s heart.” Inside material revealed that it
was a story about the illness of the President’s father. Another
• Ibid., 10 Ibid.,
p. 346. p. 39.
163
headline :
“ The hidden life of Jackie Kennedy.’'' The story is
about Mrs. Kennedy’s love for her husband and their quiet life.
The President, it was reported, called these articles “ Chessy ” and
was considering whether steps could be taken against such
11
things.
Lord Shawcross, ex-chainnan of the British Royal Commission
on the press, whjle addressing the annual conference of the Com-
monwealth Press Union, inaugurated on June 37, 1963, by Prime
Minister Harold Macmillan, said :
“Although in many respects we have the best Press in the world, I should
lack courage if I did not say it is open to criticism here. It may be that the
Press has less influence now a days on political opinion it certainly has great ;
influenceon the manners and morals of the community. Evil communications . . .
corrupt good manners. I think we should all ask ourselves whether the
publicising of pimps, prostitutes or perverts in highly paid Interviews of feature
articles is really a good thing. Is it useful to pay large sums for the so-called
memoirs — usually written by a ghost —
of criminals convicted of crimes,
however sensational, of prostitutes, however degraded, or adulteresses, how-
ever notorious in cafe society ? . . .
“ When young women through some glandular malfunction develop unduly

large busts, whilst they may be suitable exhibits in a medical museum, is it
helpful to publish their photographs in the popular Press ? Is it wise cons-
tantly to advertise the fact (without which advertisement it would often not be
the fact) that the wages of sin are sometimes great, as for instance, when some
trollop is offered six times the salary of a Prime Minister to appear in a night
club ? I put these problems as questions
“I have heard newspapermen say that the public has to be given what it
wants. Any prostitute could say the same. But there is some truth in it. The
fact is that we get the papers, and for that matter the politicians we deserve/'
He voiced the same feelings as did Gandhiji throughout his

life, however, much Mr. Ed Mowrer, as narrated earlier, might
; differ that paper was not a school to educate the readers, and said :
“ We ordinary people, weak, untutored, open to all sorts of temptations and
influences are entitled to look to the Press for a benefident influence. There is
much that is beastly and squalid in the world. But there remains far more that
is beautiful and splendid. Let us hear more about the beautiful and splendid
and give less advertisement to the beastly and the squalid."
So far, about news, what about views ? Are the editors upholding
the standards as Gandhiji preached and practised? By and large,
these have not fallen short of the usual standard though not the —
standards of Gandhiji. But there are persons who do not think
high of the editorials. Shri Chalapathi Rao of the National Herald,
11
Time (New York, December 14, 1962), p. 54.
164
speaking on the seminar on Indian Press, 1963-73, organized by
the International Press Institute, said:
“ Much of the editorial writing lacks force, conviction of style.
Fear and
timidity, collective and individual, are inhibiting factors
and they arc often the
result of lack of freedom. If most newspaper editorials in India sound as
though they had been ground out of a macltine that manufactures manifestoes,
it is partly because of cowardice, of a certain fear of offending important
interests, of lack of conscience, anti even of a sense of duty. Tire editorial writer,
who is not usually the editor, has his problems of conformity and conscience.
This is not so difficult of adjustment. But as long as the editorial writer is merely
told what to write on or is asked to write on whatever he likes, there can be
no authentic articulation and no circulation of policy. The editorial writer
is being pushed aside, if not quite displaced, by the columnists, and while the
columnists were originally employed in America because it was thought

editorial writers lacked guts and personality, publishers now seek to buy
columnists who echo their views.”
If Gandhiji, us an editor, was able to focus the attention of the
journalists to the villages was much more successful,
of India, lie
as a writer, in influencing authors to writeon the same subject.

Presiding over the Gujarati Literary Conference on November 2,
1936, reference of which was made earlier, Gandhiji posed the
question Whom should the author write for ? For the few
:
intellectuals or for the general masses ?

Not only in style which from the Johnsonian or Maeaulayan
verbosity gave place to the Gandhiun simplicity but in the content
as well, Gandhiji revolutionized the thinking of his contemporaries.
We discussed earlier Gandhiji's contribution to Gujaiati literature.
He reformed it and helped in its all round growth. Quite a number
of Gujarati authors not only followed his style but wrote on
subjects dear to Gandhiji's heart.
In other languages also, the impact of Gandhiji was great. To
take a few examples, Shri Sankarram wrote about the ‘
Children
of the Kaveri.' Shri Humayun Kabir in Man and Rivers portrayed
the picture of rural life in Bengal. It was the day-to-day life of
common people. Land to the cultivators, as portrayed, was no
longer a piece of earth. It was part of * Bharat Mata ' — Mother
India - - which nourished them. Similar was the theme of the
writings of Shri K. S. Venkaturuman. His Murugm the Tiller
or Kandan the Patriot created quite a sensation, in Tamilnad in the
’twentiesand 'thirties. The fortitude and trials of the forties
were ably portrayed by Smt, Kamala Markandaya (Some Inner
165
Fury), Shri R. K. Narayan {^Waiting for the Mahatma), Shri Mulk

Raj Anand (Untouchable), Shri Khwaja Ahmed Abbas (Jnquilab),
Shri Bhabani Bhattacharyya (So Many Hungers), to mention a
few of the literatures produced during the period. Gandhiji’s
political movements, as they nourished and built up editors, so did
they provide ample scope to authors to wield their pen upon.
As we had seen, Gandhiji was very cautious about the freedom
of expression and liberty of the press during the political move-
ment in South Africa. In India, when the Government, with a
heavy hand, was curtailing the same, he started writing vehemently
against Government action. According to him, the duty of the
press was to expose fearlessly the defects.
Gandhiji used to say that the press lost freedom through its own
weakness. If the press behaved properly, i.e., if it was correct in
its presentation of news and views, nobody could restrict its
freedom ; but, if, on the other hand, it could not check its pen, it
might invite restrictions through its own columns. He was
constantly reminding his fellow journalists of this, all the time,
particularly during the communal tension. Under the sub-head
‘Poisonous Journalism,’ in the Young India of May 28, 1931,
Gandhiji wrote :
“ 1 have before me from journals containing some gruesome things.

extracts
There is communal and incitement to
incitement, gross misrepresentation
political violence bordering on murder. It is of course easy enough for the
Government to launch out prosecutions or to pass repressive ordinances.
These fail to serve the purpose intended except very temporarily, and in
no case they convert the writers, who often take the secret propaganda, when
the open forum of the press is denied to them."
But, as we saw, not many people were listening to his advice. It

was much worse in 1946-47, immediately before and after partition
of the country. He got so much fed up with the press that he himsel f
suggested the banning of the papers.
During the Second World War, when Gandhiji was hardening
his attitude towards the British Government which committed
India into the war without consulting her, he was, even then,
careful about publishing war news in his own paper. He would
not write anything which would embarrass the Government and
help the enemies. In the July 19, 1942, issue of the Harijan, he
wrote
“ Let me add too that without needing any pressure from outside, I am using
166
the greatest restraint in the choice of printing matter. Nothing is being cons-
ciously published that would give any clue to the ‘ enemy ' as to military
objectives or dispositions. Care is being exercised to avoid all exaggeration
or sensational matter. Adjectives and adverbs are well weighed before being
used. And they know that 1 am ever ready to acknowledge errors and mend
them.”
Gandhiji, thus, believed in self-control. As we saw earlier, he
was exhorting journalists to have control on pen. He knew the
power of the press and that is why he was cautious about self-
discipline.
But his advice was not much heeded by the journalists. Though
in the Constitution adopted in 1950, freedom of expression and
liberty of the press were guaranteed, the Government of India
had to amend it. This was because of the exigency of the situation.
People were stretching this concept of freedom of expression to
the utmost length. The judicial courts, in a few cases, exempted
people from punishment under the constitutional safeguard. Thus,
the press lost its liberty to a certain extent through its own weak-
ness —
weakness in not controlling itself in time.
What was the impact of Gandhiji on fellow journalists so far as
advertisements were concerned ? Gandhiji would not soil his
papers with advertisements. Only one paper of importance the —
Swarajya —
founded by T. Prakasam followed Gandhiji’s example.
As early as 1919, Gandhiji suggested that there should be, in
each province, only one advertising medium which could display
advertisements of things useful to the public. But it was not
accepted by any party —
- advertiser, advertising agency or the
Government.
Gandhiji had all along been crusading against immoral and
obscene advertisements. Lengthy excerpts had earlier been re-
produced on this. He was pained to see editors not averse “to
derive an income from advertisements which are obviously intended
to spread the evils which they should shun.’'’ Press Commission
also in 1954 noticed many lewd and obscene advertisements in
the paper.
To stop them, Gandhiji suggested the following courses
(1) Readers’ control. He asked the readers to stop their patronage for the
paper when they find them displaying indecent advertisements. Gandhiji
desired an enlightened public opinion which could bring a pressure on the
newspapers. He wanted women, as they were shamelessly exploited for this
167
purpose, to be the vanguard in creating public opinion. But readers, unfor-
tunately, could not, as desired by Gandhiji, put any pressure on the news-
papers.
(2) Editors' or proprietors’ control. He requested editors or the proprietors

of papers to stop publishing questionable advertisements. Mention has been
made of Gandhiji's article, dated November 14, 1936 in the Harijan where he
quoted a letter from a ‘ sister ’
requesting journalists to stop such horrible
advertisements. At least one editor, that of the Nispruha of Nagpur, as recorded
by Gandhiji, agreed with his views and forthwith stopped such advertisements.
Has the press, by and large, kept up the standard practised and
preached by Gandhiji ? To this an alternative question may be
asked : Did those who lived with or believed in Gandhiji’s way

of life uphold his standard in their day-to-day life ? Did the people
of the country, for whom Gandhiji did so much and ultimately
gave his life, practise truth ? Or in other words, why should we
expect something special from the journalists, if we do not expect
the same from other segments of the community.
In summing up, it may be said that though the journalists did
not rise up to the expectation of Gandhiji, the Press, by and large
is not worse than it was in 1948. Rather, it is showing signs of
progress, adjustment and much vigour.

Press, despite stray pulls here and there, by and large, is per-
forming a special service. It is, within its limitations, educating
the readers. While talking about its responsibility and duty, we
should not forget the handicap it faces. For foreign news it has to
depend mostly on foreign sources and news agencies. The news
etc., are to be speedily translated for language papers and edited
properly. And who does all these ? Half trained or ill trained and
lowly paid journalists ? As in case of agriculture where we have
to look to the man behind the plough, more so the journalists in
newspaper who are to be trained properly before we can expect
presentation of balanced news and views by them. Gone are the
days when a person could say that he would make a journalist out
of anyone.
Journalism is not only a craftsmanship ; it is a creative ability.
It is not a journalist’s job to print news only, but to print what is
*
fit to be printed.’ For that he has to combine in him the role of,
among others, an educationist, sociologist and an economist. He

willnot only be well versed in subjects he is to deal with, but he
has to understand their implications in the present context.
168
To be creative, he must develop the capacity to react to the events
he is going to print or count on, he will have to be knowledgeable

enough to interpret these properly. Above all, he must have the
ability to communicate things. The subjects selected are to have
universal appeal the words picked should be well chosen, clear
;
and understandable. Though the press has been compared to an

industry, it differs from an ordinary one in many respects. It is the
character of the paper, the role of the journalist, the social
importance of the written sheet, which makes it different from
industries. To quote Mr. C. P. Scott “ Whatever its position
:
or character, at least it should have a soul of its own.”

Because of the role assigned to papers, journalists have a greater
duty, than others in the society. Press has enjoyed particular
privilege. It has constitutional guarantee for its liberty. The
publishing industry, to take an example, has not any such. For that
reason people expect much from newspaper. It has been assigned
a particular role. This role of leadership it has to preserve, pursue
and foster in years to come.
In the end, let us remember the words of the First Royal Com-
mission on Press :
“There is still widespread among pressmen a sense of vocation ; they feel

a call somewhat as sailors feel the call of the sea.’’
169
All work in whatsoever sphere was a means primarily of
service in G-andhiji’s eyes. Newspapers and journals can
build up a fitting memorial to him in this matter by con-
forming or trying to conform to the unimpeachable standards
of journalism practised by our revered and beloved leader.
The Harijaiu March 29, 1948
Bibliography
Auarwal, S. N. : Constructive Programme for Congressmen , New Delhi

A.I.C.C., 1953.
Gandhian Plan of Economic Development for India , Bombay,
Padma Publications, 1944.
Gandhian Plan Re-affirmed, Bombay, Padma Publications, 1948.
Agarwala, A. N. Gandhism : A Socialistic Approach Allahabad, Kitab
:
,
Mahal, 1944.
Akkad, B. J. Mahatma Gandhi : A Short Life of Gandhiji, Bombay, Vora <&
:
Co., 1948,
Alexander, Horace : Consider India , An Essay in Values, Bombay, Asia
Publishing House, 1961.
Resisting Evil Without Arms London, Friends Peace Committee,
,
1959.
Social and Political Ideas of Mahatma Gandhi New Delhi, ,
Indian Council of World Affairs, 1949.

Andu-.y, Chatur Biiiarilal Gandhi the Saviour , Delhi, Andley Bros., 1933.
: ,
Andrews, C. F. : Mahatma Gandhi’s Ideas , including selections from his

writings, London, Allen <& Unwin, 1949.
Non-Cooperation, Madras, Ganosh & Co., 1922.
Argus Gandhism-Cum-Non- Cooperation Exposed, Assam, Author,
: 1922.
Aryan ayak am, E. W. Crisis in Education Sevagram, Hindustani
; , Talimi
Sangh, 1952.
Asaf Atl Constructive Non-Cooperation Madras, Ganesh Sc Co., 1924.
: ,
Athalye, D. V. The Life of Mahatma Gandhi Poona, Swadeshi Publishing

; ,
Co., 1923.
Aurobindo : Doctrine of Passive Resistance , Calcutta, Arya Publishing House,
1948.
AvtNASHiUNGAM, T. S. : Gandhiji's Experiments in Education , Delhi, Publica-
tions Division, 1960.
Educational Reconstruction , Wardha, Hindustani Talimi Sangh,
1939,
Balwant Singh : Under the Shelter of Bapu , Ahmedabad, Navajivan,
1962.
171
Bibliography
Bandyopadhyaya, Nrtpendra Chandra : Gandhism in Theory and Practice ,

Madras, Ganesh & Co., 1923.
Banner jee, S. : Nation in the Making, London, Oxford University Press, 1931.
Barnes, A. M. : My
dear Child Letters from M. K. Gandhi to Esther
:
Faering, Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1956.

Barnes, M. India Today and Tomorrow , London, Allen & Unwin, 1937.
:
Barns, Margarita : The Indian Press London, Allen & Unwin, 1940. ,
Baros, Jan. Mahatma Gandhi : Pictorial History of a Great Life Calcutta,

:
,
Jan Baros, 1949.

Barr, F. Mary Bapu : Conversations and Correspondence Bombay, Inter-
: ,
national Book House, 1949.

—- Mahatma Gandhi : His Life and Teachings Allahabad, Radha ,
Krishanlal, 1934.
Bedell, Clyde : Howto Write for Advertising that Sells, New York, McGraw-
Hill, 1952.
Bedi, B. P. L. (Ed.) : Gandhi's Non - Violent Weapon , Delhi, Unity Book Club
of India.
Saint of Human Rights: Gandhi ,
Delhi, Unity Book Club of
India, 1948.
Bell, R. G. Alternative to War, London, James Clarke, 1959.
:
Bernays, Robert : The Naked Fakir , London, Victor Gollancz, 1931.

Bhatnagar, R. R. Rise and Growth of Hindi Journalism Allahabad, Kitab
: ,
Mahal, 1940.
Birla, G. D. : In the Shadow of the Mahatma : a Personal Memoir Madras,
Orient Longmans, 1953.
Bolton, Glorney The Tragedy of Gandhi London, Allen & Unwin, 1934.
: ,
Bondurant, Joan V. Conquest of Violence, Princeton, Princeton University

:
Press, 1958.
Bose, Nirmal Kumar : My Days with Gandhi Calcutta, Nishana, 1953.
,
Selections from Gandhi Ahmedabad, Navajivan Publishing

House, 1948.
Studies in Gandhism , 2nd Edn., Calcutta, Indian Associated Pub-
lishing Co., 1947.
Bose, R. N. : Gandhian Technique and Tradition in Industrial Relations, All
India Institute of Social Welfare, Etc., 1956.
Bose, S. C. : Indian Struggle, London, Wishort Co., Ltd., 1935. &
Bright, J. S. Gandhi in India Lahore, Indian Printing Works, 1947.
; ,
Bryant, J. F. : Gandhi and the Indianization of Empire , Cambridge, J. Hall

and Son, 1924.
Carnegie, G. : Little Known Facts about Well-known People, Bombay, Vora
& Co., 1947.
Catun, George : In the Path ofMahatma Gandhi, London, Macdonald & Co.,
1948.
Chakravarty, Amiya : Mahatma Gandhi and Modern World ,
Calcutta, Book
House, 1945.
Chandra, Jag Parvesh (Ed.) : Gandhi Against Fascism, Lahore, Indian
Printing Works, 1944.
172
—
Bibliography
Gandhi and Tagore Argue, Lahore, Indian Printing Works,
1945.
Teachings of Mahatma Gandhi, Lahore, Indian Printing Works,
1947*
Chandiwai a, Bkijkrjshna : At the Feet of Bapu Ahmedabad, Navajivan, ,
1954.
CHATTKRJH., B. C., Gandhi or Aurobindo ? And an Appeal to Mr. Gandhi,
Calcutta, Saraswati Library, 1921.
Chatter ji i B. . L. ; Gandhi : Champion of the Proletariat , Calcutta, Prakashani,
1944.
Ckattkrjm., LautMohan : Gandhi]i, Calcutta, The Popular Agency, 1931.
—
Chaodhary, Ramnarayan
1959.
: Bapu as l Saw Him, Ahmedabad, Navajivan,
Chikou Vaunt ini. : The Emergence of Mr, Gandhi London, Macmillan , Sc

Co., 1921.
DaNg% S, A. : Gandhi vs, Lenin , Bombay, Liberty Literature, 1926.
Dantwai.a, M. L.: Gandhism Reconsidered 2nd Rev. Edn., Bombay, Padma ,
Publications, 1945.
Das, Frieda Mats mum (Hauswirth) Gandhi: A Portrait from Life, New :
York, The Vanguard Press, 1931.

Dasgupta, Arun Chandra Non-violence the Invincible Power, 2nd Edn.,
:
Calcutta, Khadi Prutisthan, 1946.

Datta, K. K. Writings and Speeches of Gandhiji Relating to Bihar 1917-
:
,
1947, Patna, Government of Bihar, 1960.

Di.saj, Chitra Sage of Sevagram, Bombay, Bharat Prakashan, 1952.
:
Dmi, Kaniual, S* Gandhi & Gandhism : Future Voice for India, Ahmedabad,
:
Sakarlal Buktkidas & Co., 1931.

Desai, Mahadi v: Diary Vol 1 (1932), Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1953.
* Gundidji in Indian VillagesOanesan, 1927. , Madras, S.
Gospel of Selfless Action or the Gita according to Gandhi, Ahmo-
dabad, Navajivan, 1956.
—— - Righteous Struggle , Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1951.
* Story of Bardoli, Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1929.
The Kpic of Truvancore Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1937. ,
.
Wardhu Interview , 1942.
With Gandhi in Ceylon: A Journal of the Tour , Madras, S. Gancsan,
1928.
Dlsaj, Vami, Cr, (Comp.): Gandhian Anthology , Ahmedabad, Navajivan,
1952.
Deshmukh, C. D. : Selected sayings of Mahatma Gandhi in Sanskrit verses
with the original 1957,
Deshpandi, M. S. : Light of India: Message of the Mahatma Bombay, Wilco
,

Deshpande, P. Q. (Comp.) Gandfdana A Bibliography of Gandhian Lite-
: ,
rature , Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1948.

Devas, S. Gandhlji & Some of his Thoughts Madras, Good Pastor Press,
: f
1949.
173
Bibliography
Dhadda, Siddharaj Gramdan : The Latest Phase of Bhoodan , Kashi, Sarva

:
Seva Sangh, 1957.

Dhawan, G. N. Political Philosophy of Mahatma Gandhi, Bombay, Popular
:
Book Depot, 1946.

Datta, Dhirendra Mohan The Philosophy of Mahatma Gandhi Madison, :
,
University of Wisconsin, 1953.

Diwakar, R. R, Glimpses of Gandhiji, Bombay, Hind Kitabs, 1949.
:
.
Satyagraha Bombay, Hind Kitabs, 1946. ,
— Satyagraha in Action Calcutta, Signet Press, 1949.

Satyagraha: The Pathway to Peace, Patna, Pustak Bhandar,
,
1950.
Doke, J. J. M. X. Gandhi : An Indian Portrait in South Africa Varanasi,
:
,
Akhil Bharat Sarva Seva Sangh Prakashan, Rajghat, 1959.

Duncan, Ronald Selected Writings of Mahatma Gandhi, London, Faber Sc
:
Faber, 1953.
Durant, Will Gandhi, New York, Simon & Schuster,
: 1930.
Dwarkadas, Kanji Gandhiji: Through My Diary Leaves : , 1915-48, Bombay,
Author, 1950.
—
Devoe, Merrill Effective Advertising Copy, New York, Macmillan, 1956.
:
Eaton, Jeanetter Gandhi : Fighter Without a Sword, New York, William

:
Morrow, 1954.
Elwin, Verrier Gandhiji—Bapu of his People Shillong, Assam Government
: ,
Press, 1956.
Religious and Cultural Aspects of Khadi Madras, Seshan, 1932. ,
Fieldon, L. Beggar my Neighbour London, Seeker and Warburg, 1943.

: ,
Finn, David Public Relations & Management

: New York, Reinhold, ,
1960.
Fischer, F. B. The Strange Little Brown Man Gandhi New York, R. Lond
: ,
and R. R. Smith, 1932.

Fischer, Louis A Week with Gandhi Bombay, International Book House,
: ,
1943.
Gandhi : His Life and Message for the World, A Signet Key
Book, 1954.
Gandhi & Stalin, Delhi, Rajkamal Publication, 1947.
Life of Mahatma Gandhi, New York, Harper Sc Brothers, 1950.
Life of Mahatma Gattdfii, London, Jonathan Cape, 1951.
Life of Mahatma Gandhi, 2 Vols., Bombay, Bharatiya Vidya
Bhavan, 1953.
Fulop- Miller, Rene Gandhi : The Holy Man, London, G. P. Putnam
:
& Sons, 1931.

Lenin and Gandhi, London, Labour Publishing Co., 1927.
Gandhi, M. K. : All Men are Brothers Life and Thought, United States, :
UNBSCO, Orient Longmans, 1959.

An Autobiography or the Story of My Experiments with Truth ,
Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1948.

Autobiography (Abridged), Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1952.
Birth Control, Bombay, Bharatiya Vidya Bhavan, 1962.
174
Bibliography
—
“ Cent Per Cent Swadeshi or the Economics of Village Industries
,

Character and Nation Building Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1959. ,
Communal Unity Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1949.

— Constructive Programme Its Meaning and Place
,
Ahmedabad, ,
,
Navajivan, 1948.
Cooperative Farming Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1959.
— ..
Correspondence with
,
the Government , 1942-44, Ahmedabad,

Navajivan, 1945.
- Correspondence with the Government, 1944-47, Ahmedabad,
Navajivan, 1959.
A’M/ Diary : Prayer Speeches from 10-9-1947 to 30-1-1948,
—Ahmedabad,Educational
Navajivan, 1948.
Philosophy of Mahatma Gandhi Ahmedabad, Nava-
,
jivan, 1953.
Famous Letters of Mahatma Gandhi (Comp. & Ed. by R. K.
Khipplc), Lahore, Indian Printing Works, 1947,
food Shortage and Agriculture Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1949.
Freedom's Battle Madras, S. Ganesan <fe Co., 1922.
— — Gandhi at \ Vork :
,
His Work Story Continued, New York, Macmil-

lan, 1931.
— : My
G ok hale Political Gum Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1958. ,
Hind Swaraj or Indian Home Rule Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1956, ,
..... Hindu Muslim Tension Its Cause and Cure Allahabad, Young
,
,
India Office, 1924.

India's Case for Swaraj, Writings and Speeches, 1931-32, Bombay,
Waman Kabadi, 1932.
- — P.
India's Food Problem , Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1960.
jai[ Experience, Madras, Tagore & Co., 1922.
Jawoltarlal Nehru : The Jewel of India, Bombay, A. T. Hingorani,
1960.
Rajhumari Amrit Kaur Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 196 I.
Letters to ,
A/v Dear Child : Letters from M. K. Gandhi to Esther Faerhrg,

—
A/v Philosophy of Life, Bombay, Pearl Publications, 1961,
*
My Religion , Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1955.
My Socialism , Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1959.
a fy Soul Agony : Statements from Ycrvada Prison , Bombay,
Provincial Board, Servants of Untouchable Society, 1932.
Non-Cooperation : Recent Speeches and Writings, Madras, S.
Ganesan Sc Co.
Panchayat Raj, Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1959*
Quit India , Bombay, Padma Publications, 1942.
Rebuilding our Villages , Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1952.
—— Buskin's Unto Last this : A Paraphrase, Ahmedabad, Nava-
jivan, 1951.
—— Sarvodaya Ahmedabad, , Navajivan, 1951.
175
Bibliography
—
—
——— -
Satyagraha
—
Sarvodaya The Welfare of all Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1954.
,
1910-35, Allahabad, A.I.C.C., 1935.

:
Satyagraha Non-Violent Resistance , Ahmedabad, Navajivan,

:
1951.
Satyagraha in South Africa , Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1950.
—— -
Selected Letters, Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1949.
Self-restraint vs. Self-Indulgence, Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1933.
— Socialism of My Conception , Bombay, Bharatiya Vidya Bhavan,
— 1957. &
— _ Speeches and Writings Madras, G. A. Natesan Co., 1918.
Thoughts on National Language Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1956.
— —
The Art of Living, Bombay, Pearl Publications, 1961.
The Good Life, New Delhi, Indian Printing Works, 1950.
The Idea of a Rural University, Wardha, Hindustani Talimi
Sangh, 1954.
The Mind of Mahatma Gandhi, (Comp. R, K. Prabhu and U. R.
— Rao), Madras, Oxford University Press, 1946.
—
The Nation's Voice : Speeches, Sept, to Dec. 1931, (Ed. C. Raja-
gopalachari and J. C. Kumarappa), Ahmedabad, Navajivan Publishing
House, 1947.
— The Story of my Life, Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1955.
i
The Wisdom of Gandhi in his own words, (Ed. by Roy Walker),

:
Calcutta, Book Company, Ltd., 1943.

— The Wit and Wisdom of Gandhi, (Ed. by Homer A. Jack), Boston,
Beacon Press, 1951.
To the Princes and their People, Karachi, Anand T. Hingorani,
1942.
To the Protagonists of Pakistan, Karachi, Anand T. Hingorani,
1943.
To the Students, Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1949.
To the Women, Karachi, Anand T. Hingorani, 1943.
Towards Lasting Peace, Bombay, Bharatiya Vidya Bhavan,
1956.
Towards New Education Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1953.
Towards Non-violent Socialism, Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1951.
— Views on Untouchability, Ed. & Published by M. Bihari Lai,
1932.
Village Industries,
Woman's Role in Society, Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1959.
Young India, 1919-1922, Madras, S. Ganesan, 1922.
Young India 1924-1926, Madras, S. Ganesan, 1927.
Young India, 1927-1928, Madras, S. Ganesan, 1935.
Gandhi, Manubehn Bapu—My Mother Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1949.
:
,
Last Glimpses of Bapu, Agra, Shivlal Agarwala & Co., 1962.

My Memorable Moments with Bapu Ahmedabad, Navajivan,
1960.
The End of an Epoch , Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1962.
176
Bibliography
Gandhi, Prabkudas : My Childhood with Gandhiji, Ahmedabad, Navajivan,
1957.
General Council of t he Press : The Press and the People London, Author, ,
I960.
Ghosh, S. L. (Ed.) : Gandhi]Ts Do or Die Mission , Calcutta, Book Corpora-
tion, 1947.
Gunther, John Inside Asia London, Harper Brothers, 1942.
: ,
Gupta, Naolndranath Gandhi and Gandhism Bombay, Hind :

, Kitabs,
1948.
Hart, E. G. (Lt. Col.) : Gandhi and the Indian Problem, London, Hutchinson
& Co., 1931.
Heath, Carl Gandhi London, Alien & Unwin, 1948.
: ,
Henderson, Archibald Mahatma Gandhi London, D. Appleton : , & Co.*

1930.
Hock in, John : First Step in Free-Lance Journalism , London, Pitman, 1947.
Hocking, W. E. : Freedom of the Press , Illinois, Chicago University Press,
1948.
Hogg, Dorothy : The Moral Challenge of Gandhi, Allahabad, Kitab Mahal*
1946.
Holmes, J. H. (Rev.) Gandhi the Modern Christ Triplicane, M. Ramaswamy
: ,
& Co.
Holmes, John Haynes My Gandhi London, Allen & Unwin, 1954. : ,
- Worlds Greatest Man Bombay, National Literature Publishing ,
Co., 1922.
What Gandhi is Teaching the World New York, The Commu-
*
,
nity Church, 1942.

Holmes, W. H. C. : Twofold Gandhi : Hindu Monk and Revolutionary Poli-
tician London, A. R. Mowbray
, Co., 1952.
Hossain, Syi i> Gandhi : the saint as statesman , Los Angeles, Suttorhouse,
:
1937.
Hoyland, John S. Cross Moves East : : A Study in the Significance of Gandhi's
Satyagralias, London, George Alien & Unwin, 1931.
They .van* Gandhi New York, Fellowship Publications, 1947.
,
Hussain, S. Arid : The Way of Gandhi and Nehru Bombay, Asia Publishing ,
House, 1959.
Huth lesing, Krishna : The Story of Gandhiji Bombay, Kutub Publishers* ,
1949.
India Government : Condition Outlook <fc Techniques, New Delhi, Education
Ministry, 1953.
M/o 1, Sc B., (Publications Division) ; The Collected Works of
Mahatma Gandhi, Vols. 1-XIV, Delhi, Publications Division, 1958-1962,
— M/o &B
Annual Reports of the Registrar of Newspapers
I. :
for India for 1956, New Delhi, Author. *57, '58, '60, '61, '62,
Iyengar, A. S. All through the Gandhian Era Bombay, Hind Kitabs, 1950.
: ,
Jack, Home r A. (Ed.) The Gandhi Reader A Source Book of His Life and
: :
Writings London, Dennis Doboon, 1958.

,
— Wit ami Wisdom of Gandhi London, Beacon Press, 1951. ,
177
G 12
Bibliography
Jain, Jagdish Chandra : / could not save Bapu, Ranaras, Jagram Sahitya Man-
dir, 1949.
Jaisinghani, A. K. : Mahatma Gandhi : A Study Karachi, Akbar Ashram,
1931.
Jajxj, Shfukrishnadas : Ideology of the Charkha Kashi, Sarva Seva , Sangh,
1957.
Japheth, M. D. : Pursuit of Truth : A Short Story of M. Gandhi Bombay,
Blaze Publications, 1948.
The Truth about Gandhi Bombay, Modys Diamond P. Works, ,
1949.
Jayaprakash Narayan : A Picture of Sarvodaya Social Order , Tanjorc,
Sarvodaya Prachuralayam, 1961.
From Socialism to Sarvodaya, Kashi, Sarva Seva Sangh, 1958.
Jeevan Dan, Tanjore, Sarvodaya Prachuralayam, 1954.
Socialism to Sarvodaya , Madras, Socialist Book Centre, 1956.
— Swaraj for the People Varanasi, Sarva Seva Sangh, 1961.
Towards a New Society, New Delhi, Congress for Cultural Free-
dom, 1958.
Jha, Shivanand A Critical Study of Gandhian Economic Thought, Agra,
:
Lakshminarayan Agarwala, 1961.

Jones, E. Stanley Mahatma Gandhi : An Interpretation London, Hoddcr
: ,
& Sloughton, 1948.

Jones, Mare Edmund Gandhi Lives, Philadelphia, Daird Mckay Co., 1948.
: &
Jha, S. C. A Concept of Planned free Press , Calcutta, Bookland, 1958.
:
Kala, Satish Chandra After Buddha Gandhiji, Author, 1948. :
Kalarathi, Mukulbhat Anecdotes from Bapu’s Life, Ahmedabad, Nava- :
jivan, 1960.
(Comp.). Ba and Bapu Ahmedabad, ,
Navajivan, 1962.
Kalelkar, Kaka (Ed.) : Bapu’s Letters to Ashram Sisters , Ahmedabad, Nava-
jivan, 1952.
Stray Glimpses of Bapu, Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1950.
Kanetkar, M. J. : Tilak & Gandhi : A Comparative Character Sketch ,
Nagpur, Author, 1935.

Karaka, D. F. : / Have Shed My Tears London, D. Appleton-Century Co.,
,
1947.
Out of Dust, Bombay, Thacker & Co., Ltd., 1940.
JCaushala, Ram Swarxjp (Comp.) Gandhian Gems
Teachings on 500 topics , : :
Ambala, Standard Publishing Co., 1954.

(Comp.) Precious Pearls Teachings of Mahatma Gandhi, New
: :
Delhi, Clifton Co., 1948.

Khanna, R. N. (Comp.) Gandhi ; Saint or Sinner through Western Eyes,
:
Lahore, Allied Indian Publishers, 1941.

Khilafat Committee Letters from the Central : KJiilafat Committee of India
and Mahatma Gandhi to His Excellency the Viceroy, Governor-General of
India.
King, Martin L. : Stride towards Freedom , the Montgomery Story , London,
Gollancz, 1959.
178
Bibliography
Kobe:, W. : Mohandas Karamchand Gandhi, 1962.

Kohu, M. S. : Mahatma Gandhi*s Confessions ,
Lahore, Associated Publica-
tions, 1943.
Kripalani, J. B. : Gandhi The Statesman, Delhi, Ranjit Printers and Publi-
,
shers, 1951,
— Gandhian Thought New Delhi, Gandhi Smarak Nidhi, 1961.
—
, .
,
.
Gandhian Way Bombay, Vora Sc Co., 1945. ,
Latest Fad : Basic Education, Wardha, H. T. Sangh, 1948.

— - Planning and Sarvodaya, Wardha, Seva Sangh, 1957, Sam
—
—
•
Gandhi Tagore & Nehru Bombay, Hind Kitabs, 1947.
,
Krishnad as Seven Months with Mahatma Gandhi Vol. I, Madras,

:
,
— S. Ganesan, 1928.
Krishnamurti, Y. G. Gandhism for Millions Patna, Pustak Bhandnr, 1949.
— :
Gandhism in the Atomic Age, Madras, Shakti Karyulayam,

.
,
— —1946.
— •
Gandhism Will Survive, Patna, Pustak Bhandar, 1949,
Neo-Gandhism Bombay, Nalanda Publications, 1954.
,
Reflections on the Gandhian Revolution, Bombay, Vora Sc Co.,

1945.
Kumarappa, Bharatan : Capitalism, Socialism or ViUagism ? Madras, Shakti
Karyalayam, 1946.
r
Oft pour Audh, Audh Publishing Trust, 1947.
with Gandhiji,
Kumar appa, J. C. : Economy of Permanence : A Quest for a social order
Wardha, A.I.V.I.A., 1948.
- - Gandhian Economic Thought , Bombay, Vora Sc Co., 1951.
— • Gandhian Way of Life, Wardha, Al.V.I.A., 1952.
Non-violent Economy <& World Peace , Wardha, Sarva Seva
—
Sangh, 1955.
-
Overall Plan for Rural Development, Wardha, A.I.V.I.A., 1948.
Planning for the People by the People , Bombay, Vora Sc Co.,
'
1954.
Why the Village Movement ? Wardha, AI.V.T.A., 1949.
Kumar appa, J, C <fe V. L. Mehta, Economics of Non-violence* 2nd Edn.,
;
Bombay, Hamara Hindustan Publications, 1955.

Planning for Sarvodaya , Sarva Seva Sangh.
*
Principles of Sarvodaya Plari, New Delhi, Sarvodaya Planning
Committee, 1950.
Kupi.r, Lu> : Passive Resistance in South Africa , London, Jonathan Cape,
1956.
Kurup, T. C X.: Gandhi and Indian regeneration Madras, New Herald ,
Office,
1922.
League of Nations : The Educational Role of the Press, Purls, League of
Nations, 1934.
Legf.r, J, A. : Mahatma Gandhi, National Literature Publishing Co., 1922.
Lesly, Philip, Public Relations Handbook , N J., Prentice-Hall, 1962*
Lester, Muriei, : Entertaining Gandhi, London, Ivor Nicholson Sc Watson,
1932 *
179
Bibliography
Gandhi : World Citizen Allahabad, Kitab Mahal, 1945. ,
My
Host the Hindu London, William and Norgate, 1931. ,
Mahadev Prasad Social Philosophy of Mahatma Gandhi, Gorakhpur, Vishwa-

:
vidyalaya Prakashan, 1958.

Maluk, B. K. Gandhi : A Prophecy Bombay, Hind Kitabs, 1948.
: ,
Mallik, GiTrdial Gandhi and Tagore Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1961.

: ,
Mangalvedkar, V. Mahatma Gandhi Madras, Indian Literature Publishers,,

: ,
1921,
Manx, R. S. : Educational Ideas and Ideals of Gandhi and Tagore , New Delhi,.
New Book Society, 1961.
Mansfield, F. i. The Complete Journalist London, Pitman, 1953.
: ,
Martin, Kingsley The Press the Public Wants London, Hogarth, 1947.
: ,
Masani, R. P. The Five Gifts, London, Collins, 1957.

:
Masani, Shakuntala Gandhi's Story, New York, Oxford University Press*

:
1950.
•
Story of Bapu
London, Oxford University Press, 1952.
Mashruwala, K. G. Gandhi and Marx Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1956.
:
Practical Non-Violence: An Ideology of Non-Violence, Ahme-

dabad, Navajivan, 1941.
of Future India, Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1953.
Vision
Mathur, J. Economic Thought of Mahatma Gandhi Allahabad*
S. (Ed.) : ,
Chaitanya Publishing House, 1962.

Essays on Gandhian Economics, Allahabad, Chaitanya Publish-
ing House, 1959.
Mathur, Vishwanatha Sahai Gandhiji, as an Educationist Delhi, Metro- : ,
Book Co., 1951

politan
Maurer, Herrymen Great Soul : The Growth of Gandhi, New York, Country
:
Life Press, 1948.

Maurice, M. S. : Ethics of Passive Resistance, 1931.
Mazumdar, Bunan Bihari: Gandhian Concept of State, Calcutta, M. C.
Sarkar & Sons, 1957.
Mazumdar, H. T. : Gandhi : The Apostle , Chicago, Universal Publishing
House, 1923.
Mahatma Gandhi—Peaceful Revolutionary, New York, Scribner,
1952.
Menon, K. N. : Passive Resistance in South Africa , New Delhi, Roxy Press*
1952.
Mtrabehn : Gleanings Gathered at BapiCs Feet, Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1949.
The Thought of Mahatma Gandhi Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1962. ,
MrsRA, B. R. V for Vinoba Madras, Orient Longmans, 1956.

: ,
Moraes, F. The Story of India, Bombay, N. V. Publishing House, 1944.

:
Mukerjee, Hiren Gandhiji—A Study, Calcutta, National Book Agency, 1958.

:
Munshi, K. M. Gandhi, the Master, Delhi, Rajkamal Publications, 1948.

:
/ follow the Mahatma Bombay, Allied, 1940.

Reconstruction of Society through Trusteeship, Bombay, Bhara-
tiya Vidya Bhavan, 1960.
Murray, Gertrude : Child Life of Gandhiji, Mad ms. Orient Longmans, 1949.
180
Bibliography
Mouthy, N. K. : Mahatma Gandhi and Other Martyrs of India, Mussoorie
Journal Press, 1948.
Nag, Kalidas Tolstoy and Gandhi, Patna, Pustak Bhandar, 1950.
:
Nair, C. Sankaran Gandhi and Anarchy; Madras, Tagore & Co., 1923.
:
Namboodiripad, E. M. S. The Mahatma and the Ism New Delhi, People's

:
,

Nanda, B. R. Mahatma Gandhi : A Biography London, Allen & Unwin, 1958.
:
,
N ar ASiMHACi a r K. T. (Ed.) Day Book of Thoughts from Mahatma Gandhi

:
,
London, Macmillan, 1951.

Navajivan Publishing House Bapu's Letters to Mira (1924-48), Ahmcdabad,:
Navajivan, 1949.
CiandhijVs Correspondence with the Government, 1944-47,
Ahmcdabad, Navajivan, 1959.
Nehru, Jawaharlal Autobiography London, Bodley Head, 1949.
: ,
Discovery of India* London, Meridian Books Ltd., 1951.

Glimpses of World History London, Lindsey Drummond , Ltd.,
1949.
Mahatma Gandhi Calcutta, Signet Press, 1949.
Nehru on Gandhi, New York, John Day, 1948.
Nehru, Krishna Gandhi New York, Didior Publishers, 1950.
: ,
Page, Kirby Is Mahatma Gandhi the Greatest Man of the Age?

: Now York,
1922.
Pal, Be pin C hander Indian Nationalism its Principles and Personalities ,
: :
Madras, S. R. Murthy & Co., 1918.

Non- Cooperation, 4 Lectures, Calcutta, Indian Book Club, 1920.
Patel, M. S. Educational Philosophy of Mahatma Gandhi Ahmcdabad,
:
Navajivan, 1953.
Peare, Catherine Owens : Mahatma Gandhi : A Bibliography for Young
People , New York, Henry Holt & Co., 1950.
PiDDiNcfTON, A. B. Bapu Gandhi London, Williams <£ Norgate, 1930.
:
Polak, H. S. L. <£ Others Mahatma Gandhi London, Odhams Press, 1949.

:
Polar, Millii; Graham : Mr. Gandhi : The Man (2nd Edn.), Bombay,
Vora Sc, Co., 1950.
Power, Paul F. : Gandhian World Affairs London, AJlen Sc Unwin, 1961, ,
Prabhu, R. K. (Ed.) : Bapu and Children Ahmcdabad, Navajivan, 1962.

(Comp.) Mohan mala, Bombay, Hind Kitabs, 1949.
77ds was Bapu, Ahmcdabad, Navajivan, 1954.
(Ed.) : Truth Called Them Differently {Tagore-Gandhi contro-
—— versy),
—
Ahmcdabad, Navajivan,
(Comp.) Truth is God, Ahmcdabad, Navajivan, 1955.
:
1961.
Prabhu, R. K. Sc U. R. Rao, (Comp.) Mind of Mahatma Gandhi, London, :
Oxford University, 1946.

Pritam Singh Gandhi* s Constructive Programme Lahore, Paramount Publi-
: »
cations, 1944.
PYAREI.AL : A Nation Builder at Work, Ahmcdabad, Navajivan, 1952.
— A Pilgrimage for Peace— Gandhi and Frontier Gandhi among
N.W.F. Pathans, Ahmcdabad, Navajivan, 1950.
18 i
G 13
Bibliography
Epic Fast, Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1932.

— , Gandhicm Techniques in the Modern World Ahmedabad, Nava-
,
jivan, 1953.
— *
Mahatma Gandhi— The Last Phase, Vols. I Sc II, Ahmedabad,
Navajivan Publishing House, 1956-58.
—
Mahatma Gandhi The Early Phase, Vol. I, Ahmedabad, Nava-
jivan Publishing House, 1965.
SantiniJcetan Pilgrimage , Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1958.
*
Thoveau, Tolstoy and Gandhiji, Calcutta, Bensons, 1958.
Towards New Horizons Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1959, (Reprint ,
from Mahatma Gandhi The Last Phase). —

Radhakrishnan, S. Mahatma Gandhi : Essays Sc Reflections Bombay,
: ,
Jaico Publishing House, 1956.

(Ed.) Mahatma Gandhi : Essays Sc Reflections on His Life and
Works, London, Allen & Unwin, 1949.
Rajendra Prasad At the feet of Mahatma Gandhi Bombay, Hind Kitabs,
: ,
1955.
—— .
Constructive Programme : Some Suggestions , Ahmedabad, Nava-
jivan, 1944.
— • —
Legacy of Gandhiji Agra, Shivalal Agarwala, 1962. ,
Mahatma Gcmdhi Sc Bihar Bombay, Hind Kitabs, 1949. ,
Satyagraha in Champaran, Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1949.

Rajkrishna Human Values Sc Technological Changes Kashi, Sarva Seva
: ,
Sangh, 1957.
Raw, J. B. : Critical Study of Non-Cooperation in India , Nagpur, Author,
1920.
Ram Prakash (Ed.) : Gandhi's Birth Control, Lahore, Diwan Publications,
1935.
Ramachandran, G. : Sheaf of Gandhi Anecdotes , Bombay, Hind Kitabs,
1945.
— Work ? Wardha, Sarva Seva Sangh, 1957.
Whither Constructive
.
The Man
Gandhi Madras, Gandhi Era Publications, 1947.
,
Raman Murthi, V. V. : Non-Violence in Politics: A Study of Gantlhian

Technique Sc Thinking Delhi, Frank Bros. Sc Co., 1958.
,
Ray, Binoy Gopal Condition Ethics , Ahmedabad, Navajivan, 1950.

:
Ray, N. R. Freedom of the Press in India Calcutta, General Pub., 1950.

:
,
Ray Chaudhury, P. C. Gandhiji' s First Struggle in India, Ahmedabad,

:
Navajivan, 1955.
Reynolds, Reginald, A. : India, Gandhi Sc World Peace London, Friends of
,
India, 1930.
Quest for Gandhi New York, Doubleday, 1952.
,
The True Book About Mahatma Gandhi London, Muller, 1959. ,
To Live in Mankind: A Quest for Gandhi London, Andre

Deutsch, 1951.
Rivett, Kenneth : Economic Thought of Mahatma Gandhi, New Delhi, Allied
Publishers, 1959.
182
Bibliography
Rolland, Rqmain Mahatma Gandhi : A Study of Indian Nationalism ,

:
Madras, Ganesan, 1923.

Mahatma Gandhi : The man who became one with the universal
bains. New York, Century Co., 1924.
Rowe, J. G. Gandhi the Mahatma London, Epsworth Press, 1931.
:
,
Roy, Kshitis Gandhi Memorial Peace Number Shantinikctan,

: Visva : ,
BJiarat i, 1949.
Rutherford, V. H. : Mahatma Gandhi London, Labour , Publishing Co,,
1927.
Saciudananda : Sarvodaya in a Communist State, Bombay, Popular Book
Depot, 1 9<5 1
Santhanam, K. : Satyagmha and the State ,

Bombay, Asia Publishing House,
1960.
Sarma, D. A. : Father of the Nation or the Life and Teachings of Mahatma
Gandhi, Madras, B. G. Paul Co., 1956.
Sarma, V. Swaminath : Essentials of Gandhism Madras, Shakti Kuryalayam,
,
1943.
Saunders, K. J. “ Mahatma Gandhi,” Chapter in The Heritage of Asia,
:
London, Students* Christian Movement Press, 1932.

Schlilphacka, B. P. Mahatma Gandhi ; .
Sen, Ela Gandhi: A Biographical S truly, Calcutta, Susil Gupta, 1945.

:
Sen, N. B. Wit and Wisdom of Mahatma Gandhi New Delhi, Now Book
: ,
Society of India, 1960.

Sen, P. K. The Press, Publication and Copyright Laws of India
: , Calcutta,
Saikar, 1958.
Sengupta, B. & R. Cuowouury, Mahatma Gandhi and India' s Struggle for
:
Swaraj, Calcutta, Modern Book Agency, 1932.

Seth, Hiralal : Gandhi in Arms Lahore, Associated Publications, 1943.
,
ShaKani, Ranjee : Mr . Gandhi, Now York, Macmillan, 1961.

Sharge, i\ Brdnath Gandhi His Life and Teachings (2nd Edn.), Lucknow,
: ,
Upper India Publishing House, 1958.

Sharma, Bishan Swarut Gandhi us a Political Thinker, Allahabad, Indian:
Press, 1956.
Sharma, Jaodish Saran : Gandhi : A Descriptive Bibliography, Delhi, S.
Chand Ac CoM 1955.
Sharp, Gene Gandhi Faces : the Storm Ahmcdubad, Navajivan, 1961. ,
Gandhi Wields the Weapon of Moral Power, Ahmedabad, Nava-

jivan, 1960.
The Meaning of Non-Violence, London, Houseman's, 1957.
.
Sukean, Vincent : Lead Kindly Light, London, Cassell & Co., Ltd., 1950.
«... - —Mahatma Gandhi New York, Allred A. Knopf, Inc., 1955. ,
Suridharani, K. Mahatma Gandhi and the World, New York, Ducll, Sloan
:
<£ Pearce, 1946,

— My India , My America , New Yotk, Ducll Sloan & Pearce, I94L
The Journalist in India , Calcutta, Patrika Syndicate, 1956.
War Without Violence : Sociology of Gandhi's Satyagraha, New
York, Haroourt, Bruce & Co., 1939.
183
Bibliography
Shrimali, K. Wardha Scheme Udaipur, Vidya Bhavan Society, 1949.

:
Shriman Narain One Week with Vinoba New Delhi, A.I.C.C., 1956.
:
Shukla, Chandrashanker (Ed.) Conversations of Gandhiji, Bombay, Vora :
& Co., 1949.

(Ed.) Gandhiji, as We Know Him, Bombay, Vora, 1945.
Bombay, Vora, 1949.
(Ed.) Incidents of Gandhiji*s Life,
(Ed.) Reminiscences of Gandhiji, Bombay, Vora & Co., 1951.
Sitaramayya, Pattabhi On Khaddar, Madras, Ganeshan & Co., 1931.:
History of Indian National Congress, 2 Volumes, Bombay, Padma

Publications, 1946.
Skinner, J. Allen : Towards a Non-Violent Society, London, Peace News,
1959.
Snow, E. Glory and Bondage London, Victor Gallancz, 1945.
:
—
,
Soman, R. J. Peaceful Industrial Relations Their Science & Technique.

:
Stern, Elizabeth-Gertrude (Levin) Women in Gandhi s Life New York,

9
:
Dodd, Mead, 1953.

Sumner, G. L. How 1 Learned the Secrets of Success in Advertising Surrey,
: ,
The World's Work, 1953.

Sunday Times Office Mahatma Gandhi : The Superman of Age, Madras.
:
Suresh Rambhai Progress of a Pilgrimage, Banaras, Sarva Seva Sangh, 1956.

:
Vinoba & His Mission Banaras, Sarva Seva Sangh, 1954. ,
Sykes, Marjorie Earth is the Lords Shri Vinoba <£ the Land Oxford,
: : ,
Church Army Press.

Taleyarkhan, H. J. H. 1 have it from Gandhiji Bombay, Jam-c-Jamshed,
:
1944.
Tendulkar, D. G. : Gandhi in Champaran, Delhi, Publications Division, 1957.
Mahatma—Life
of Mohandas Karamchand Gandhi, Vols. 1-8,
Bombay, V. K. Jhaveri and D. G, Tendulkar, 64, Walkeshwar Road, 1951-53.
Thapar, (Mrs.) Rajesh Kaur Weaponless Warrior, Lahore, Civil Military : &
Gazette, 1946.
Tikekar, S. R. Gandhigrams, Bombay, Hind Kitabs, 1947.
:
Tennyson, Hallam Saint on the March London, Victor Gollancz, 1955.

:
UNESCO All Men Are Brothers : Life and thoughts of Mahatma Gandhi as told
:
in his own words, Orient Longmans, 1959.

Unesco The Training of Journalists, Paris, Author, 1958.
:
Unnithan, T. K. N. Gandhi and Free India : (A socio-economic study).

:
The Netherlands, Wolters-Gronningen, 1956.

Vairanpillai, Mrs. and M. S. Vatranpillai, Mahatma Gandhi for the :
Millions : a Basic Biography, Tallakulam, Madura Book House, 1949.

Varma, V. P. The Political Philosophy of Mahatma Gandhi and Sarvodaya,
:
Agra, L. N. Agarwal, 1959.

Vasto, Lanza Del : Gandhi to Vinoba : The New Pilgrimage , London, Rider
&Co., 1956.
Veillier, Juluette Mahatma Gandhi Madras, Ganesh : Co., 1928. , &
Vinoba Bhave : Bhoodan Yajna ; Land Gift Mission, Ahmedabad, Nava-
jivan, 1953.
— Talks on Gita Kashi, Sarva Seva Sangh, 1958.
184
Bibiliogrctphy
Vishwanath Tyf.r The Indian Press Bombay, Padma Publishers, 1945.

:
,
Wadia, A. S. N. Mahatma Gandhi : A Dialogue in Understandings Bombay,

:
New Book Co„ 1939.

Walker, Roy Sword of Gold : A Life of Mahatma Gandhis London, Indian
:
Independence Union, 1945.

— Wisdom of Gandhi in His Own WordSs London, Andrew Daktrs,
1943.
Watson, Blanche (Comp.) Gandhi & Non-Violent Resistance , Madras,
:
Ganesh & Co., 1923.

Watson, Francis & Maurice Brown, Talking of Gandhiji Madras, Orient
:
Longmans, 1957.
Weber, T. A. Gandhis London, Pallas Publishing Co., 1939.
:
Wellock, Wilfred Gandhi as a Social Revolutionary

: Varanasi, Akhil,
Bharat Sarva Seva Sangh Prakashan, 1953.

India's Social Revolution led by Mahatma Gandhi and Now
Vinoha Bhave, Tanjore, Sarvodaya Prachuralayam, 1959.
Western Thinkers: Reflections on GandhijVs “Hind Swaraj,” Bombay,
Theosophy Coy., 1948.
Winslow, John Copley &
Vkrrifr Elwin Gandhi: The dawn of Indian
:
Freedoms London, Fleming H. Roveii Co., 1931.

Wolseu y, R. H.: Journalism in Modern India , Bombay, Asia Publishing House,
1953.
YaJnik, Indulal, K. : Gandhi as / Know Him Delhi, Danish Mahal, 1943.
,
Zachek, R. V. Advertising Techniques and Management Illinois, Irwin,

: ,
1961.
185
Institutions founded
or guided by Gandhiji
Akhil Bharat Goseva Sangh (1928), Sabarmati.

All India Harijan Sevak Sangh (1933), Rajpath, New Delhi.
All India Nature Cure Foundation (1946), Poona.
All India Spinners' Association (1925), Sevagram. KhadiVidyalaya, Se vagrant,
was also started under its auspices.
All India Village Industries Association (1934), Maganwadi, Wardha. Under
its auspices, Gramsevak Vidyalaya and Mngan Sanghrahalaya, Wardha,
also started functioning in 1938.
Dakshina Bharat Hindi (Hindustani) Prochar Sabha (1918), Thyagaraya Nagar,
Madras- 17.
Gandhi Seva Sangh (1923), Wardha.
Gujarat Vidyapeeth (1920), Ahmed aba d.
Harijan Ashram (1918), Godhra.
Hindustani Prachar Sabha (1942), Wardha.
Hindustani Talimi Sangh (1938), Sevagram, Wardha.
Kasturba Gandhi National Memorial Trust (1944), Bajajwadi, Wardha.
Majur Mahajan (the Labour Union) (1920), Mirzapur Road, Ahmedabad.
Navajivan Press (1919), Ahmedabad.
Nisargopachar Ashram (1946), Uruli-Kanchan, Poona.
Rashtriya Gujarati Shala (National Gujarati School) Satyagraha Ashram
(191 5), Sabarmati.
Satyagraha Ashram (1915), Sabarmati.
Satyagraha Ashram (1920), Wardha. Under its auspices, the following insti-
tutions at Wardha and near-abouts also started functioning at some time
or the other : (a) Kanya Ashram, (jb) Mahila Ashram, (c) Gram-Seva
Mandal, (d) Goseva Charmalaya, (e) Maharogi (Leper) Ashram, (/)
Goseva Sangh, Gopuri, (g) Gram Seva Mandal, (h) Swaraj Bltandar,
(0 Paramadhan, Panvar.
Sevagram Ashram (1936), Sogaon.
Swaraj Ashram (1922), Bardoli, Surat.
186
index
Index
Accounts, 104 Anglo-Saxon race, 10

Advertisements in Indian Opinion , Andrews, C. F., 74
Gandhiji’s views on, 26, 29, 32 ; Anantpur, 57
bring little profit to the people, Apartheid, 8
37; free from, 39, 81, 109, 116, Appreciation, a letter to a barber,
117 ; definite views in respect of, 57
newspaper ought to be conducted Approach, 133
without advertisements, curse of, Arab trade, 72
118: no party to, 119: findings Arjun, reference to the Tommy, 7
of the Press Commission, 120 mis- ;
Asiatics, disfranchisement of, 4
chievous, 121 ; objected to, 122 ; labour, 14
indecent, 124 ; fraudulent, 125 ; Association of Advertising Agencies,
Gandhiji was lighting against, 126 ; 129
reforms in, 129 ; how to stop Autobiography, originally written in
obscene, 130 ; horrible, 131 ; false, Gujarati, 97
132 ; political, 133 ; cjuestionablo,
168 ; unimpeachable standards of, Banerm, Surf.ndranath, 29
169 Bangabasi, 3 ; and Surcndranath
Aesthetic, Gandhiji's attempts In Banerjoc, 28
*
Indian Art/ 1 Bania, a businessman, 100
Afghan invasion of India, 41 Banker, Shankcrial, 38
Agriculture, 26, 32 Bapu, father to all, 158
Ahimsa, 66 Bams, Margarita, 39 ; on nationalist
Ajmalkhan, Hakim, 45 newspapers, 51
At HitaL 28 Beaverbrook, Lord, 105
AU India Spinners' Association, 119 Belgaum Session, 48
All India laiitors* Conference, 145 Besant, Mrs. Annie, 41 ; Editor
All India Newspaper Editors* Con- New India, 139
ference, 150 Bhavabhuti, 90
Allinson, <Dr/), 58 Billy Boats, 82
American Press Commission, 150 Birla,G. D., 34, 82, 109
Amrita Bazar Patrika, 1, 3 Black Ordinance, 22
Amrit Kaur, Rajkumari, 79, 84 Blaine, Senator, on recognition of
Anglo-Indian Press, 29 Indian independence by XL S,, 50
m
Index
Boer War and services offered by Correspondents, Gandhiji’s advice

Gandhiji during, 6 to, 48
Bombay Chronicle , 42, 47, 85 Cow, movement to prevent shipping
Brayne, F. L., book on rural uplift- of cows for slaughter, 2
meat, 94 C reswell, resigned his post as a
British Press, 75 manager of a gold mine, 14
British Indian Association, 1 Criminal Law Amendment Act, 29
British Medical Association, 126 Cripps, (Sir) Stafford, 60
Business Managers, 81 Criticism, 76
Crowned Head, 9
Caliph of Turkey, 140
Cape Colony, 25
Daily Express London, 105 ,
Cape of Good Hope, 3
Daily News , 1
Cases, discriminatory law, 1
Daily Telegraphy 1
Central Publicity Bureau, 39
Dandi March, 51, 143
Chaplin, Charlie, 53
Das, D. C., 85
Chamberlain, 6
Datta, S., 54
Charkha, 48
Dayananda, Swami, 94
Charkha Sangh, 119
Defence of Tndia Regulations, 29, 30
Chesney, Editor of the Pioneer 3 ,
Delane, John Thaddous, 157, 162
Children, Gandhiji's love for, 52
Democracy, 132
Chintamani, C Y., 29 Democratic Society, 147
Christ, 90
Desai, Mahadev, 38, 53, 54, 59, 63
Christian paper, 44
Dichter, (Dr.), his Motivation, 121
Chronicle , 38
Dickens, Charles, 90
Churchill, Winston, 6
Donland, Robert, 81
Circulation, increased, of Indian "
Do or Die/ call by Gandhiji, 62
Opinion 106 ,
Downs, (Miss) M. G., 17
Citizenship, rights denied, 3 ‘
Draconian Order/ against Bombay
Civilization, industrial, 93
Sentinel , the Jugantar of Bengal
Civilization, modem, 26
and the Pratap of Panjab, 60
Colonists, 9
Drugs and Magic Remedies (Objec-
Colony, hatred against and oppression
tionable Advertisements) Act of
of Indians imported into the
1954, 127
laws, 4
Colonies of Natal, 3
Colonialism, 38 Earthquake of 1939, Gandhiji’s
Community, duty of the journalist to views on the causes of, 57
the, 134 East Pakistan, 68
Congress, Calcutta, 40 ; Indian Natio- Editors, Managing, 161
nal, 45; Working Committee, 45 Emancipation, economic and social, 40
Conference, Round Table, 75 ; Guje- Emerson, influence on Gandhi, 16
rat Literary, 90, 165 Empire, mighty British, 10
Constitution, 149 English, biblical, 86
Constructive Programme , 60 English Light Horse, referred by Mr.
Copyright, Gandhiji's views on, 111, Churchill in his despat dies, 7
113 Englishman, 42
190
Index
Era, Victorian, 93 Govindaswami, 30
Expenditure and the cause of Indians Govindjee, 57
in South Afriea, 4-5 Green Pamphlet 3 ,
Grievances of Indians in South

Family Planning, 58 Africa, 5
Famine, the Central Famine Com- Griswold, Whitney, 132
mittee, 6 Gujerati businessmen, 36
Farrar, Dean, 90
Federation of Working Journalists, Hamidia Islami Society, 106
147 Harijan, 10 ; origin of the name, 55,
Fischer, Louis, 47, 79, 158 56, 59, 61; revival of, 63, 65, 67,
Format, 19 69; cause, 75, 78, 82
Forward, 49 Harijan Sewak Sangh, 110
Fourth Estate, the press, 161 Hartal, 34
Freedom of speech, of association, of Hemchand, 101
press, 143 Hendrick, George, 9
Free Press, 1 53 Hetherington, editor of Manchester
Fry, Elizabeth, 20 Guardian 151 ,
Hind Swaraj, 14
Gaekwar, 17 Hindi, propagation of, 106
Galbraith, John Kenneth, 120 Hindustan 32, 139
,
Gandhi, Chhaganlal, 17, 19, 30, 71, Hindustan Times 153 ,
94, 101, 102 His Majesty's Hotel, 43

Gandhi, Dcvadas, 47, 53, 78 Holmes, J. H., 97
Gandhi -Irwin Pact, 52 Home Rule, 33
Gandhi, Maganlal, 24, 25, 30, 32 Home Rule League, 36
Gandhi, Manila!, 16 1 Horniman, B. G., 35, 36, 37, 81, 139
Gandhi, Mrs. Ava, 99 Huxley, Aldous, on good printing, 103
Gandhi, Prahhudas, 15,94
Gandhian impact, 91 Independence, struggle for, 29; immi-
Gauhati Speech, 70 nence of, 66 ; significance of, 156
Gazette, Ladysmith, 72, 102 Independent, 41, 44
Geneva Conference on the Suppres- India, 5, 9
sion of the Circulation of and Indian Ambulance Corps, 6
Traffic in Obscene Publications, Indian Community, advantages in
123 subscribing to Indian Opinion , 10
Geneva Convention, 123 Indian National Congress, split bet-
Ohelani, Manji N„ 102 ween Extremists and the Moderates,
Gladstone, 87 23
Glenco, 74 Indian Opinion , launching of, 8, 9,
God, defying, 80 ; holy communion 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16; Athletic
with, 93 Club, 17, 19, 20, 23, 24, 26, 27, 30,
Godfrey, James, address to London 31, 38, 64, 71, 74, 77
Indian Society, 72 Indian Vegetarian, 2
Gokhalc, Oopal Krishna, 12, 17, 23, Indian Language Papers Association,
30, 137 129
Gover, Preston, 61 Indian Official Secrets Act, 137
191
Index
Indian Penal Code, 143 Khilafat Agitation, 40, 143

Indian Press (Emergency Powers) Khrushchev's address to the Supreme
Act, 144 Soviet, 133
6
Indian Society of Advertisers, 122, 129 Knowledge, for those who would
Indians, causes of the, 2 know; 112
Injustice, 38 Krishnadas, 70, 77
International Chambers of Commerce, Kruger Paul, Ex-President of the
129 South African Republic, 19
International Press Institute, 165
International Printing Press, the press Labour Party, 143
that printed Indian Opinion in Language, abusive or suggestive, 163
Phoenix, 26 Languages, Indian, 91 ; expand with
Irwin, Lord, 48 the expansion of their people, 92 ;
Islam, the spread of, 19 interested in the flourish of all, 99
Iyengar, A. S., 39, 78 Laws, repressive, 135
Leader 23
,
Jallianwala Bagh, massacre in, 34, Letters, Gandhiji’s, 98 ; Tolstoy's to

74 Gandhiji, 135
Jam and the Cricket team, 17 Liberty, criminal versus civil liberty,
Johannesburg, out-break of plague 144 ; political, 151
in, 14, 101 Liberty of speech, 143
Jorrisen,on evacuation of Indians Libido, sales of goods governed bv,
from Transvaal, 5 121
Journalism, 8 ;
debases, 32 mal- ;
Lincoln, Abraham, 20
practices in, 33 ;
service should be Link 152
,
the motto of, 56 ; active, 64 ;

truth Literature, undesirable, resulting in
in, 73 ; ignorance of the art of, the demoralization of the people,
73 ; standard of, 84 ; regional, 128
91 ; backdoor, 148 ; growth of London Vegetarian Society, 1, 2
Indian, 159 ; lack of trained wor- Lopez, M., 150
kers in, 161 ; yellow, 163 ; poi-
sonous, 166 ; a creative ability, 168 Machine, Printing, 43
Journalist, free-lance, 2, 6 ;
problems Machines, attitude towards, 133
with fellow, 50 Madras Presidency, 96
Journalistic adventure, 1 Magnetism, personal, 93
Justice, fight for, 22 Managerial training, 100, 106
Manchester Guardian , 74
Kalelkar, Kaka Saheb, 95, 111 Manilal, 42, 73
Kalelkar, Satish, 1 12 Marconi, 3
Kalidasa, 90 Martin, Kingsley, 82, 154
Kanya-Vikraya, 136 Massage Establishments, 130
Kasturbai, 63 Masses, awakening of the, 28
Kathiawad, 67 Mashruwala, K. G., 115
Kennedy, Caroline, 165 Mayo, Miss, 94
Kennedy, J. F., 163 Mazzini, 20
Kesari, 23 Mehta, Ferozeshah, 29
Kher, B. G., 116 Messiah, 34
192
Index
Meticulous, 75 of news, 89 ;
running a, 101 ;
Ministers, 69 conscientious, 134 ; tendency to

Mirabchn, 70 suit the big industrialists, 151 ;
Mission, Cabinet, 83 adding to rumours, 159

Modem Review, 49 Newspapers, role of, 3, 11, 29 ;
Mohammed Ali, Maulana, 28 vernacular, 39 ;

walking, 59
Monopoly, out-cry against, 153 Newspapor-mon, in South Africa, 3
Moplah rebellion, 78 Newspapers Proprietors' Association
Mother India* 94 in Great Britain, 127
Mother tongue, general reference Nightingale, Florence, 20
for, 91 Nispruha 168,
Morley-Minto Reforms, 23 Noakhali, 66, 68

Movement, nationalist, 12 1 Non-cooperation, 41
Mowrer, Ed, 164 Non-intcrference by Government,
Mowrer, Scott, 82 152
Mukherjeo, H., Deputy Leader of the
Communist Party in Parliament, Obituary, 40
62 Obscenity, 123
Mukorji, i. C, 104 Opinion, public, 131 ; repression of
Munshi, K. M., 96, 97, 99 public, 43
Muslims, members of the Indian Com- Ordinance, Press, 52
munity in South Africa, 20 ‘Ourselves/ the jirst editorial written
k
My Handicap/ 91 by Gandhiji, 9, 13, 24, 26
Naoroji, Daoamjai, 5, 16, 29 Pall Mall Gazette , 1
"Natal Advertiser , 72
j
Palestine,90
Natal Indian Congress, 5, 8, 9, 13 Pamphleteer, 92
Natal Mercury, 6 Panic, 66
Natal Witness, 72 Papers, Anglo-Indian, 62

Natarajan, J., 162 Parliament, 95
Natarajan, S., 81 Partition of the country, 159
National Day, 34 Patel, SarcUir Vallabhai, 67
National language, 95, 96, 99 Peace time war effort, 65
Navajivan , 36, 37, 38, 39, 45, 47 ; Perry, H. C., 53
press, 52, 53, 54, 70, 79 Perth, J. B., 30
Na&ir, Mansukhlal Hiralal, 12, 13, Phoenix Settlement, 13, 23, 24
17, 102 Trustees, 25 ; Way of Life, 26;
Nehru, Jawuharlal, 29, 47, 49, 50, 67, Trust Deed, 26, 30, 31, 32, 101
89, 152 Photographs, 17
NouflieSvS, Miss, 102 Pillay, G. P-, 3
New India , 28, 75 Poems, attributed to Gandhiji, 74

News, interpretertive, 160 Polak, Henry, joined Indian Opinion ,
Newspaper, first time Gandhi read, 14, 15 ; introduced Ruskin’s Unto
1, 8 ; promotes good and evil This Last to Gandhiji, 16, 17, 19,
equally, 33, 34 ;
Gandhi's advice 24, 71, 73, 104, 117, 156
not to read, 66; created panic, 67; Polak, (Mrs.) Millie, 151
is now an industry, 80 ; fabrication Political writing, sample of, 88
193
Index
Prabhu, R. K., 77, 85 of the Press and Books Act

Prakasam, T., his Swarajya , 43, 167 amendment of, 45
Prasad, Dr. Rajendra, 69 Reporting, 33
Prayers, 79 Resistance, Passive, 30
Press, 12 ;
as medium for the dis- Resisters, Civil, writings to boost up
semination of ideas, 29, 32, 52 ; the morale of civil resistors, 22
Indian pressmen, 61 ; Pakistani, Review, books on social problems,
67 ;
popular, 81 ; sensational, 55, 93
32 ; vernacular, attitude towards, Revolution, Industrial, 138
95 ; international, bleak prospect Riots, communal, 67
of, 102 ; future of, 104 ; Parisian, Ritch’s address at London, 102
133 ;
custodian of public interest, Robinson, John, one time Prime
137 freedom of the press in
;
Minister of the Colony of Natal, 21
England, 138 ; monopoly of, 138 ; Rolland, Romain, 80
Act of 1910, 138 ; freedom of Rowlatt Bill, 33, 34 ; Act, 38
expression, 141 ; sacred liberty of, Rowlatt Committee's recommenda-
145 ; freedom of, 148 ; Communist, tions, 141
153 ; its duty was to expose Roy, Raja Ram Mohan, 29

fearlessly the defects of, 166 Royal Commission on Press, First, 169
Press Act, objectionable features of, Ruskin, 86
40 ; objectionable matters, 150
Press Association of India, 29, 140 Saklatwala, Comrade, 76
Press, Bengali, 41 ; liberty of, 47 Salt Laws, 143
Press Commission, 146 Salt Tax, 51
Press Information Bureau, 39 Sanger, (Mrs.), 58
Press Laws Committee, 44, 45 Santinikctan, 42
Presentation, direct, was the quality Sapru, (Sir) Tej Bahadur, 44
of Gandhiji's writings, 77 Sardesai, 40
Prince of Wales, 75 Sarojini Naidu, 21
'
Prolific writer, 94 Sasaram speech, 70 ; laconic in
Prophet Mohammed, 20 speech, 79
Providence, 9 Sastry, R. V., 54
Publicity, and Gandhiji, 8 Satyagraha, 22, 23
Public Opinion, to educate, 13 Satyagraha, 28, 34, 35, 38, 73, 157
Puckle, Sir Frederick, 62, 84, 85 SatyagrahU the unregistered news-
Pulitzer, Joseph, 42 paper issued by Gandhiji, 33, 142
Pyarelal, Secretary to Mahatma Saunders, 4, 42
Gandhi, 44, 59, 66, 85, 110 Scoop, 84
Scot t, C. P., 169
Quit India, 60, 62, 85, 145 Self-control, Gandhiji's belief in, 167
Self-discipline, professional, 71
Rajagopalachari, C, Ex- Governor- Sen, Keshub Chandra, 29
General of India, 69 Sengupta, of Chittagong, 78
Rao, Chalapathi, 164 Servant , 41
Readers, most important, 92 Sowagram, 78
Reading, Lord, 48 Shawcross, Lord, 164
Registration, struggle against, 21 ; Sfiradhananda, Swami, Murder of, 88
194
Index
Simpleton, Gandhiji was called, 76 Tommy Atkins, 87

Skinner, his report on Chinese labour, Toynbee, Arnold, 121
14 Translation, 98
Sobani, Maulana Azad, 78 Trujillo regime in Dominican Re-
Social Service,30 service ; is the public, 134
principal object, 106 Trustees, 68
Solocombc, 75 Truth, 68 ; balance of judgment,
South Africa, 2, 8, 9, 14, 33 73 ;
gospel, 93
Spender, J. A., 81 Tyler, Wat, fought against unjust
Spinning Wheel, 40 taxes imposed by the King of
Sriniketan, 57 England, 20
Statesman ,
l, interview with Statesman Typogiaphy, typographical mis-
representative about the grievances takes in Indian Opinion , 18-19 ;
of Indians, 3 magic, 89
Stephen, Justice, 140
Style, was the man ; Macau layan, United Nations, 150
Sri Bipinchandrapal, Si i Balgan- Untouehability, 55
gadhar Tilak, Sri Aurobindo
Ghosh and Sri Ambika Charan Vegetarian, Gandhiji 's earliest wri-
Muzumdar wrote in, 86 Macau- ;
tings on diet,customs, festivals of
layan amplitude, 87 Johnsonian, ;
Indians, published, 1 ; the tra-
of the Thunderer of Bengal, Sri velogue, 2
Surcndranath Bancrjea, 89 ; pom- Viceroy, 148
pous 90 ;
Vidyasagar, fshwar Chandra, 20
Sugar Morelia nts Association, 152 Vidyapccth, Gujarat, 98
Swami, requested by Gandhiji to sot Viewspapcrs, 29, 59
right the Navajivan Press, 1 1 Vulgarity, 72
Vyavharik, Madanjit, ex-schoolmaster
Tagore, 34 correspondence bet-
;
of Bombay and co-worker of
ween Tagore and Gandhiji regard- Gandhiji who established the Inter-
ing cooperation, 41, 54 ; ic- national Printing Press at Durban,
joinder from Tagore about Gan- 9, 10, 11, 12
dhiji's interpretation of earth-
quake, 58 War against Government, 41
Tamil, Gandhiji started to learn, 99 West, A. H., 13, 24, 31, 32, 39
Tata, his help for the journal, 25 ;
Williams, (Dr.) Rushbrook, 44
27
gift, Winslow, Jack C, 74
Thorcau, influence on Gandhiji, 16, 86 Witness, 72
Tilak, Balgangadhar, 29, 40 Women, the role of, 65
Times , London, 71, 76 World War I, 23, 74 ; Second, 166
Time factor, 73
Times of India , 2 ; recorded expe- Yajnik, Indulal Kannaiyalal, 37
riences of battle-field, 6 ; gave a Yeravada Prison, 46, 47
detailed account of Ambulance Young India , 10, 28* 34, 38, 39, 41,
Corps, 7, 17 46, 49, 51, 53, 54, 85, 307, 142
Tolstoy, influence on GandhyP^V*S?^&k Persons (Harmful Publica-
writings, 16, 20 tiomJ^Xct, 128
195

Mahatma Gandhi The Journalist PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mahatma Gandhi The Journalist PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mahatma Gandhi The Journalist PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mahatma Gandhi

ASIA PUBLISHING HOUSE

LUCKNOW BANGALORE LONDON - NEW YORK

PRINTED nsr INDIA

Speak of me as I am nothing extenuate

Nor set down aught in malice

“ Lord Linlithgow, the Viceroy at New Delhi, said to me, ‘Gandhi

phenomenon.” Thus wrote Louis Fischer in his book A Week

That he was unique among men, need not be reiterated. He

service. Like Wickham Steed, he believed that the printing and

The author gratefully acknowledges the permission accorded so

published by Bharatiya Vidya Bhavan, Bombay; Gandhi The:

Master by K. M. Munshi, published by M/s. Rajkamal Publica-

of the Press in India by S. Natarajan and Indian Writing in English

Mukherjee, published by National Book Agency (Private) Ltd.,

and II by Dr. Pattabhi Sitaramayya, published by Padma Publica-

Co., Madras Mahatma Gandhi by H. S. L. Polak, H. N. Brails-

ford and Lord Pethick-Lawrence, published by Odhams Press Ltd.,

University of Chicago Press, Chicago, Illinois ; The Educational

A Portrait by the British Broadcasting Corporation, London, have

List of Illustrations xii

3 RUNNING THE DESK 70

4 EDITOR WITH A DIFFERENCE 86

5 MANAGING THE PAPER 100

6 CURSE OF ADVERTISEMENT 116

7 LIBERTY OF THE PRESS 135

8 IN RETROSPECT AND PROSPECT 156

Institutions Founded or Guided by Gandhiji 186

Going through the proofs Frontispiece

t Writing an editorial for the paper -s

2 Replying to correspondents* queries

3 Reading the printed copy between

5 Papers Gandhiji edited

When on arrival in London in September 1888, to study

The first one was published in the issue of February 7, 1891,

describes important Indian religious ceremonies under the caption:

A struggling barrister of Bombay

tive journalism. In April, 1893, he sailed for South

graphy, he was touring the country to enlist the support, among

in the various plantations. They were mostly Hindus, but a few

Gandhiji writes in his autobiography : “ Mr. Saunders, editor

the cause of Indians in South Africa. In tire detailed note sub-

5th July (1896)

Acquaintance with editors and working closely with the editorial

of the Natal Advertiser on January 13, 1897, i.e. immediately on

relying upon Mr. Chamberlain's promise to make representations to the

“ Tommy was then altogether lovable. Like Arjun, they went

emptied the whole contents of her basket into Tommy’s huck

Then, in the same despatch, a passionate appeal :

* Ibid. (I960), Vol. Ill, p. 141.

Launching of theweekly the Indian Opinion was no

Shri Madanjit Vyavaharik was an ex-schoolmaster of Bombay

We need offer no apology for making an appearance. The Indian

facts in their true light before the public.

Time alone will is right. But we can do very

for the consumption of all readers. The underlying spirit is in

as members of a mighty Empire. It would persistently endeavour to bring

about a proper understanding between the two communities which Providence

(ii) It would contain news specially affecting Indians